Tafsir LabMethodGitHubTürkçe

7. Sūrat al-Aʿrāf

The Qurʾān · Sūra 7: al-Aʿrāf · 206 verses · 70 sections

This commentary was written by Claude (Anthropic); it carries no religious authority and should be checked against the classical sources.

Jump to a verse

Two hundred and six verses. It is widely reported that it came down in the Meccan period; some of its verses (particularly 163-171) are also said to have come down in Medina — I adopt no firm preference. It is the second longest sūra in the Qurʾān: by number of verses it comes after al-Baqara and al-Shuʿarāʾ, but in volume of words it is second only to al-Baqara. The verses of al-Shuʿarāʾ were short (al-Shuʿarāʾ); those of al-Aʿrāf are long.

It takes its name from a word that occurs in verses 46, 47 and 48:

وَعَلَى ٱلْأَعْرَافِ رِجَالٌ يَعْرِفُونَ كُلًّۢا بِسِيمَىٰهُمْ Wa ʿala'l-aʿrāfi rijālun yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum (46)

ٱلْأَعْرَافal-aʿrāf, from the root ع-ر-ف, the plural of ʿurf. The concrete sense of the root is height and ridge: the ʿurf of a horse is the ridge of the neck where the mane ends, the ʿurf of a cockerel is its comb. From this comes the sense "a raised place, a ridge, a height". The same root also carries the sense "to know, to recognise" (maʿrifa) — and that these two senses stand side by side in a single verse (ʿala'l-aʿrāfi rijālun yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum) is the first thing to record about the name of the sūra. This passage will be treated in detail at verses 46-49, and because both what the word denotes and who those upon it are remain disputed, no preference will be imposed.

A note on naming: in the Qurʾān the names of sūras are most often not a summary of the subject but a distinctive word that occurs in the sūra — this was recorded in al-Shuʿarāʾ. Al-Aʿrāf is the same: a name taken from a scene of four verses is set at the head of a sūra of two hundred and six.


The structure of the sūra

BlockVersesSubjectWhat closes the block
I1-10The Book, the towns destroyed, the questioning and the weighingQalīlan mā tashkurūn (10)
II11-25Adam (Ādam) and Iblīs — the fullest account in the QurʾānWa minhā tukhrajūn (25)
III26-36Four addresses of yā banī Ādam: clothing, temptation, adornment, messengersHum fīhā khālidūn (36)
IV37-53The two sides meet: the people of the Fire, the people of the Garden, the people of al-AʿrāfḌalla ʿanhum mā kānū yaftarūn (53)
V54-58Creation, supplication and the likeness of the two soilsLi-qawmin yashkurūn (58)
VI59-102The sequence of prophets: Noah (Nūḥ), Hūd, Ṣāliḥ, Lot (Lūṭ), Shuʿayb + the law of destructionWa in wajadnā aktharahum la-fāsiqīn (102)
VII103-171The Moses (Mūsā) block — the longest section of the sūra (69 verses)Laʿallakum tattaqūn (171)
VIII172-186The covenant of alast, the man who slipped out of the signs, dharaʾnā li-jahannam, the namesFī ṭughyānihim yaʿmahūn (186)
IX187-206The Hour, the single soul, the helplessness of those called upon, commands to the messenger, the prostrationWa lahū yasjudūn (206) — a verse of prostration

The backbone of the sūra: one question and its three answers

From beginning to end the sūra works on a single question: what does man do with the knowledge given to him? And it asks that question from three different places.

From whereWhich versesWhat it states
From the beginning11-25, 172-174Man was given a knowledge and a word at the very outset
From history59-171The messengers came; each time the same two attitudes appeared
From the present26-36, 175-206The same two attitudes are being lived right now

And the three cornerstones of the sūra — 11-25 (Adam), 172-174 (alast), 175-177 (the man who slipped out of the signs) — are three moments of the same matter:

VerseWhat was givenWhat happened
7/19-22A prohibition and a warningThe prohibition was broken; then it was confessed (23)
7/172A testimonyThe testimony was taken; then it was forgotten
7/175-176SignsThe signs were slipped off and cast away like a worn skin

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the verbs of the three sections themselves: nahā (he forbade), ashhada (he called to witness), ātaynāhu āyātinā (We gave him Our signs). In all three there is first a giving, and then the passing of what was given out of the hand. What is commanded at the end of the sūra is exactly the reverse of this: wa'dhkur rabbaka fī nafsika (205) — to hold, to keep in hand.

The second backbone: ملأ — "the notables"

The word repeated through the sequence of prophets in this sūra is al-malaʾ, and it takes the place held in al-Shuʿarāʾ by the seal kadhdhabat … al-mursalīn.

ProphetVerse where malaʾ occursHow it is qualified
Noah60al-malaʾu min qawmih — without qualifier
Hūd66al-malaʾu'lladhīna kafarū min qawmih
Ṣāliḥ75al-malaʾu'lladhīna'stakbarū min qawmih
Shuʿayb88al-malaʾu'lladhīna'stakbarū min qawmih
Shuʿayb (a second time)90al-malaʾu'lladhīna kafarū min qawmih
Moses / Pharaoh103, 109, 127Firʿawna wa malaʾih

And malaʾ does not occur in the story of Lot (80-84) — there the addressee is directly qawmuh. This is a countable datum.

The root م-ل-أ: to fill. Malaʾ means "those who fill an assembly", that is, the body that holds the word and takes the decisions. The idea of "filling" in the root was also treated in al-Mulk and Ṣād in the pattern la-amlaʾanna jahannama; I rely on that treatment.

I record this as an observation: in the sequence of prophets in al-Aʿrāf the opposing side is never "the people" but the deciding body within the people. And in verse 75 that body is set against alladhīna'stuḍʿifū (those made weak) — the sūra presents the opposition along a line of class.

The third backbone: countable repetitions

RepetitionWhere it occursHow many
Yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh59 (Noah), 65 (Hūd), 73 (Ṣāliḥ), 85 (Shuʿayb)4
Yā banī Ādam26, 27, 31, 354
Fa-akhadhathumu'r-rajfatu fa-aṣbaḥū fī dārihim jāthimīn78 (Thamūd), 91 (Madyan)2
The pattern Lā khawfun ʿalayhim wa lā hum yaḥzanūn35, 492
Alladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā36, 40, 64, 72, 92 (as a verb), 136, 146, 147, 177, 182many
Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā56, 852
Wa yabghūnahā ʿiwajā45, 862
Ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn159 (of the people of Moses), 181 (of those We created)2
Sīmā46, 482
Announcements of destruction of the type Fa-kullan akhadhnā bi-dhanbih64, 72, 78, 84, 91, 96, 1367

Two lines must be recorded separately.

One — wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā (56) and wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā (85) are the same sentence. The first is said directly to the reader, the second in the mouth of Shuʿayb to Madyan. That is, the sūra puts its own command into the mouth of a prophet. In Hūd Table 4 it was tabulated that Sūrat Hūd does the same thing (istaghfirū rabbakum thumma tūbū ilayh → the third verse of the sūra and the mouths of three prophets). I rely on that treatment; al-Aʿrāf applies the same technique once.

Two — the sentence ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn occurs twice word for word (159 and 181). The first is about the people of Moses, the second about all created beings. I record this as an observation: the sūra shows that it issues no blanket judgement about a community by widening its own sentence. The rule of the method that "no blanket judgement is issued" (Method) finds support here from within the text itself.

The verse-ending

The dominant verse-ending of the sūra is ‑ūn / ‑īn (tashkurūn, yadhdhakkarūn, yaʿlamūn, muʾminīn, khālidīn). But the verse-ending of al-Aʿrāf is not single-toned as that of al-Shuʿarāʾ is: among the long verses, closings such as al-ghāfirīn (155), al-rāḥimīn (151), ḥakīm are scattered. The sūra takes its length from the length of its sentences; its sound pattern loosens accordingly. This is a record of fact; no reckoning of letters or numbers is entered into (al-Baqara).

Revelation and historical setting

It is widely reported that the sūra came down in the last years of Mecca. The addressees appear in three rings:

RingWhereWhat is said
The notables of Mecca2-10, 175-206Follow the Book, not the forefathers; the weighing is real
The peoples of the past59-102The same call, the same body, the same end
The community given a Book103-171What was done with the Book given

And the last section of the sūra (172-206) draws the three rings together at a single point: the scene of alast looks to all mankind, the example of insilākh to the man given a Book, the command khudhi'l-ʿafw to the messenger himself.

The basmala was treated in earlier sections; the verses are numbered without it.


7/1

الٓمٓصٓ

Alif-Lām-Mīm-Ṣād

This is one of the two disconnected-letter sequences in the Qurʾān made up of four letters (the other being al-Mr — al-Raʿd 13/1). And the sequence al-Mṣ occurs only here in the Qurʾān.

The record concerning the disconnected letters was set down in al-Baqara at 2/1 and in Ṭāhā at 20/1: what the letters mean is not known with certainty; explanations are transmitted, none of them carrying certainty. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here. Claims resting on the reckoning of letters and numbers are not used in this commentary (Method).

The one thing that belongs here is the placement of the sequence, and that is a countable datum:

SūraSequenceWhat comes after it
al-Baqara 2/1-2Alif-Lām-MīmDhālika'l-kitāb
al-Aʿrāf 7/1-2Alif-Lām-Mīm-ṢādKitābun unzila ilayk
Yūnus 10/1Alif-Lām-RāTilka āyātu'l-kitābi'l-ḥakīm
Hūd 11/1Alif-Lām-RāKitābun uḥkimat āyātuh (Hūd)
al-Raʿd 13/1Alif-Lām-Mīm-RāTilka āyātu'l-kitāb

In all five of these sūras the "Book" is named immediately after the disconnected letters. This is a verifiable pattern; I make no claim about what it means.


7/2-3

كِتَٰبٌ أُنزِلَ إِلَيْكَ فَلَا يَكُن فِى صَدْرِكَ حَرَجٌ مِّنْهُ لِتُنذِرَ بِهِۦ وَذِكْرَىٰ لِلْمُؤْمِنِينَ · ٱتَّبِعُوا۟ مَآ أُنزِلَ إِلَيْكُم مِّن رَّبِّكُمْ وَلَا تَتَّبِعُوا۟ مِن دُونِهِۦٓ أَوْلِيَآءَ قَلِيلًا مَّا تَذَكَّرُونَ

Kitābun unzila ilayka fa-lā yakun fī ṣadrika ḥarajun minhu li-tundhira bihī wa dhikrā li'l-muʾminīn · Ittabiʿū mā unzila ilaykum min rabbikum wa lā tattabiʿū min dūnihī awliyāʾ, qalīlan mā tadhakkarūn

"It is a Book sent down to you — let there be no constriction in your breast on account of it — that you may warn by it, and as a reminder to the believers. · Follow what has been sent down to you from your Lord; do not follow other guardians beside Him. How little you take to heart!"

حَرَج — the root ح-ر-ج

The concrete sense of the root: tightness, a narrow place. The lexicographers describe ḥaraj as "a place where the trees are so tangled together that one cannot get in". From this comes the sense of narrowness, distress, the tightening of the breast.

The root occurs in the sūra al-Anʿām and at 22/78 in al-Ḥajj (wa mā jaʿala ʿalaykum fi'd-dīni min ḥaraj); the use in al-Aʿrāf is different, and the difference should be recorded: there ḥaraj is a weight not laid upon the one addressed by the religion, here it is the constriction in the breast of the messenger.

The sentence that cuts in

A point of word order should be recorded. The main construction of the verse is this:

Kitābun unzila ilaykali-tundhira bihī wa dhikrā li'l-muʾminīn

That is, "it is a Book sent down to you, that you may warn by it." But a sentence comes in between the two parts: fa-lā yakun fī ṣadrika ḥarajun minh.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the position of the sentence: before the purpose of the Book's descent is stated, a note is entered about the inner state of the messenger. Before the task of warning is assigned, the distress that task will cause is named.

And this finds its answer at the end of the sūra: khudhi'l-ʿafwa wa'mur bi'l-ʿurfi wa aʿriḍ ʿani'l-jāhilīn (199) — there too the messenger is told what to do in the face of the addressee's response. The sūra opens by telling the messenger "do not be distressed" and closes by telling him "turn away".

A comparison: in al-Shuʿarāʾ at 26/3 the same place was held by laʿallaka bākhiʿun nafsaka allā yakūnū muʾminīn — there the messenger's grief was described with the words destroying himself. The same sentence was also treated in al-Kahf at 18/6. Three sūras look at the same state of the messenger with three different words:

SūraWordWhat it states
al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/3 · al-Kahf 18/6Bākhiʿun nafsakDo not grieve to the point of wearing yourself away
al-Aʿrāf 7/2Ḥaraj fī'ṣ-ṣadrA constriction of the breast
al-Ḥijr 15/97Yaḍīqu ṣadrukThe narrowing of the breast

ٱتَّبِعُوا۟وَلَا تَتَّبِعُوا۟ — the same verb, two directions

The third verse builds the whole matter of the sūra out of two verbs: ittabiʿū and lā tattabiʿū. The same root (ت-ب-ع), one an imperative and one a prohibition.

And the object of the prohibition should be recorded: awliyāʾ — "guardians", in the plural. The verse does not say "do not follow other gods"; it says "do not follow guardians".

The root و-ل-ي: nearness, adjacency. Walī — the one who is near, who takes charge of another's affair. The root was treated in al-Jāthiya and in al-Baqara at 2/257 (Allāhu waliyyu'lladhīna āmanū); I rely on that treatment.

I record this as an observation: the choice of the word overlaps with two later sentences of the sūra — innā jaʿalna'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa lilladhīna lā yuʾminūn (27) and innahumu'ttakhadhu'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa min dūni'llāh (30). That is, the prohibition of the third verse receives its ground in the twenty-seventh and thirtieth verses. This is a link that can be verified within the sūra.


7/4-5

وَكَم مِّن قَرْيَةٍ أَهْلَكْنَٰهَا فَجَآءَهَا بَأْسُنَا بَيَٰتًا أَوْ هُمْ قَآئِلُونَ · فَمَا كَانَ دَعْوَىٰهُمْ إِذْ جَآءَهُم بَأْسُنَآ إِلَّآ أَن قَالُوٓا۟ إِنَّا كُنَّا ظَٰلِمِينَ

Wa kam min qaryatin ahlaknāhā fa-jāʾahā baʾsunā bayātan aw hum qāʾilūn · Fa-mā kāna daʿwāhum idh jāʾahum baʾsunā illā an qālū innā kunnā ẓālimīn

"How many a town We destroyed; Our violence came upon them by night, or while they slept at noon. · When Our violence came upon them, they had nothing to say but, "We were indeed wrongdoers.""

Two times of day: بَيَاتًا and قَآئِلُونَ

Both words state sleep, and each is a different time.

WordRootTime
Bayātanب-ي-ت — to pass the nightThe sleep of night
Qāʾilūnق-ي-لqaylūlaSleep in the middle of the day (the noon rest)

The root ق-ي-ل: qaylūla, the short sleep taken at midday in hot regions. The word occurs also at 25/24 in al-Furqān (wa aḥsanu maqīlā) — there it is the resting place of the people of the Garden. I rely on al-Furqān.

I record this as an observation: by naming two times of sleep the verse covers the two ends of the day — and both are moments of defencelessness. The same pair will be repeated in verses 97-98 of this sūra (baʾsunā bayātan wa hum nāʾimūn / baʾsunā ḍuḥan wa hum yalʿabūn). But there the second time will not be sleep but play. The comparison of the two places will be given at 97-98.

دَعْوَىٰهُمْ — the collapse of the plea

The root د-ع-و: to call, to claim. Daʿwā is "the word put forward, the claim".

A point of word order: the sentence is built as fa-mā kāna daʿwāhum … illā an qālūa qaṣr (restriction, ḥaṣr) construction: "their claim was nothing but this".

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of the word: daʿwā means a person's defence, his assertion of a right. And the verse says that when the violence came, the content of the defence was "we were wrongdoers". That is, the defence becomes a confession.

And the sentence innā kunnā ẓālimīn is in the past tense: "we were wrongdoers". The admission is a diagnosis turned towards the past; it is not a sentence of repentance. This distinction becomes visible when it is compared with verse 23 of the same sūra (rabbanā ẓalamnā anfusanā — there a request for forgiveness follows it). This comparison will be completed at 7/23.


7/6-7

فَلَنَسْـَٔلَنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ أُرْسِلَ إِلَيْهِمْ وَلَنَسْـَٔلَنَّ ٱلْمُرْسَلِينَ · فَلَنَقُصَّنَّ عَلَيْهِم بِعِلْمٍ وَمَا كُنَّا غَآئِبِينَ

Fa-la-nasʾalanna'lladhīna ursila ilayhim wa la-nasʾalanna'l-mursalīn · Fa-la-naquṣṣanna ʿalayhim bi-ʿilmin wa mā kunnā ghāʾibīn

"We shall certainly question those to whom messengers were sent, and We shall certainly question the messengers. · We shall certainly recount to them with knowledge; for We were never absent."

That both sides are questioned

The structure of the verse must be recorded: the same verb (la-nasʾalanna) is repeated twice, with two different objects.

WhoExpression
The addresseesAlladhīna ursila ilayhim — those to whom it was sent
The messengersAl-mursalīn — those who were sent

I record this as an observation: that the questioning takes in the messengers as well stands beside the question put to Jesus (ʿĪsā) in the sūra al-Māʾida (5/116) and beside the line of al-Shuʿarāʾ that "your task is delivery". But here there is no accusation; the verb is only suʾāl, questioning.

And the twofold repetition of la-nasʾalanna is not the same as lining up two objects in a single sentence. It does not say "We shall question both these and those"; the verb is built afresh for each of them. This is an emphasis that can be read off the word order.

وَمَا كُنَّا غَآئِبِينَ

The root غ-ي-ب: to disappear from sight, to be absent. *Ghāʾib: the one who is not present.

The construction of the sentence must be recorded: a negated nominal sentence. It does not say "We were present"; it says "We were not absent".

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding: the word ghayb is generally used in the Qurʾān for the region man cannot reach (al-Baqara 2/3, al-Jinn 72/26). Here the same root is used, negated, of God: man has a ghayb; He has none. And the expression fa-la-naquṣṣanna ʿalayhim bi-ʿilmin looks to the same place: the recounting is grounded not on witnessing but on knowledge.


7/8-9

وَٱلْوَزْنُ يَوْمَئِذٍ ٱلْحَقُّ فَمَن ثَقُلَتْ مَوَٰزِينُهُۥ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْمُفْلِحُونَ · وَمَنْ خَفَّتْ مَوَٰزِينُهُۥ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ ٱلَّذِينَ خَسِرُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَهُم بِمَا كَانُوا۟ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَا يَظْلِمُونَ

Wa'l-waznu yawmaʾidhini'l-ḥaqqu fa-man thaqulat mawāzīnuhū fa-ulāʾika humu'l-mufliḥūn · Wa man khaffat mawāzīnuhū fa-ulāʾika'lladhīna khasirū anfusahum bimā kānū bi-āyātinā yaẓlimūn

"The weighing on that day is the truth. Whoever's scales are heavy, those are the ones who prosper. · And whoever's scales are light, those are the ones who have lost themselves, because they used to wrong Our signs."

The scales verses: the ring in the index

These two verses are identical in structure with 101/6-9 in al-Qāriʿa and 23/102-103 in al-Muʾminūn (fa-ammā man thaqulat mawāzīnuh… wa ammā man khaffat mawāzīnuh). The root was further treated at 21/47 in al-Anbiyāʾ (al-mawāzīna'l-qisṭ) and at 42/17 in al-Shūrā (wa anzala … al-mīzān). I rely on those treatments and do not undo the root و-ز-ن again here.

What I write is the difference that belongs here, and the table can be verified from the text:

PlaceSentenceThe name of the outcome
al-Qāriʿa 101/6-9Fa-huwa fī ʿīshatin rāḍiya / fa-ummuhū hāwiyaPlace — where he will go
al-Muʾminūn 23/102-103Fa-ulāʾika humu'l-mufliḥūn / khālidūnDuration — permanence
al-Aʿrāf 7/8-9Humu'l-mufliḥūn / khasirū anfusahumLoss — what he has lost

The word al-Aʿrāf adds is khasirū anfusahum: "they have lost themselves". What answers to the measure is neither a place nor a duration, but the person himself.

وَٱلْوَزْنُ يَوْمَئِذٍ ٱلْحَقُّ — word order

The sentence is a nominal sentence and its predicate is definite (al-ḥaqq). In Arabic a definite predicate states restriction: "the weighing on that day — that is the truth."

Two readings are transmitted, and both accord with the language:

ReadingWhat al-ḥaqq isMeaning
1The predicate"The weighing on that day is the truth" — it will take place
2An attribute of wazn / "justice" as predicate of the subject"On that day there is a true weighing" — a measure without shortfall

Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. The two readings do not exclude each other.

بِمَا كَانُوا۟ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَا يَظْلِمُونَ — the work of the preposition

A point of word order must be recorded: the verb yaẓlimūn comes here with the preposition bi-.

In Arabic ẓalama is most often directly transitive (ẓalamnā anfusanā, 7/23). Its coming with bi- gives the sense "to do wrong in the matter of something, not to put a thing in its proper place".

The concrete sense of the root ظ-ل-م is "to put a thing somewhere other than its own place"; the root was treated at 31/13 in Luqmān (inna'sh-shirka la-ẓulmun ʿaẓīm). I rely on that treatment.

I record this as my own reading: the sentence does not say "they denied Our signs"; it says "they did wrong in the matter of Our signs" — that is, they put the sign somewhere other than where it stood. And precisely this verb will be used of Pharaoh and his people in verse 103 of this sūra: fa-ẓalamū bihā ("they did wrong in the matter of the signs"). The same rare construction in two places. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.


7/10

وَلَقَدْ مَكَّنَّٰكُمْ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ وَجَعَلْنَا لَكُمْ فِيهَا مَعَٰيِشَ قَلِيلًا مَّا تَشْكُرُونَ

Wa laqad makkannākum fi'l-arḍi wa jaʿalnā lakum fīhā maʿāyish, qalīlan mā tashkurūn

"We have established you on the earth and given you the means of livelihood in it. How little you give thanks!"

مَكَّنَّا — the root م-ك-ن

The concrete sense of the root: to provide a place for something, to settle it firmly. Makān is from the same root (some lexicographers count it from the root kawn; both views are transmitted, and I do not impose a preference). Tamkīn is to give someone the power to stand and to dispose in a place.

The root was treated at 12/21 and 12/56 in Yūsuf (wa kadhālika makkannā li-Yūsufa fi'l-arḍ) and at 18/84 in al-Kahf (innā makkannā lahū fi'l-arḍ). I rely on those treatments. I record the difference: there tamkīn was an authority given to one person; here it is a ground given to all mankind.

مَعَايِش — the root ع-ي-ش

Maʿāyish, the plural of maʿīsha: the things by which life is lived, the means of livelihood. The root ع-ي-ش: to live. The same root was treated at 20/124 in Ṭāhā as maʿīshatan ḍankā (a straitened livelihood) — there the narrowing of livelihood is described, here its being given.

That the word comes in the plural must be recorded: not "a livelihood" but "livelihoods". What is stated is that there is on the earth not one path of living but many.

قَلِيلًا مَّا تَشْكُرُونَ — the overlap with the third verse

A point of word order and a link within the sūra must be recorded. The third verse ended with qalīlan mā tadhakkarūn; the tenth ends with qalīlan mā tashkurūn.

VerseClosingWhat is little
7/3Qalīlan mā tadhakkarūnThe littleness of taking to heart
7/10Qalīlan mā tashkurūnThe littleness of thanks

And the same closing was recorded at 32/9 in al-Sajda and at 23/78 in al-Muʾminūn — there it came after the giving of hearing, sight and heart. That triad will meet us again in verse 179 of al-Aʿrāf. A link can be drawn between the two places, and I give it as my own reading: the tenth verse names the ground that was given, the hundred and seventy-ninth the faculties that were given; the closing of both looks to the same place.

And two readings are transmitted of the pattern qalīlan mā:

ReadingWhat isMeaning
1Redundant (zāʾida, for emphasis)"You give very little thanks"
2Maṣdariyya"Your giving of thanks is little"

Both readings are transmitted, and they do not change the meaning in any essential way.

What this says to the present

The verse separates the giving of a possibility from the noticing of that possibility. Makkannā and jaʿalnā are in the past tense — the work is done. Tashkurūn is imperfect — it is a continuing state.

That is, the text says with a tense that what was given is complete and the answer to it is deficient. This is something that can be read off the word order; there is no need to add an interpretation to it.


There are seven tellings of this story in the Qurʾān: al-Baqara 2/30-38, al-Aʿrāf 7/11-25, al-Ḥijr 15/28-44, al-Isrāʾ 17/61-65, al-Kahf 18/50, Ṭāhā 20/115-123, Ṣād 38/71-85. That of al-Aʿrāf is the longest and the most detailed.

In this index the story has been treated three times, and in each a different layer was undone:

FileWhat was treatedThe name of the matter
al-Baqara 2/30-38The vicegerent, the names, the question of the angels, lā taqrabā, azallahumā, repentanceZalla — the slip
Ṣād 38/71-85The logical form of the anā khayrun minh syllogism, the table of خ-ي-ر, threefold emphasisQiyās — the error in reasoning
Ṭāhā 20/115-123Fa-nasiya, lam najid lahū ʿazmā, the single occurrence of abā, the words of the whisperingNisyān — forgetting

I rely on all three and do not repeat here what was treated there. The following in particular were exhausted there and will not be undone again here:

  • That the prostration is not a prostration of worship, and that istikbār in Form X means "to reckon oneself great" (al-Baqara 2/34).
  • The undoing of the syllogism anā khayrun minhu khalaqtanī min nārin wa khalaqtahū min ṭīn — the premises true, the conclusion not following from the premises; the comparison "fire burns and consumes, earth bears and brings forth"; the two-directional use of the root خ-ي-ر within Ṣād (Ṣād 38/76, al-Baqara 2/34).
  • The question whether Iblīs was an angel (al-Baqara, al-Kahf 18/50).
  • That the verbs come in the dual, and that the Qurʾān does not blame the woman separately (al-Baqara 2/35-36; as evidence Ṭāhā 20/120-121).
  • The Qurʾān's silence about the kind of tree (al-Baqara 2/35). This commentary will be silent too; no entry is made into the Isrāʾīliyyāt.

Now I write what belongs to al-Aʿrāf. Al-Aʿrāf has four differences, and all four are countable:

#What is peculiar to al-AʿrāfVerseWhere else it occurs
1Khalaqnākum thumma ṣawwarnākum — an opening in the plural address11Nowhere
2Fa-bimā aghwaytanī la-aqʿudanna lahum ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm16Nowhere
3Min bayni aydīhim wa min khalfihim wa ʿan aymānihim wa ʿan shamāʾilihimfour directions17Nowhere
4Mā nahākumā rabbukumā … illā an takūnā malakayni aw takūnā mina'l-khālidīn — the ground of the whispering20In Ṭāhā with a different sentence (20/120)

And two verbs are peculiar to al-Aʿrāf: qāsamahumā (21) and dallāhumā (22). Both will be undone separately below.


7/11

وَلَقَدْ خَلَقْنَٰكُمْ ثُمَّ صَوَّرْنَٰكُمْ ثُمَّ قُلْنَا لِلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةِ ٱسْجُدُوا۟ لِءَادَمَ فَسَجَدُوٓا۟ إِلَّآ إِبْلِيسَ لَمْ يَكُن مِّنَ ٱلسَّٰجِدِينَ

Wa laqad khalaqnākum thumma ṣawwarnākum thumma qulnā li'l-malāʾikati'sjudū li-Ādama fa-sajadū illā Iblīsa lam yakun mina's-sājidīn

"We created you, then We gave you form, then We said to the angels, 'Prostrate yourselves to Adam'; and they prostrated themselves, all but Iblīs — he was not among those who prostrated."

That the address is plural — the first difference of al-Aʿrāf

This is the only instance among the seven tellings in the Qurʾān, and it must be recorded.

SūraOpeningTo whom
al-Baqara 2/30Innī jāʿilun fi'l-arḍi khalīfaTo the angels
al-Ḥijr 15/28Innī khāliqun basharanTo the angels
Ṣād 38/71Innī khāliqun basharan min ṭīnTo the angels
Ṭāhā 20/115Wa laqad ʿahidnā ilā ĀdamNarrative
al-Aʿrāf 7/11Wa laqad khalaqnākum thumma ṣawwarnākumDirectly to the reader

The verse does not say "We created Adam"; it says "We created you." Then within the same sentence it passes over to Adam.

Two readings are transmitted, and both have been defended by the lexicographers:

ReadingGround
1The pronoun kum means Adam, because the human species is gathered in him; it means "your forefather was created"
2The pronoun really does mean all mankind; creation and forming look to the human kind, the command to prostrate to Adam

Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. But this is worth recording, and I give it as an observation: whichever reading is taken, the word order places the reader inside the story. And from the twenty-sixth verse on the sūra will call out yā banī Ādam — that is, the narrative begins with a pronoun that makes the reader an addressee and continues with a vocative that makes him an addressee.

صَوَّرْنَا — the root ص-و-ر

The sense of the root: to give a thing form, shape, figure. Ṣūra is from the same root; muṣawwir is among the names of God (al-Ḥashr 59/24).

The root was treated at 82/7-8 in al-Infiṭār (fa-sawwāka fa-ʿadalaka fī ayyi ṣūratin mā shāʾa rakkabak) and at 40/64 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) and 64/3 in al-Taghābun (wa ṣawwarakum fa-aḥsana ṣuwarakum). I rely on those treatments.

What belongs here is that the two verbs are separated by thumma:

khalaqnākumthummaṣawwarnākumthummaqulnā li'l-malāʾika

The particle ثُمَّ states sequence and interval (fāʾ states immediate sequence). That is, the text counts three stages separately: creating, forming, the command to prostrate.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the particle itself: the command to prostrate comes not immediately after the creating, but after the forming. And at 38/72 in Ṣād the ground of the command was given as fa-idhā sawwaytuhū wa nafakhtu fīhi min rūḥī — there too the taswiya (the setting in order) is named before the command. The two sūras keep the same order.

لَمْ يَكُن مِّنَ ٱلسَّٰجِدِينَ — not an act, but a belonging

The second difference of word order in al-Aʿrāf is here, and it must be recorded.

SūraThe expression used of IblīsWhat it states
al-Baqara 2/34Abā wa'stakbara wa kāna mina'l-kāfirīnThree verbs
Ṣād 38/74Istakbara wa kāna mina'l-kāfirīnTwo verbs
Ṭāhā 20/116AbāOne verb
al-Aʿrāf 7/11Lam yakun mina's-sājidīnNo verb — a not-belonging to a group

Al-Aʿrāf states not something Iblīs did but something he was not: "he was not among those who prostrated."

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the comparison of the four sūras: where the other three give the act (abā, istakbara), al-Aʿrāf gives the position. And this accords with al-Aʿrāf's building the whole story as a separation: in later sections too the sūra will always name people in two groups (farīqan hadā wa farīqan ḥaqqa ʿalayhimu'ḍ-ḍalāla, 30; aṣḥābu'l-janna / aṣḥābu'n-nār, 44). The language of al-Aʿrāf is the language of groups.

Note: the debate over whether the exception in fa-sajadū illā Iblīsa is connected (muttaṣil) or disconnected (munqaṭiʿ) — that is, whether Iblīs was counted among the angels — was treated in al-Baqara and at 18/50 in al-Kahf. I rely on those treatments; I do not repeat them here.


7/12

قَالَ مَا مَنَعَكَ أَلَّا تَسْجُدَ إِذْ أَمَرْتُكَ قَالَ أَنَا۠ خَيْرٌ مِّنْهُ خَلَقْتَنِى مِن نَّارٍ وَخَلَقْتَهُۥ مِن طِينٍ

Qāla mā manaʿaka allā tasjuda idh amartuk · Qāla anā khayrun minhu khalaqtanī min nārin wa khalaqtahū min ṭīn

"He said: 'What kept you from prostrating when I commanded you?' · He said: 'I am better than he; You created me from fire, and You created him from clay.'"

This sentence was treated twice in the index

The undoing of the sentence anā khayrun minhu khalaqtanī min nārin wa khalaqtahū min ṭīn was carried out in full at 38/76 in Ṣād, and its ground was laid at 2/34 in al-Baqara. I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them here. What was treated there:

  • The logical form of the syllogism: both premises are true (khalaqtanī min nār and khalaqtahū min ṭīn are each statements of fact); the error lies in a step of superiority that does not follow from the premises being added of its own accord.
  • "Fire burns and consumes; earth bears and brings forth" — that the comparison resting on the quality of the materials is itself faulty.
  • That Iblīs's answer says nothing at all about the command: the question was about obedience, the answer about worth.
  • The table of the root خ-ي-ر: al-akhyār (Ṣād 38/47) is an attribute that has been given, anā khayrun minh an attribute that is claimed.
  • Mā manaʿaka — not "why did you not prostrate" but "what kept you": the word order that shows prostration was taken as a matter of course.

The difference between al-Aʿrāf and Ṣād — what belongs here

The two sūras give the same sentence but build the question differently. The difference is a single letter, and it must be recorded.

SūraQuestionDifference
Ṣād 38/75Mā manaʿaka an tasjuda li-mā khalaqtu bi-yadayyAn — affirmative
al-Aʿrāf 7/12Mā manaʿaka allā tasjuda idh amartukAllā (an lā) — negative
al-Ḥijr 15/32Mā laka allā takūna maʿa's-sājidīnAllā — negative

That is, in al-Aʿrāf and al-Ḥijr the question takes the form "what kept you from not prostrating?" This is a construction that has drawn notice in Arabic, and two explanations are transmitted:

ExplanationGround
1 is redundant (for emphasis); the sense is the same as in Ṣād: "what kept you from prostrating"
2 is not redundant; the verb manaʿaka has been given by taḍmīn the sense "what drove you to this": "what carried you to not prostrating"

Both explanations have been voiced by the classical lexicographers; I do not impose a preference. Both arrive at the same result: the question is asking for a ground.

إِذْ أَمَرْتُكَ — the note al-Aʿrāf adds

In Ṣād the note added to the question was li-mā khalaqtu bi-yadayy (treated in Ṣād with the table of tafwīḍ/taʾwīl). The note al-Aʿrāf adds is a different one: idh amartuk — "when I commanded you".

I record this as an observation, and its ground is the comparison of the two sūras:

SūraAdded to the questionWhat it draws attention to
Ṣād 38/75Li-mā khalaqtu bi-yadayyTo the standing of the one prostrated to
al-Aʿrāf 7/12Idh amartukTo the command itself

And Iblīs's answer is the same in both: he speaks of the material. That is, in al-Aʿrāf the question expressly recalls the command, and the answer again passes over the command. This makes the observation recorded in Ṣād — "the question was about obedience, the answer about worth" — sharper in al-Aʿrāf, because in al-Aʿrāf the command is expressly named in the question.

طِين — the root ط-ي-ن

Ṭīn: earth mixed with water, clay. The root was treated at 38/71 in Ṣād (khāliqun basharan min ṭīn). I rely on that treatment.

The Qurʾān names the substance from which man was created with more than one word, and this is a countable datum:

WordMeaningWhere
TurābDry earth3/59, 22/5, 30/20
ṬīnEarth mixed with water7/12, 38/71, 6/2
Ṭīn lāzibSticky clay37/11
Ḥamaʾ masnūnAltered, foul-smelling mud15/26, 28, 33
Ṣalṣāl ka'l-fakhkhārDry clay like baked pottery55/14
Sulāla min ṭīnAn extract drawn from clay23/12

These words were treated separately at 55/14 in al-Raḥmān and at 23/12 in al-Muʾminūn. The one note that belongs here is this, and I give it as an observation: the word that comes out of Iblīs's mouth is ṭīn — not dry earth but clay. And with the nār (fire) he sets against it, this word forms two extremes: the most mobile and the most inert. Why the comparison is itself faulty was treated in al-Baqara and Ṣād; I rely on those treatments.


7/13

قَالَ فَٱهْبِطْ مِنْهَا فَمَا يَكُونُ لَكَ أَن تَتَكَبَّرَ فِيهَا فَٱخْرُجْ إِنَّكَ مِنَ ٱلصَّٰغِرِينَ

Qāla fa'hbiṭ minhā fa-mā yakūnu laka an tatakabbara fīhā fa'khruj innaka mina'ṣ-ṣāghirīn

"He said: 'Then go down from it! It is not for you to be great in it. Go out! You are among the lowly.'"

Three commands in succession

A point of word order must be recorded: the verse has three commands, and two of them do the same work.

OrderCommandRootWhat it states
1Fa'hbiṭه-ب-طGo down — movement downward
2Fa-mā yakūnu laka an tatakabbara fīhāthe ground
3Fa'khrujخ-ر-جGo out — movement outward

The two verbs state two different directions: hubūṭ is vertical (downward), khurūj horizontal (outward). And the ground comes in between them.

The root ه-ب-ط: to come down from a high place. The root was treated at 2/36 and 2/61 in al-Baqara (ihbiṭū miṣran) and at 11/48 in Hūd (ihbiṭ bi-salāmin minnā). I rely on those treatments.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding: the same verb (ihbiṭū) will be said to Adam too in the twenty-fourth verse. That is, in al-Aʿrāf both Iblīs and Adam receive the command "go down" — but alongside Iblīs's there stands innaka mina'ṣ-ṣāghirīn, and alongside Adam's wa lakum fi'l-arḍi mustaqarrun wa matāʿun ilā ḥīn. The same verb, with two different endings. This is a contrast that can be verified from the text.

ٱلصَّٰغِرِين — the root ص-غ-ر

The sense of the root: smallness. *Ṣaghār is explained by the lexicographers as "abasement, being brought low" — that is, not smallness of size but smallness of position.

The word will occur a second time in this sūra: wa'nqalabū ṣāghirīn (119) — used of Pharaoh's side when the sorcerers are defeated.

PlaceWhoContext
7/13IblīsThe answer to making oneself great
7/119Pharaoh's sorcerers / his sideThe answer to defeat

I record this as an observation: the sūra uses the same word both at the beginning of the story and in the middle of it. And in both places the word comes as the answer to takabbur (making oneself great) — expressly in verse 13 (an tatakabbara fīhāmina'ṣ-ṣāghirīn), indirectly in verse 119 (fa-ghulibū hunālika wa'nqalabū ṣāghirīn).

فَمَا يَكُونُ لَكَ أَن تَتَكَبَّرَ فِيهَا — the form of the ground

The sentence does not forbid by saying "do not be great"; it says "being great is not a thing that is to be yours".

The pattern mā yakūnu laka an… in Arabic gives the sense "this is not for you, this does not befit you". The same pattern was treated at 19/35 in Maryam (mā kāna li'llāhi an yattakhidha min walad) and at 33/36 in al-Aḥzāb.

I record this as my own reading: the sentence is not a prohibition but a statement of impossibility. What Iblīs did is named not as a thing forbidden to be done but as a thing that will not be. And the finding recorded in al-Baqara, that pride is not a reality but a supposition, finds its counterpart here at the level of word order — the "to reckon it so" sense of Form X / Form V and the "not a thing that will be" sense of the pattern mā yakūnu laka look to the same place.


7/14-15

قَالَ أَنظِرْنِىٓ إِلَىٰ يَوْمِ يُبْعَثُونَ · قَالَ إِنَّكَ مِنَ ٱلْمُنظَرِينَ

Qāla anẓirnī ilā yawmi yubʿathūn · Qāla innaka mina'l-munẓarīn

"He said: 'Give me respite until the day they are raised.' · He said: 'You are among those given respite.'"

The root ن-ظ-ر and inẓār

The primary sense of the root is "to look"; in Form IV (anẓara) it means "to grant someone a span of looking", that is, to give a reprieve. The three occurrences of the root were tabulated at 38/79-80 in Ṣād (Ṣād 38/15, 79, 80). I rely on that treatment.

The limit of the respite given — three sūras, two expressions

This is a difference that must be recorded, and it was tabulated as a disagreement in Ṣād. Here I only repeat the datum:

SūraWhat Iblīs askedThe answer given
al-Aʿrāf 7/14-15Ilā yawmi yubʿathūnInnaka mina'l-munẓarīn — the limit is not stated
al-Ḥijr 15/36-38Ilā yawmi yubʿathūnInnaka mina'l-munẓarīnilā yawmi'l-waqti'l-maʿlūm
Ṣād 38/79-81Ilā yawmi yubʿathūnInnaka mina'l-munẓarīnilā yawmi'l-waqti'l-maʿlūm

Al-Aʿrāf does not give the note (ilā yawmi'l-waqti'l-maʿlūm) found in the other two sūras. This is a countable absence, and the disagreement "are the two expressions the same" was tabulated in Ṣād; I do not impose a preference.

I record this as an observation: the answer does not say "as much as you asked", it says "you are among those given respite". The request contains a date; the answer contents itself with including him in a group. And al-Aʿrāf, by not naming here the limit the other two sūras set, keeps this indefiniteness of the answer.


7/16-17

قَالَ فَبِمَآ أَغْوَيْتَنِى لَأَقْعُدَنَّ لَهُمْ صِرَٰطَكَ ٱلْمُسْتَقِيمَ · ثُمَّ لَءَاتِيَنَّهُم مِّنۢ بَيْنِ أَيْدِيهِمْ وَمِنْ خَلْفِهِمْ وَعَنْ أَيْمَٰنِهِمْ وَعَن شَمَآئِلِهِمْ وَلَا تَجِدُ أَكْثَرَهُمْ شَٰكِرِينَ

Qāla fa-bimā aghwaytanī la-aqʿudanna lahum ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm · Thumma la-ātiyannahum min bayni aydīhim wa min khalfihim wa ʿan aymānihim wa ʿan shamāʾilihim, wa lā tajidu aktharahum shākirīn

"He said: 'For Your having led me astray, I shall certainly sit for them upon Your straight path. · Then I shall come at them from before them and from behind them and from their right and from their left. And You will not find most of them thankful.'"

فَبِمَآ أَغْوَيْتَنِى — the direction of the blame

This sentence is peculiar to al-Aʿrāf, and it is treated in this index here for the first time.

The root غ-و-ي: to stray from the right path, to go astray, to miss the mark. The lexicographers define ghayy as the opposite of rushd (rightness). The root was treated at 20/121 in Ṭāhā (wa ʿaṣā Ādamu rabbahū fa-ghawā); I rely on that treatment.

And this root has four occurrences in this sūra:

VerseExpressionWho
7/16Fa-bimā aghwaytanīIblīs — about himself
7/146Wa in yaraw sabīla'l-ghayyi yattakhidhūhu sabīlāThose turned away from the signs
7/175Fa-kāna mina'l-ghāwīnThe man who slipped out of the signs
7/202Yamuddūnahum fi'l-ghayyiThe brothers of the satans

Four occurrences; the first in verse 16, the last in verse 202. The sūra uses the root both at its beginning and at its end.

The grammatical question of the sentence — the particle ب

Two readings are transmitted of the bāʾ in the phrase fa-bimā aghwaytanī, and each changes the meaning:

ReadingThe function of the bāʾMeaning
1Sababiyya (stating cause)"Because You led me astray" — he gives a cause
2Qasam (the bāʾ of the oath)"By Your having led me astray" — he swears an oath

The ground of the second reading is that the answer comes as la-aqʿudanna, with the lām and the emphatic nūn; this is the pattern of the response to an oath in Arabic. Both readings have been voiced by the classical lexicographers; I do not impose a preference.

And the comparison recorded at 2/37 in al-Baqara is completed here: there Adam's prayer (rabbanā ẓalamnā anfusanā) was compared with Iblīs's sentence, and it was recorded that "Iblīs too spoke, but he gave a ground and laid the blame on God (al-Aʿrāf 7/16)". I rely on that treatment.

What belongs here is this, and I give it as an observation: Iblīs's first sentence (12) put forward his own superiority; his second sentence (16) hands off his own responsibility. There is an inconsistency between the two sentences, and the text leaves it without repair: the superiority is his own, the going astray another's.

لَأَقْعُدَنَّ لَهُمْ صِرَٰطَكَ ٱلْمُسْتَقِيمَ — the concreteness of the verb

The root ق-ع-د: to sit. That this verb is the one chosen here must be recorded: not "I shall attack" or "I shall obstruct", but "I shall sit".

A point of word order: la-aqʿudanna lahum ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīmṣirāṭ comes in the accusative, that is, in the position of an adverbial: "upon the path / along the path". In Arabic a noun of place put in the accusative without gives the sense "in that place, along that place".

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of the verb and of the position: sitting is an act of waiting and of cutting off the road; it is an act not of moving but of taking up a position. And the place chosen is not a crooked road — it is ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm, "Your straight path".

And this overlaps with verse 86 of the same sūra: Shuʿayb says to his people wa lā taqʿudū bi-kulli ṣirāṭin tūʿidūna wa taṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāhword for word the same verb, word for word the same work.

PlaceWhoSentence
7/16IblīsLa-aqʿudanna lahum ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm
7/86The notables of MadyanWa lā taqʿudū bi-kulli ṣirāṭin tūʿidūna wa taṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāh

I record this as an observation, and the table can be verified from the text: the sūra shows in the eighty-sixth verse the threat uttered in the sixteenth carried out by human hands. There are seventy verses between the two; but the verb and the object are the same.

The four directions — 7/17

This is the most distinctive sentence of al-Aʿrāf, and it is treated in full in this index here for the first time.

DirectionExpressionParticle
FrontMin bayni aydīhimmin
BehindMin khalfihimmin
RightʿAn aymānihimʿan
LeftʿAn shamāʾilihimʿan

Three things must be recorded.

One — the particle changes. In the first two directions min comes, in the last two ʿan. In Arabic min states a starting point, "out of / from the side of"; ʿan states moving away and lateral position, "over, alongside". This is a datum of word order. The lexicographers have recorded this difference and given various explanations for it; I am not in a position to transmit any of them as certain, so I record only the datum.

Two — the pair bayna yadayh / khalfah was treated earlier in the index. At 41/25 in Fuṣṣilat this pair occurred as the extent of the adorning done by the qarīns, and at 41/42 as the extent of the Book's being guarded, and it was recorded there: "in Arabic this pair is used to cover all the sides of a thing." I rely on that treatment.

And the difference of al-Aʿrāf becomes visible here:

PlaceHow many directionsFor what
Fuṣṣilat 41/25Twomā bayna aydīhim wa mā khalfahumThe extent of the adorning
Fuṣṣilat 41/42Twomin bayni yadayhi wa lā min khalfihThe extent of the guarding
Sabaʾ 34/9 · al-Baqara 2/255TwoEncompassing / knowledge
al-Aʿrāf 7/17Four — front, behind, right, leftThe extent of the approach

In two places two directions suffice for "all directions"; al-Aʿrāf counts four.

Three — and this must be recorded: up and down are not counted.

I record this as an observation. The text counts four directions and does not complete the six: fawq (above) and taḥt (below) are not in the sentence. And this is not a claim of deficiency; it is the datum of the text.

Explanations of this gap are transmitted in the classical commentaries — it is widely said that "above was not counted because it is the direction from which mercy comes". This is a transmitted view; I make no firm preference and do not use it as a proof. All I record is this: the text counts four directions, not six.

And two verses can be set side by side; this is a verifiable overlap:

PlaceExpressionDirections
al-Aʿrāf 7/17Min bayni aydīhim… wa ʿan shamāʾilihimFour
al-Anʿām 6/65Min fawqikum aw min taḥti arjulikumAbove and below — but there what comes is the punishment, not Iblīs
al-Naḥl 16/26Fa-ata'llāhu bunyānahum mina'l-qawāʿidFrom the foundations

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the comparison of the three verses: the Qurʾān uses the directions above and below in other contexts — there the agent is God. In al-Aʿrāf 7/17 the agent is Iblīs, and the directions he counts are man's horizontal surroundings. This is an explanation, not a ruling.

وَلَا تَجِدُ أَكْثَرَهُمْ شَٰكِرِينَ — and the tenth verse

The last part of the sentence must be recorded, and it establishes a link that can be verified within the sūra.

The tenth verse ended with qalīlan mā tashkurūn. The seventeenth ends with wa lā tajidu aktharahum shākirīn.

VerseWho says itSentence
7/10GodQalīlan mā tashkurūn
7/17IblīsWa lā tajidu aktharahum shākirīn

I record this as an observation: there are seven verses between the two, and both end with the same root (ش-ك-ر). One is a finding, the other a forecast. And the text does not correct Iblīs's forecast — as was also recorded at 38/82-85 of Ṣād (Ṣād), the judgement is tied not to who Iblīs is but to who follows him. I rely on that treatment.

And the choice of the word is worth recording: Iblīs does not say "they will not believe", he says "they will not give thanks". I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the word itself: shukr is the noticing of what has been given. The tenth verse had counted what was given (the earth, the means of livelihood); the seventeenth says that what was given will not be noticed.


7/18

قَالَ ٱخْرُجْ مِنْهَا مَذْءُومًا مَّدْحُورًا لَّمَن تَبِعَكَ مِنْهُمْ لَأَمْلَأَنَّ جَهَنَّمَ مِنكُمْ أَجْمَعِينَ

Qāla'khruj minhā madhʾūman madḥūrā, la-man tabiʿaka minhum la-amlaʾanna jahannama minkum ajmaʿīn

"He said: 'Go out from it, despised and driven away! Whoever of them follows you — I shall surely fill Hell with the whole lot of you.'"

مَذْءُومًا مَّدْحُورًا — two passive participles

Both words are on the pattern of the passive participle (مَفْعُول) — that is, both state "the one to whom it is done", not "the one who does".

WordRootConcrete sense
مَذْءُومذ-ء-مFaulted, despised — the root carries "to name a thing's defect"
مَّدْحُورد-ح-رPushed off and driven away, expelled

The root د-ح-ر: to push, to drive off, to send away. The root was treated at 37/9 in al-Ṣāffāt (duḥūran) — there the driving off of those who would eavesdrop on heaven was described. I rely on that treatment.

The root ذ-ء-م occurs in this index here for the first time, and it is found only in this verse in the Qurʾān. The lexicographers explain dhaʾama as "to fault, to find defective" and record its kinship with the word dhamm (blame). This kinship is a relation drawn by the lexicographers; I do not give it as a settled etymological ruling.

A point of word order must be recorded: both words stand in the position of a circumstantial accusative (ḥāl), and there is no conjunction between them. Madhʾūman madḥūrā — "despised, driven away." Sequence without a conjunction shows in Arabic that the two attributes join into a single state.

And the order of the two words is worth recording: first being despised (loss of worth), then being driven away (loss of place). I give this as my own reading: the command to leave had already been given in the thirteenth verse (fa'khruj); as it is repeated here, two attributes are added to it. That is, the second command to leave specifies the character of the first.

لَأَمْلَأَنَّ جَهَنَّمَ — the ring in the index

This sentence occurs in four places in the Qurʾān, and it was treated at 38/85 in Ṣād. I rely on that treatment.

PlaceSentence
al-Aʿrāf 7/18La-amlaʾanna jahannama minkum ajmaʿīn
Hūd 11/119La-amlaʾanna jahannama mina'l-jinnati wa'n-nāsi ajmaʿīn (Hūd)
Ṣād 38/85La-amlaʾanna jahannama minka wa mimman tabiʿaka minhum ajmaʿīn
al-Sajda 32/13La-amlaʾanna jahannama mina'l-jinnati wa'n-nāsi ajmaʿīn (al-Sajda)

The difference of al-Aʿrāf is in the pronoun: minkum — plural, "of you". In Ṣād the two parts were counted separately, minka wa mimman tabiʿaka (of you and of those who follow you); al-Aʿrāf gathers both into a single pronoun.

And the construction of the sentence must be recorded: la-man tabiʿaka minhum is a conditional clause, and its answer is directly the announcement of Hell. That is, the judgement is tied not to Iblīs but to those who follow him. The same note was entered in Ṣād — there the link of the root ت-ب-ع between 38/26 and 38/85 was established. I rely on that treatment.

What belongs here is this: in al-Aʿrāf the same root (ت-ب-ع) occurred in the third verse as a commandittabiʿū mā unzila ilaykum / wa lā tattabiʿū min dūnihī awliyāʾ. The eighteenth verse states what answers to that prohibition: la-man tabiʿaka minhum. The sūra brings its own command to its conclusion fifteen verses later. This is a link that can be verified from the text.


7/19

وَيَٰٓـَٔادَمُ ٱسْكُنْ أَنتَ وَزَوْجُكَ ٱلْجَنَّةَ فَكُلَا مِنْ حَيْثُ شِئْتُمَا وَلَا تَقْرَبَا هَٰذِهِ ٱلشَّجَرَةَ فَتَكُونَا مِنَ ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ

Wa yā Ādamu'skun anta wa zawjuka'l-jannata fa-kulā min ḥaythu shiʾtumā wa lā taqrabā hādhihi'sh-shajarata fa-takūnā mina'ẓ-ẓālimīn

"And, O Adam, dwell you and your wife in the Garden; eat from wherever you wish; but do not go near this tree, or you will be among the wrongdoers."

وَيَٰٓـَٔادَمُ — the place of the conjunction

A point of word order must be recorded: the verse begins with a wāw. Wa yā Ādam — that is, this address is built as the continuation of the preceding speech.

I record this as an observation: what is said to Iblīs and what is said to Adam are given as a single sequence of speech. In al-Baqara the two scenes were built separately (2/34 and 2/35); al-Aʿrāf joins them with a wāw.

لَا تَقْرَبَا — the pattern of the prohibition

This pattern was treated at 2/35 in al-Baqara, and it was recorded there: the prohibition is placed not on the act but on the distance that leads to the act; from this the principle of "closing the means" has been derived, and the parallel of al-Isrāʾ 17/32 (wa lā taqrabu'z-zinā) was given. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

And it was recorded at 2/187 in al-Baqara that the same pattern returns in the form tilka ḥudūdu'llāhi fa-lā taqrabūhā. I rely on that treatment as well.

The difference that belongs here is this, and the table can be verified from the text:

SūraProhibitionThe name of the outcome
al-Baqara 2/35Wa lā taqrabā hādhihi'sh-shajarataFa-takūnā mina'ẓ-ẓālimīn
al-Aʿrāf 7/19Wa lā taqrabā hādhihi'sh-shajarataFa-takūnā mina'ẓ-ẓālimīn
Ṭāhā 20/117Fa-lā yukhrijannakumā mina'l-jannaFa-tashqā — you will fall into hardship

Al-Baqara and al-Aʿrāf are word for word identical at this point. Ṭāhā, however, builds the prohibition not upon the tree but upon Iblīs, and names the outcome shaqāwa (hardship) — this was treated in Ṭāhā as the backbone of that sūra.

And the expression fa-takūnā mina'ẓ-ẓālimīn must be recorded: the outcome is given as belonging to a group — exactly like lam yakun mina's-sājidīn in the eleventh verse. The group language of al-Aʿrāf is at work here too.

And this expression overlaps with the confession in the twenty-third verse: rabbanā ẓalamnā anfusanā. The root used in the warning (ظ-ل-م) is used in the confession too. That is, the confession is made with the word of the warning. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.

مِنْ حَيْثُ شِئْتُمَا — the breadth of the permission

A point of word order: the permission comes as min ḥaythu shiʾtumā ("from wherever you wish"), the prohibition as hādhihi'sh-shajarata ("this tree") — the one open-ended, the other bounded by a demonstrative.

In al-Baqara 2/35 the permission was raghadan ḥaythu shiʾtumā ("in plenty, from wherever you wish"). Al-Aʿrāf does not give the word raghadan. This is a countable difference.

I record this as an observation: both texts give the permission before the prohibition, and the permission is wider than the prohibition. The prohibition is one tree; the permission is all the rest.


7/20-21

فَوَسْوَسَ لَهُمَا ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ لِيُبْدِىَ لَهُمَا مَا وُۥرِىَ عَنْهُمَا مِن سَوْءَٰتِهِمَا وَقَالَ مَا نَهَىٰكُمَا رَبُّكُمَا عَنْ هَٰذِهِ ٱلشَّجَرَةِ إِلَّآ أَن تَكُونَا مَلَكَيْنِ أَوْ تَكُونَا مِنَ ٱلْخَٰلِدِينَ · وَقَاسَمَهُمَآ إِنِّى لَكُمَا لَمِنَ ٱلنَّٰصِحِينَ

Fa-waswasa lahumā'sh-shayṭānu li-yubdiya lahumā mā wūriya ʿanhumā min sawʾātihimā wa qāla mā nahākumā rabbukumā ʿan hādhihi'sh-shajarati illā an takūnā malakayni aw takūnā mina'l-khālidīn · Wa qāsamahumā innī lakumā la-mina'n-nāṣiḥīn

"Then Satan whispered to them, to make plain to them what had been covered from them of their shameful parts, and he said: 'Your Lord forbade you this tree only lest you become two angels or become of those who abide for ever.' · And he swore to them: 'I am indeed one of those who wish you well.'"

وَسْوَسَ — and the difference of the particle

The root و-س-و-س: a very light, continuous sound, a sound at the level of a whisper. The lexicographers explain waswasa by "the faint sound made by ornaments touching one another". In respect of its pattern it counts as a sound-imitating word (onomatopoeia). The root was treated in al-Nās (al-waswāsi'l-khannās) and at 20/120 in Ṭāhā. I rely on those treatments.

What belongs here is a difference of particle, and it must be recorded:

PlaceVerb + particleTo whom
Ṭāhā 20/120Fa-waswasa ilayhi 'sh-shayṭānTo Adam (singular)
al-Aʿrāf 7/20Fa-waswasa lahumā 'sh-shayṭānTo the two of them (dual)

There are two differences: the number of those addressed, and the particle.

Ilā states direction ("towards him"); the lām here means "for them, to them". The lexicographers record that the usage waswasa lahū carries the tone "he whispered for him, as though on his side". This is a transmitted report; I do not give it as a settled ruling.

And the number of those addressed must be recorded: in al-Aʿrāf the whispering is to the two of them at once. At 2/35-36 in al-Baqara the coming of the verbs in the dual and the Qurʾān's not blaming the woman separately were treated; I rely on that treatment. Al-Aʿrāf strengthens that datum: the addressee of the whispering is dual as well.

سَوْءَات — the root س-و-أ

Sawʾa is the singular of sawʾāt; the root س-و-أ: to be bad, to be ugly. Sūʾ, sayyiʾa, aswaʾ are from the same root. Sawʾa is used in the sense of "the place whose exposure is not welcome", and this is a covering that comes from the word itself.

A point of word order must be recorded: the word is not directly the name of an organ. That is, the Qurʾān names the place that is to be covered not by its name but by its quality.

I record this as an observation: the word is itself a covering. And the word occurs five times in this sūra — 20, 22, 26, 27 (twice). Three of the five occurrences are in the yā banī Ādam section. That is, what is named in the story is bound immediately afterwards to the reader.

مَّا وُۥرِىَ — the work of the passive verb

The root و-ر-ي: to cover, to conceal. The same root will be repeated in verse 26 as yuwārī sawʾātikum.

A point of word order: wūriya is a passive verb — "that which had been covered". The agent is not stated.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the voice of the verb: the text does not say "what they had covered" or "what God had covered"; it says only "what had been covered". And in the twenty-sixth verse the same root will come back in the active: libāsan yuwārī sawʾātikum — there what covers is clothing, and that clothing has been sent down (anzalnā). A relation of answer can be drawn between the two verses; but I give this not as a certainty, only as a possible reading.

The content of the whispering — the second great difference of al-Aʿrāf

The twentieth verse gives Iblīs's sentence in full, and this sentence is found nowhere else in the Qurʾān:

Mā nahākumā rabbukumā ʿan hādhihi'sh-shajarati illā an takūnā malakayni aw takūnā mina'l-khālidīn

The construction of the sentence is a restriction (ḥaṣr, qaṣr): mā … illā — "He did not forbid it, except for this".

That is, Iblīs alters the ground of the prohibition: the prohibition is presented not as protection but as obstruction.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the grammatical structure of the sentence: Iblīs does not deny the prohibition. He accepts that it exists, and renames its intention. And this is an operation of the same kind as the syllogism in the twelfth verse: there a false conclusion was added to true premises; here a false ground is added to a true piece of knowledge (that there is a prohibition).

مَلَكَيْنِ — a variant reading

There is a variant reading in this word that changes the meaning, and it must be recorded:

ReadingSpellingMeaning
malakayniمَلَكَيْنِTwo angels
malikayniمَلِكَيْنِTwo kings

The first reading is the widespread one; the second is also transmitted. I do not impose a preference.

As ground for the second reading the sentence at 20/120 in Ṭāhā is cited: hal adulluka ʿalā shajarati'l-khuldi wa mulkin lā yablā — "the tree of immortality and a kingdom that does not decay". That is, the two things promised in Ṭāhā are immortality and kingship.

The two sūras can be compared, and the table can be verified from the text:

SūraThe first thing promisedThe second thing promised
al-Aʿrāf 7/20Malakayn (or malikayn)Mina'l-khālidīn — those who abide for ever
Ṭāhā 20/120Mulkin lā yablā — a kingdom that does not decayShajarati'l-khuld — the tree of immortality

In both sūras the second thing is the same: immortality. In the first thing the widespread reading of al-Aʿrāf says "angel", that of Ṭāhā says "kingdom". This promise was treated at 20/120-123 in Ṭāhā; I rely on that treatment.

I record this as an observation: both promises are promises of crossing man's limit — one of kind (to become an angel or a king), the other of duration (to become deathless). And read together with the four directions of the seventeenth verse, it becomes visible that Iblīs's offers are always a promise of widening. This is an explanation, not a ruling.

وَقَاسَمَهُمَآ — the point of Form III

The root ق-س-م: to divide, to apportion; qasam is an oath. Qāsama is a verb of Form III (فَاعَلَ), and this form in Arabic states reciprocity.

A point of word order must be recorded, and the lexicographers have recorded it: qāsamahumā — "he exchanged oaths with them". The verb is in a pattern that implies not merely that Iblīs swore, but as though there were a mutual swearing.

Two explanations are transmitted:

ExplanationGround
1Form III is here for intensification; it states a one-sided but insistent oath
2There really is reciprocity: Iblīs swore, and they declared their trust in him

Both explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding: the choice of the verb shows that the deception is built not like a one-way assault but like an exchange. And the verb dallāhumā in the next verse will look to the same place.

ٱلنَّٰصِحِين — and the sequence of prophets in the sūra

The root ن-ص-ح: to make a thing pure and unmixed (honey is called nāṣiḥ, "unmixed") and to sew up a tear (niṣāḥa — sewing). Both branches are recorded: counsel carries both the idea of sincerity and the idea of mending.

And this must be recorded — it is a pattern that can be verified within the sūra: the same root occurs four times in the sequence of prophets in al-Aʿrāf, and in all four it is used of true prophets.

VerseWhoExpression
7/21IblīsInnī lakumā la-mina'n-nāṣiḥīn
7/62NoahWa anṣaḥu lakum
7/68HūdWa anā lakum nāṣiḥun amīn
7/79ṢāliḥWa naṣaḥtu lakum wa lākin lā tuḥibbūna'n-nāṣiḥīn
7/93ShuʿaybWa naṣaḥtu lakum

Five occurrences: one in the mouth of Iblīs, four in the mouths of prophets.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the five verses themselves: the sūra puts the same claim into the mouth of the liar and of the truthful alike — and shows what separates them not in the words but in the outcome. Ṣāliḥ's sentence in the seventy-ninth verse is the ground of this reading: wa lākin lā tuḥibbūna'n-nāṣiḥīn — "but you do not love those who wish you well." That is, the truth of the words is not measured by their being accepted.


7/22

فَدَلَّىٰهُمَا بِغُرُورٍ فَلَمَّا ذَاقَا ٱلشَّجَرَةَ بَدَتْ لَهُمَا سَوْءَٰتُهُمَا وَطَفِقَا يَخْصِفَانِ عَلَيْهِمَا مِن وَرَقِ ٱلْجَنَّةِ وَنَادَىٰهُمَا رَبُّهُمَآ أَلَمْ أَنْهَكُمَا عَن تِلْكُمَا ٱلشَّجَرَةِ وَأَقُل لَّكُمَآ إِنَّ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنَ لَكُمَا عَدُوٌّ مُّبِينٌ

Fa-dallāhumā bi-ghurūr, fa-lammā dhāqā'sh-shajarata badat lahumā sawʾātuhumā wa ṭafiqā yakhṣifāni ʿalayhimā min waraqi'l-janna, wa nādāhumā rabbuhumā a-lam anhakumā ʿan tilkumā'sh-shajarati wa aqul lakumā inna'sh-shayṭāna lakumā ʿaduwwun mubīn

"So he lowered them down by deception. When they had tasted the tree, their shameful parts became apparent to them, and they set about patching over themselves with the leaves of the Garden. And their Lord called out to them: 'Did I not forbid you that tree, and say to you that Satan is an open enemy to you?'"

فَدَلَّىٰهُمَا — to let the bucket down

This is the most striking verb in al-Aʿrāf, and that the deception is told with this verb must be recorded separately.

The root د-ل-و was undone in full at 53/8 in al-Najm (thumma danā fa-tadallā). I rely on that treatment and do not undo the root again. A summary of what was recorded there:

  • Dalw = bucket — the vessel tied to a rope and let down to draw water from a well; Yūsuf 12/19 (fa-adlā dalwahū) was given as evidence.
  • Table of derivatives: adlā (Form IV, transitive — he let down) / tadallā (Form V, reflexive — he let himself down).
  • The key image: "the bucket is let down into the well; what goes down goes down while remaining attached to what is above."
  • The relation dalīldalāla ("evidence is the rope let down towards the unknown") was transmitted with a note of caution.

And at 2/188 in al-Baqara the same root occurred in the form wa tudlū bihā ila'l-ḥukkām — there, the letting down of property to a judge like a bucket. I rely on both places.

Now I write what belongs here.

The verb dallā is of Form II (فَعَّلَ) and is transitive: "he let them down".

PatternVerbWho/what
IV (ifʿāl)AdlāYūsuf 12/19he let his bucket down
V (tafaʿʿul)Tadallāal-Najm 53/8he let himself down
II (tafʿīl)Dallāal-Aʿrāf 7/22 — he let the two of them down

Three patterns, one root: one lowers an object, one lowers itself, one lowers two people.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the concrete sense of the root: the deception is told here not as "he tricked" or "he misled" but as he let them down. And the picture of the bucket carries three things at once:

Element of the pictureIts counterpart in the verse
The bucket goes downThe deceived goes down
What goes down is tied to a rope — it does not go down of itselfThe deceiver holds it from above
The bucket is let down in order to take waterThe deception carries a promise of gain

The third line is especially worth recording, and it overlaps with the twentieth verse: Iblīs's promise was a promise of gain (to become angels, to become deathless). The bucket too does not go down empty; it goes down to take water. I give this as a reading, not as a certainty.

And a second sense recorded by the lexicographers is transmitted: the sense of tadliya as "to embolden someone, to egg him on". This is a transmitted view; the primary sense (to let down) is the more widespread and accords with the concrete sense of the root.

بِغُرُورٍ — the root غ-ر-ر

The concrete sense of the root: the surface of a thing, its outward look — and from this, to be taken in by the look of a thing. Ghurra is the bright white of the forehead, gharīr an inexperienced youth, ghurūr delusion.

The root was treated at 31/33 in Luqmān and at 35/5 in Fāṭir (wa lā yaghurrannakum bi'llāhi'l-gharūr); also at 57/20 in al-Ḥadīd (matāʿu'l-ghurūr). I rely on those treatments.

A point of word order: bi-ghurūr comes indefinite, and the bāʾ here states either instrument or state. Both readings are possible: "he let them down with a deception" or "they went down deluded". The first is the widespread one.

And the second occurrence of the same root in this sūra is in verse 51: wa gharrathumu'l-ḥayātu'd-dunyā — "the life of this world deluded them". I record this as an observation: the sūra uses the same verb both at the beginning of the story (Satan's deception) and in the scene of the gathering (the world's deception).

وَطَفِقَا يَخْصِفَانِ — the difference from Ṭāhā

The verb ط-ف-ق is an auxiliary verb in the sense "to set about a thing, to begin" (one of the verbs of inception, afʿāl al-shurūʿ). In Arabic the predicate of such verbs comes in the imperfect — and here yakhṣifāni is imperfect.

The root خ-ص-ف: to add one thing to another, to patch. The lexicographers explain khaṣf as the verb used for the mending of shoes: khaṣafa'n-naʿl — "he patched the sandal, he stitched layer on layer."

And this sentence occurs in Ṭāhā as well. The two sūras can be compared:

SūraExpressionDifference
Ṭāhā 20/121Wa ṭafiqā yakhṣifāni ʿalayhimā min waraqi'l-jannaThe same
al-Aʿrāf 7/22Wa ṭafiqā yakhṣifāni ʿalayhimā min waraqi'l-jannaWord for word the same

The two sūras overlap word for word in this sentence. It was treated at 20/120-123 in Ṭāhā; I rely on that treatment.

What belongs here is this, and I give it as an observation: the verb is not "they covered" but "they set about patching". Leaf on leaf, layer on layer — that is, not a ready covering but a covering in the making. And in the twenty-sixth verse its opposite will come: qad anzalnā ʿalaykum libāsan — a covering sent down, ready made.

PlaceCoveringFrom where
7/22Waraqi'l-janna — the leaves of the GardenBy their own hands, by patching
7/26Libāsan yuwārī sawʾātikumAnzalnā — by being sent down

There are four verses between the two, and both describe the same act (covering oneself); but their sources differ. I record this as my own reading and it is not binding.

وَنَادَىٰهُمَا رَبُّهُمَا — the form of the question

A point of word order must be recorded: God's word comes as a question, not as an accusation.

A-lam anhakumā ʿan tilkumā'sh-shajarati wa aqul lakumā inna'sh-shayṭāna lakumā ʿaduwwun mubīn

The question has two parts, and it recalls two different things:

PartWhat is recalledWhere it had been said
1A-lam anhakumā ʿan tilkumā'sh-shajarahIn verse 19wa lā taqrabā hādhihi'sh-shajarah
2Wa aqul lakumā inna'sh-shayṭāna lakumā ʿaduwwun mubīnNot told in al-Aʿrāf — it is in Ṭāhā 20/117

The second part must be recorded: God recalls a word He had said earlier; but al-Aʿrāf had not told that word. The same warning occurs at 20/117 in Ṭāhā: yā Ādamu inna hādhā ʿaduwwun laka wa li-zawjika.

I record this as an observation, and the table can be verified from the two texts: al-Aʿrāf gives the warning Ṭāhā tells only in the form of a reminder. That is, the two sūras complete one another — and this is a countable datum about the way the Qurʾān tells its stories. The same phenomenon (different parts of the same story being given in different sūras) was tabulated in detail in Hūd and al-Shuʿarāʾ; I rely on those treatments.

And the demonstrative must be recorded: tilkumā'sh-shajarah — "that tree". In the nineteenth verse it was hādhihi'sh-shajarah ("this tree"). Hādhā points to what is near, dhālika/tilka to what is far.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference of the two demonstratives: when the prohibition was laid down the tree was near; when the reckoning is asked for it is named as having grown distant. This is an observation about the word order; I draw no further conclusion from it.


7/23

قَالَا رَبَّنَا ظَلَمْنَآ أَنفُسَنَا وَإِن لَّمْ تَغْفِرْ لَنَا وَتَرْحَمْنَا لَنَكُونَنَّ مِنَ ٱلْخَٰسِرِينَ

Qālā rabbanā ẓalamnā anfusanā wa in lam taghfir lanā wa tarḥamnā la-nakūnanna mina'l-khāsirīn

"They said: 'Our Lord! We have wronged ourselves. If You do not forgive us and have mercy on us, we shall surely be among the lost.'"

The undoing of this prayer was done in the index

The structure of this prayer was treated at 2/37 in al-Baqara, and three elements of it were counted there:

1. Taking the fault on oneself (without producing an excuse) 2. Producing no excuse 3. An unconditional request

And it was compared there with Iblīs's sentence: "Iblīs too spoke, but he gave a ground and laid the blame on God (al-Aʿrāf 7/16)." I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

Further, in al-Baqara the expression talaqqā Ādamu min rabbihī kalimāt was treated, and it was recorded that "Adam does not find the words himself, he receives them; the door of repentance had already been left open". Al-Aʿrāf does not give this piece of information; in al-Aʿrāf the prayer itself comes directly. This is a countable difference between the two sūras.

The same sentence in Moses's mouth — a comparison with 28/16 in al-Qaṣaṣ

The same sentence occurs once more in the Qurʾān in the mouth of a prophet, and this comparison has been called for.

PlaceWhoSentenceWhat follows
al-Aʿrāf 7/23Adam and his wifeRabbanā ẓalamnā anfusanāWa in lam taghfir lanā wa tarḥamnā
al-Qaṣaṣ 28/16MosesRabbi innī ẓalamtu nafsī fa'ghfir līFa-ghafara lahū

Three differences must be recorded.

One — number. In al-Aʿrāf the sentence is dual (ẓalamnā anfusanā), in al-Qaṣaṣ singular (ẓalamtu nafsī). At 2/35-36 in al-Baqara it was recorded that the coming of the verbs in the dual distributes the responsibility; I rely on that treatment.

Two — the form of the request. Moses asks directly: fa'ghfir lī (imperative). Adam and his wife build a conditional clause: wa in lam taghfir lanā… la-nakūnanna mina'l-khāsirīnthe request comes indirectly, by saying what will happen if forgiveness is withheld.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the grammatical structure of the two sentences: both prayers take the fault upon themselves; but one asks in the imperative, the other asks by stating the outcome. The second is more indirect, and a condition stands in between. This is an explanation, not a ruling.

Three — the answer. As was recorded at 28/16 in al-Qaṣaṣ, in al-Qaṣaṣ the answer is given at once in the same verse: fa-ghafara lahū. In al-Aʿrāf there is no such sentence. In al-Aʿrāf, in place of an answer, the command to go down comes (24).

I record this as an observation and rely on the table: al-Baqara 2/37 has an announcement of forgiveness that al-Aʿrāf does not have (fa-tāba ʿalayh); Ṭāhā 20/122 has one too (thumma'jtabāhu rabbuhū fa-tāba ʿalayhi wa hadā). Al-Aʿrāf does not give it.

SūraIs the acceptance of repentance announced
al-Baqara 2/37Yesfa-tāba ʿalayhi innahū huwa't-tawwābu'r-raḥīm
Ṭāhā 20/122Yesthumma'jtabāhu rabbuhū fa-tāba ʿalayhi wa hadā
al-Aʿrāf 7/23-24No — there is no sentence between the prayer and the command to go down

This is a countable difference, and it does not break the frame recorded in al-Baqara — "the fall has been forgiven, it is not inherited, it is not a loss of standing but the beginning of a task" — because the announcement of that same event is expressly present in the other two sūras. The telling of al-Aʿrāf breaks off here and passes straight to the earth. I make no claim about the reason for this; I record only the datum.

ٱلْخَٰسِرِين — a link within the sūra

The root خ-س-ر: diminution, loss. The root was treated in detail at 103/2 in al-ʿAṣr (inna'l-insāna la-fī khusr); I rely on that treatment.

And the same root had occurred in the ninth verse: fa-ulāʾika'lladhīna khasirū anfusahum. There is an overlap between the two verses, and it must be recorded:

VerseSentenceWho
7/9Khasirū anfusahumThose whose scales come out light
7/23Ẓalamnā anfusanāla-nakūnanna mina'l-khāsirīnAdam and his wife

In both verses the same two words stand side by side: nafs and khusrān. And in both, the loss is inflicted not on another but on the person himself.

I record this as an observation: in the ninth verse this is a verdict (a finding delivered from outside); in the twenty-third it is a fear (from the person's own mouth). The same word, in two different mouths.


7/24-25

قَالَ ٱهْبِطُوا۟ بَعْضُكُمْ لِبَعْضٍ عَدُوٌّ وَلَكُمْ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ مُسْتَقَرٌّ وَمَتَٰعٌ إِلَىٰ حِينٍ · قَالَ فِيهَا تَحْيَوْنَ وَفِيهَا تَمُوتُونَ وَمِنْهَا تُخْرَجُونَ

Qāla'hbiṭū baʿḍukum li-baʿḍin ʿaduww, wa lakum fi'l-arḍi mustaqarrun wa matāʿun ilā ḥīn · Qāla fīhā taḥyawna wa fīhā tamūtūna wa minhā tukhrajūn

"He said: 'Go down, some of you an enemy to others. On the earth there is for you a place of settlement and provision for a time.' · He said: 'There you will live, there you will die, and from it you will be brought forth.'"

Two qālas — a point of word order

Both the twenty-fourth and the twenty-fifth verses begin with qāla, and there is no conjunction between them.

In Arabic, two qālas belonging to the same subject coming one after another without a conjunction is a construction worth recording. The lexicographers generally explain it as showing that the second speech is a separate, self-standing announcement, distinct from the first.

I record this as an observation: the first speech states the going down and the conditions of the going down; the second states the frame of life on the earth. The two are separate subjects, and the text too puts them into separate sentences.

Three verbs, three times — 7/25

The twenty-fifth verse is built on three imperfect verbs:

VerbMeaningVoice
TaḥyawnaYou will liveActive
TamūtūnaYou will dieActive
TukhrajūnaYou will be brought forthPassive

A point of word order must be recorded: the first two verbs are active, the third passive.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the voice of the verbs: living and dying are built as man's own act; being brought forth as the act of another. That is, at the third step the subject changes.

And the same structure was built with three verbs at 20/55 in Ṭāhā: minhā khalaqnākum wa fīhā nuʿīdukum wa minhā nukhrijukum tāratan ukhrā. The two verses can be compared:

SūraThe three stepsAgent
Ṭāhā 20/55Khalaqnākum · nuʿīdukum · nukhrijukumGod in all three (the "We" form)
al-Aʿrāf 7/25Taḥyawna · tamūtūna · tukhrajūnTwo the human, the third passive

I record this as an observation, and the table can be verified from the two texts: Ṭāhā tells the event from the side of the one who does it, al-Aʿrāf from the side of the one who lives it. And al-Aʿrāf, by making its third verb passive, joins the two tellings.

مُسْتَقَرّ and مَتَٰع — two words, two spans

WordRootMeaningSpan
Mustaqarrق-ر-رThe place where one settlesIt states a place
Matāʿم-ت-عWhat is to be enjoyedIlā ḥīn — for a term

The root م-ت-ع was undone at 47/12 in Muḥammad: enjoyment + "stretching on, continuing" (mataʿa'n-nahāru). I rely on that treatment.

Ilā ḥīn — "until a time". The root ح-ي-ن states an indefinite span. The same phrase occurs at 2/36 in al-Baqara as well (wa lakum fi'l-arḍi mustaqarrun wa matāʿun ilā ḥīn) — word for word the same sentence in the two sūras.

I record this as an observation: the verse gives two things — a place and a span. The limit of the place is not stated; the limit of the span is stated but its measure is not given. And the thirty-fourth verse will repeat the same matter for communities: wa li-kulli ummatin ajal.


When the story ends the sūra turns directly to the reader and calls out four times, yā banī Ādam. This address occurs five times in the Qurʾān; four of them are in al-Aʿrāf (26, 27, 31, 35), the fifth is at Yā Sīn 36/60.

VerseWhat comes after the addressMood
26Qad anzalnā ʿalaykum libāsan…Statement — the announcement of what is given
27Lā yaftinannakumu'sh-shayṭān…Prohibition
31Khudhū zīnatakum ʿinda kulli masjid…Command
35Immā yaʾtiyannakum rusulun minkum…Condition

Four of them in four different moods: statement, prohibition, command, condition. This is a countable order.

And all four have a link with the story — I record this as an observation:

AddressIts counterpart in the story
26 — clothing22 — covering oneself with leaves
27 — Satan's temptation20-22 — the whispering and the deception
31 — adornment, eating, drinking19fa-kulā min ḥaythu shiʾtumā
35 — the coming of messengers19wa lā taqrabā (the first announcement)

7/26

يَٰبَنِىٓ ءَادَمَ قَدْ أَنزَلْنَا عَلَيْكُمْ لِبَاسًا يُوَٰرِى سَوْءَٰتِكُمْ وَرِيشًا وَلِبَاسُ ٱلتَّقْوَىٰ ذَٰلِكَ خَيْرٌ ذَٰلِكَ مِنْ ءَايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ لَعَلَّهُمْ يَذَّكَّرُونَ

Yā banī Ādama qad anzalnā ʿalaykum libāsan yuwārī sawʾātikum wa rīshā, wa libāsu't-taqwā dhālika khayr, dhālika min āyāti'llāhi laʿallahum yadhdhakkarūn

"O children of Adam! We have sent down upon you clothing to cover your shameful parts, and adornment as well. But the clothing of God-fearing is better. That is among the signs of God; perhaps they will take it to heart."

لِبَاس — the ring in the index

The root ل-ب-س and the likeness of libās were treated at 2/187 in al-Baqara (hunna libāsun lakum wa antum libāsun lahunn). I rely on that treatment. Five functions of clothing were counted there:

1. It covers — it does not show the flaw to the outside 2. It protects 3. It is the nearest thing — nothing stands in between 4. It adorns 5. It takes shape according to the wearer — it is not a ready-made mould

And the negative branch of the same root was recorded there too: talbīs at 2/42 — "to dress falsehood in the clothing of truth". The root states both covering and confusing.

What belongs here is this: al-Aʿrāf uses the word libās in three different senses within three verses.

VerseExpressionWhich sense
7/26 (a)Libāsan yuwārī sawʾātikumPhysical clothing — that which covers
7/26 (b)Libāsu't-taqwāFigurative — the clothing of God-fearing
7/27Yanziʿu ʿanhumā libāsahumāThe covering of Adam and his wife — a return to the story

Three uses, two verses. And if the fourth use in al-Baqara (spouses are clothing to one another) is added to these three, the four distinct works of the root in the Qurʾān are complete.

أَنزَلْنَا — the choice of the verb

A point of word order must be recorded, and this is the place the lexicographers have dwelt on: the verb used for clothing is anzalnā (We sent down).

Clothing does not come down from the sky. The Qurʾān uses the same verb elsewhere too for material things:

PlaceFor whatSentence
al-Ḥadīd 57/25IronWa anzalna'l-ḥadīd
al-Zumar 39/6LivestockWa anzala lakum mina'l-anʿāmi thamāniyata azwāj
al-Aʿrāf 7/26ClothingQad anzalnā ʿalaykum libāsā

This usage was treated at 57/25 in al-Ḥadīd; I rely on that treatment. A summary of the explanations recorded there: the verb is also used in the sense "to be given as apportioned from a source", not "physical descent from above to below". The classical commentaries further transmit the explanation that "the raw material of clothing (plants that grow with the rain, the wool of animals) depends on water that comes from above". This is a transmitted explanation; I make no firm preference.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding: in the twenty-second verse the covering had been patched together by their own hands (yakhṣifāni); here the covering is sent down. The choice of the verb carries the difference between the two verses.

رِيش — the root ر-ي-ش

The concrete sense of the root: the feather of a bird. Rīsh is the feather and the wing of a bird. From this the senses of adornment, beauty, well-being, abundance of livelihood derive; when the Arabs said rāshahū they meant "he equipped him, he bettered his condition".

The word occurs only in this verse in the Qurʾān.

A variant reading must be recorded:

ReadingSpellingMeaning
rīshāرِيشًاFeather, adornment — the widespread reading
riyāshāرِيَاشًاThe plural of rīsh or "clothing, goods"

The second reading is also transmitted; it does not change the meaning in any essential way (a plural, or the sense "wealth and clothing"). I do not impose a preference.

And the choice of the word is worth recording: a bird's feather covers, adorns and lifts into flight all at once. I give this as an observation and build no firm claim of meaning on it: the verse counts two things — that which covers (libāsan yuwārī) and that which adorns (rīshā). And in the thirty-second verse the lawfulness of adornment will be expressly defended (qul man ḥarrama zīnata'llāhi'llatī akhraja li-ʿibādih). That is, adornment is named in the twenty-sixth verse and defended in the thirty-second.

وَلِبَاسُ ٱلتَّقْوَىٰ ذَٰلِكَ خَيْرٌ

The phrase occurs only here in the Qurʾān.

The root و-ق-ي: to guard, to be guarded. Taqwā is to take up a barrier that will guard a thing from harm. The root was treated at 2/2 in al-Baqara and in al-Layl; I rely on those treatments.

I record this as an observation, and its ground is the root itself: libās covers and guards; taqwā guards too. That is, the likeness is built on the function the two words share. This is a datum of word order showing at which point the likeness works.

A point of word order: wa libāsu't-taqwā dhālika khayrthe subject is named again by a demonstrative. In Arabic this serves for emphasis and for drawing attention: "the clothing of God-fearing — that is better."

And khayr here is an elative ("better"), and the side of the comparison is not stated. The sentence does not say "better than that"; it says only "better". I record this as an observation; what is understood from the context is the two garments named in the preceding sentence.

One further note: two readings are transmitted of the phrase libāsu't-taqwālibās as nominative (subject) or as accusative (as the second object of anzalnā: "and We sent down the clothing of God-fearing too"). The second reading is also reported. I do not impose a preference; but one consequence of the second reading is worth recording: on that reading the clothing of God-fearing enters among the things "sent down".

لَعَلَّهُمْ يَذَّكَّرُونَ — the change of pronoun

A point of word order must be recorded: the verse begins in the second person plural (yā banī Ādam, ʿalaykum, sawʾātikum) and ends in the third person plural (laʿallahum yadhdhakkarūn).

This is iltifāt (a shift in the direction of address), and it was treated in many places in the index (al-Fātiḥa, the sections of Yūnus; al-Shuʿarāʾ). I rely on those treatments.

I record this as an observation: while the address is "you", the judgement is delivered about "them". And the same shift was present in the third verse too (ittabiʿū… qalīlan mā tadhakkarūn — there it remained in the second person). Here it passes to the third person.

What this says to the present

The verse divides dressing into two functions: covering and adorning. It counts both as lawful. Then it names a third thing and calls it "better".

What must be recorded is this: the verse does not exalt the third by rejecting the first two. All three are in the same sentence. And the thirty-second verse will expressly question the attitude that sets out to forbid adornment. When these two verses of the sūra are read together, what is given is not the rejection of adornment but its ordering. This is something that can be read off the arrangement of the two verses themselves.


7/27

يَٰبَنِىٓ ءَادَمَ لَا يَفْتِنَنَّكُمُ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ كَمَآ أَخْرَجَ أَبَوَيْكُم مِّنَ ٱلْجَنَّةِ يَنزِعُ عَنْهُمَا لِبَاسَهُمَا لِيُرِيَهُمَا سَوْءَٰتِهِمَآ إِنَّهُۥ يَرَىٰكُمْ هُوَ وَقَبِيلُهُۥ مِنْ حَيْثُ لَا تَرَوْنَهُمْ إِنَّا جَعَلْنَا ٱلشَّيَٰطِينَ أَوْلِيَآءَ لِلَّذِينَ لَا يُؤْمِنُونَ

Yā banī Ādama lā yaftinannakumu'sh-shayṭānu kamā akhraja abawaykum mina'l-jannati yanziʿu ʿanhumā libāsahumā li-yuriyahumā sawʾātihimā, innahū yarākum huwa wa qabīluhū min ḥaythu lā tarawnahum, innā jaʿalna'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa lilladhīna lā yuʾminūn

"O children of Adam! Let not Satan tempt you as he brought your parents out of the Garden, stripping from them their clothing to show them their shameful parts. He and his tribe see you from where you do not see them. We have made the satans the guardians of those who do not believe."

يَنزِعُ — the work of the imperfect verb

The root ن-ز-ع: to pull a thing out of the place where it stands, to strip it away. The root was treated at 79/1 in al-Nāziʿāt (wa'n-nāziʿāti gharqā) and at 3/26 in Āl ʿImrān (wa tanziʿu'l-mulk). I rely on those treatments.

A point of word order must be recorded: the sentence has two verbs, and their tenses differ.

VerbMoodWhat it states
AkhrajaPerfectHe brought out — a finished act
YanziʿuImperfectStripping — a state (a circumstantial clause)

The imperfect coming here tells the event as though it were going on before one's eyes. In Arabic this is called ḥikāyat al-ḥāl: a past event is brought to life in the present tense.

I record this as an observation: the verse puts an event that happened in the past inside a warning that looks to the present — and the mood of the verb does the same work.

And the object of the verb must be recorded: libāsahumā. In the twenty-second verse the covering was told as being made afterwards (patching with leaves); here a libās is said to have been stripped away.

Two readings are transmitted, and both accord with the language:

ReadingWhat libās is
1An actual covering — a garment that was upon them and was stripped away
2The state of the sawʾāt being unseen — that is, "coveredness" is named as clothing

The Qurʾān gives no detail on this. Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference, and I do not add the detail the Qurʾān does not give.

إِنَّهُۥ يَرَىٰكُمْمِنْ حَيْثُ لَا تَرَوْنَهُمْ

The construction of the sentence must be recorded: the same verb (ر-أ-ي) twice, once affirmative and once negative, with the subjects exchanged.

innahū yarākum huwa wa qabīluhū min ḥaythu lā tarawnahum

And there is a disagreement of pronouns: innahū yarākum (singular) → lā tarawnahum (plural). This is explained by the intervening huwa wa qabīluhū: the sentence, beginning in the singular, passes to the plural once the tribe has been added. This is a datum of word order.

قَبِيل — the root ق-ب-ل: to be opposite, to face towards. Qabīl is "those who come together and face the same way" — a tribe, a company.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the one-sidedness of the verb of seeing: the verse states an asymmetry — one side sees, the other does not. And the thirtieth verse will state the consequence of this asymmetry: wa yaḥsabūna annahum muhtadūn — "and they suppose themselves to be rightly guided." Not seeing joins with not knowing that one does not see.

And this establishes a line with verses 179 and 198 of the sūra:

VerseSeeingWho
7/27Lā tarawnahumMan — what he cannot see
7/179Lahum aʿyunun lā yubṣirūna bihāMan — what he does not see
7/198Wa tarāhum yanẓurūna ilayka wa hum lā yubṣirūnThe idols — looking and not seeing

Three verses, three different failures to see. The first an impossibility, the second a non-use, the third an absence. I record this as an observation, and the table can be verified from the text.

إِنَّا جَعَلْنَا ٱلشَّيَٰطِينَ أَوْلِيَآءَ لِلَّذِينَ لَا يُؤْمِنُونَ

The construction of the sentence must be recorded, and it must be compared with the thirtieth verse.

VerseSentenceAgent
7/27Innā jaʿalna'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa lilladhīna lā yuʾminūnGod
7/30Innahumu'ttakhadhu'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa min dūni'llāhHuman beings

The same relation is tied in two verses to two different agents: in 27 "We made", in 30 "they took".

This is a place that falls within a debate of kalām (the divine decree, the creation of acts), and no polemic of kalām is entered into in this commentary (Method). All I record is this: the text builds both sentences and does not resolve the relation between them. The two verses stand three verses apart and are given to the reader together.

And this datum of word order must be recorded: in the twenty-seventh verse the judgement is qualified as lilladhīna lā yuʾminūn (for those who do not believe) — that is, it is not general, it is tied to an attribute. Per the method (Method) I record that this is an attribute and not an identity (the same note was entered at 47/12 in Muḥammad).


7/28-30

وَإِذَا فَعَلُوا۟ فَٰحِشَةً قَالُوا۟ وَجَدْنَا عَلَيْهَآ ءَابَآءَنَا وَٱللَّهُ أَمَرَنَا بِهَا قُلْ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يَأْمُرُ بِٱلْفَحْشَآءِ أَتَقُولُونَ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ مَا لَا تَعْلَمُونَ · قُلْ أَمَرَ رَبِّى بِٱلْقِسْطِ وَأَقِيمُوا۟ وُجُوهَكُمْ عِندَ كُلِّ مَسْجِدٍ وَٱدْعُوهُ مُخْلِصِينَ لَهُ ٱلدِّينَ كَمَا بَدَأَكُمْ تَعُودُونَ · فَرِيقًا هَدَىٰ وَفَرِيقًا حَقَّ عَلَيْهِمُ ٱلضَّلَٰلَةُ إِنَّهُمُ ٱتَّخَذُوا۟ ٱلشَّيَٰطِينَ أَوْلِيَآءَ مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ وَيَحْسَبُونَ أَنَّهُم مُّهْتَدُونَ

Wa idhā faʿalū fāḥishatan qālū wajadnā ʿalayhā ābāʾanā wa'llāhu amaranā bihā, qul inna'llāha lā yaʾmuru bi'l-faḥshāʾ, a-taqūlūna ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn · Qul amara rabbī bi'l-qisṭ, wa aqīmū wujūhakum ʿinda kulli masjidin wa'dʿūhu mukhliṣīna lahu'd-dīn, kamā badaʾakum taʿūdūn · Farīqan hadā wa farīqan ḥaqqa ʿalayhimu'ḍ-ḍalāla, innahumu'ttakhadhu'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa min dūni'llāhi wa yaḥsabūna annahum muhtadūn

"When they commit an indecency they say, 'We found our forefathers upon it, and God commanded it of us.' Say: God does not command indecency. Do you say about God what you do not know? · Say: My Lord commanded justice. Set your faces towards Him at every place of prayer, and call upon Him, making the religion His alone. As He brought you forth in the beginning, so you will return. · One party He guided, and upon another party going astray became due. For they took the satans as guardians instead of God, and they suppose themselves to be rightly guided."

Two excuses, two answers

The twenty-eighth verse gives the two grounds of the addressee side by side, and the word order must be recorded:

OrderExcuseIts ground
1Wajadnā ʿalayhā ābāʾanāTradition — the forefathers
2Wa'llāhu amaranā bihāReligion — the claim of a divine command

And the answer is given only to the second: qul inna'llāha lā yaʾmuru bi'l-faḥshāʾ.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the position of the answer: the first excuse (the forefathers) is dealt with elsewhere in the sūra (7/70wa nadhara mā kāna yaʿbudu ābāʾunā; 7/173innamā ashraka ābāʾunā min qablu). What is answered here is the second excuse: the ascription of a behaviour to God.

And the answer has two steps:

StepSentenceWhat it does
1Inna'llāha lā yaʾmuru bi'l-faḥshāʾIt rejects the claim
2A-taqūlūna ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūnIt names the kind of claim it is

The expression in the second step must be recorded: mā lā taʿlamūn — "what you do not know". And the same expression will come back in the thirty-third verse as the last item in the list of what is forbidden: wa an taqūlū ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn.

VerseSentenceMood
7/28A-taqūlūna ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūnA question
7/33Wa an taqūlū ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūnAn item in the list of what is forbidden

The same expression five verses apart, one a question and one a ruling. This is a link that can be verified within the sūra, and it will be completed at verse 33.

فَٰحِشَة — the root ف-ح-ش

The sense of the root: an indecency that exceeds the bound. The lexicographers explain fuḥsh as "an ugliness that exceeds the measure, in word or in deed". The word is not of sexual content alone; the root's own idea is the coming together of excess and ugliness.

The root was treated at 24/19 in al-Nūr and at 33/30 in al-Aḥzāb; I rely on those treatments.

And in this sūra the root occurs three times: 28 (fāḥishatan), 33 (al-fawāḥisha), 80 (a-taʾtūna'l-fāḥisha — Lot's question to his people).

ٱلْقِسْط — the root ق-س-ط

The root carries a curious double sense, and it must be recorded:

PatternWordMeaning
Form IQasaṭaTo do wrong, to swerve from the right
Form IV (ifʿāl)AqsaṭaTo do justice
NounQisṭJustice, a share
Active participleQāsiṭ / muqsiṭWrongdoer / the just

That is, the same root gives two opposed senses according to the form. The lexicographers explain this by "the privative sense of Form IV": aqsaṭa = "to remove wrong". The root was treated at 55/9 in al-Raḥmān (wa aqīmu'l-wazna bi'l-qisṭ) and at 57/25 in al-Ḥadīd (li-yaqūma'n-nāsu bi'l-qisṭ). I rely on those treatments.

A point of word order must be recorded, and it is a contrast:

VerseThe command claimedThe real command
7/28Wa'llāhu amaranā bihā — indecency
7/29Qul amara rabbī bi'l-qisṭ

The same verb (أمر) stands facing itself in two verses: one a claim, the other an announcement. And the objects are opposites: fāḥisha (an indecency that exceeds the bound) ↔ qisṭ (that which is in its proper place).

وَأَقِيمُوا۟ وُجُوهَكُمْ عِندَ كُلِّ مَسْجِدٍ

Aqīmū wujūhakum — "set your faces straight".

A point of word order: ʿinda kulli masjid — "at every place of prayer". And the same phrase will be repeated in the thirty-first verse: khudhū zīnatakum ʿinda kulli masjid.

VerseCommandPlace
7/29Aqīmū wujūhakumʿInda kulli masjid
7/31Khudhū zīnatakumʿInda kulli masjid

The same adverbial two verses apart. I record this as an observation: both commands concern the place of prayer — one a turning towards, the other a preparing.

And the expression mukhliṣīna lahu'd-dīn must be recorded. The root خ-ل-ص: to be pure, unmixed. The distinction between mukhliṣ (active participle) and mukhlaṣ (passive participle) was tabulated at 38/83 in Ṣād; I rely on that treatment. Here mukhliṣīna is the active participle: the work the person does himself.

كَمَا بَدَأَكُمْ تَعُودُونَ

The sentence is short and dense: "as He began you, so you will return."

Two readings are transmitted:

ReadingThe work of kamāMeaning
1A likeness of manner"As your creation was, so your raising will be"
2A likeness of state"As you were created (naked, alone, with nothing in your hands), so you will return"

Both readings are transmitted and they do not exclude each other; I do not impose a preference.

And the making of the first creation into a proof of the raising was treated in many places in the index (Yāsīn 36/79, al-Qiyāma 75/40, al-Rūm 30/27, al-Anbiyāʾ 21/104). I rely on those treatments.

فَرِيقًا هَدَىٰ وَفَرِيقًا حَقَّ عَلَيْهِمُ ٱلضَّلَٰلَةُ — an asymmetry of word order

The word order of this sentence must be recorded, and it is striking.

SideSentenceAgent
The first partyFarīqan hadāGod — expressly
The second partyWa farīqan ḥaqqa ʿalayhimu'ḍ-ḍalālaThe agent is not stated — "going astray became due upon them"

The two sides are not built symmetrically. In the first the verb is active and the agent plain (hadā — "He guided"); in the second the verb is ḥaqqa (became due) and its subject is al-ḍalāla, that is, it does not say "He led astray".

I record this as an observation, and it is a new link in a pattern treated in the index. Similar asymmetries were recorded in al-Zumar and al-Muddaththir. And no polemic of kalām is entered into in this commentary (Method); all I record is the datum of word order.

And the continuation of the verse shows that the condition of the second party is grounded in their own acts: innahumu'ttakhadhu'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa min dūni'llāh — "for they took the satans as guardians."

وَيَحْسَبُونَ أَنَّهُم مُّهْتَدُونَ — the sūra's most repeated observation

The sentence must be recorded: "they suppose themselves to be rightly guided."

The same idea occurs elsewhere in the Qurʾān too and was treated in the index:

PlaceSentence
al-Aʿrāf 7/30Wa yaḥsabūna annahum muhtadūn
al-Kahf 18/104Wa hum yaḥsabūna annahum yuḥsinūna ṣunʿā (al-Kahf)
al-Mujādala 58/18Wa yaḥsabūna annahum ʿalā shayʾ (al-Mujādala)
al-Zukhruf 43/37Wa yaḥsabūna annahum muhtadūn (al-Zukhruf)

Four places, the same verb (ح-س-ب) and the same structure. I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them here.

What belongs here is this, and I give it as an observation: al-Aʿrāf and al-Zukhruf 43/37 are word for word the same sentence. And in al-Aʿrāf this sentence, read together with min ḥaythu lā tarawnahum ("from where you do not see them") in the twenty-seventh verse, forms a whole: not seeing, and supposing that one sees.


7/31

يَٰبَنِىٓ ءَادَمَ خُذُوا۟ زِينَتَكُمْ عِندَ كُلِّ مَسْجِدٍ وَكُلُوا۟ وَٱشْرَبُوا۟ وَلَا تُسْرِفُوٓا۟ إِنَّهُۥ لَا يُحِبُّ ٱلْمُسْرِفِينَ

Yā banī Ādama khudhū zīnatakum ʿinda kulli masjidin wa kulū wa'shrabū wa lā tusrifū, innahū lā yuḥibbu'l-musrifīn

"O children of Adam! Take your adornment at every place of prayer; eat and drink, but do not go to excess. He does not love those who go to excess."

زِينَة — the root ز-ي-ن

The sense of the root: to adorn, to make beautiful. Zīna is what makes a thing look fair. The root was treated at 18/7 in al-Kahf (innā jaʿalnā mā ʿala'l-arḍi zīnatan lahā) and at 20/59 in Ṭāhā (yawmu'z-zīna). I rely on those treatments.

And in this sūra the root occurs three times:

VerseExpressionWhat
7/31Khudhū zīnatakumCommand
7/32Man ḥarrama zīnata'llāhi'llatī akhraja li-ʿibādihDefence
7/26Wa rīshāThe same idea, with a different word

وَكُلُوا۟ وَٱشْرَبُوا۟ وَلَا تُسْرِفُوا۟ — the line of measure

This sentence is a new link in a line of measure built up in the index.

A summary of what was treated at 25/67 in al-Furqān (I rely on it and do not repeat it):

  • Isrāf and iqtār (stinting) are both rejected as two extremes.
  • The root ق-ت-ر: to narrow, to stint.
  • Qawām — the root ق-و-م: "the point between two extremes".
  • The line had been tied to these verses: Fāṭir 35/32, Luqmān 31/19 and 31/32 (qaṣd), al-Baqara 2/219 (quli'l-ʿafw).

Al-Aʿrāf 7/31 is added to this line as a new link, and its difference must be recorded:

PlaceThe subject of the measureAre both extremes given
al-Furqān 25/67Spending (anfaqū)Yesisrāf and iqtār
Luqmān 31/19Gait and voiceYeswaqṣid (the middle)
al-Aʿrāf 7/31Eating and drinkingNo — only one extreme: lā tusrifū
al-Isrāʾ 17/29The handYesmaghlūlatan / kulla'l-basṭ

In al-Aʿrāf only one extreme is forbidden. And the reason for this becomes visible in the next verse: verse 32 will deal separately with the other extreme (setting out to forbid). That is, the two extremes have been divided between two verses. I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the arrangement of the two verses.

The root س-ر-ف: to exceed the bound, to lose the measure. The lexicographers record that the word carries not only the sense "to spend much" but also "not to use a thing in its place". The root was treated at 20/127 in Ṭāhā (man asrafa wa lam yuʾmin) and at 40/28 and 40/43 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin). I rely on those treatments.

And in this sūra the root occurs twice more, and both are striking:

VerseExpressionAbout whom
7/31Wa lā tusrifū … al-musrifīnThe addressee
7/81Bal antum qawmun musrifūnThe people of Lot

I record this as an observation: the sūra uses the same word both for the measure of eating and drinking and for the conduct of Lot's people. The shared idea of the word is "exceeding the bound", and that idea is at work in both places. I draw no equivalence between the two behaviours from this; all I record is the shared root and the shared idea of the word.

إِنَّهُۥ لَا يُحِبُّ ٱلْمُسْرِفِينَ — the concealment of the pronoun

A point of word order must be recorded: the pronoun innahū refers back to God, whose name is not expressly mentioned in the preceding sentences.

The name "God" does not occur in the verse. It will come in the thirty-second verse: zīnata'llāh. That is, the pronoun rests on the expression amara rabbī several verses earlier (29).

And the pattern lā yuḥibbu must be recorded. In the Qurʾān this pattern is a particular way of rejecting a behaviour, and it was treated in the index (al-Baqara 2/190inna'llāha lā yuḥibbu'l-muʿtadīn; Luqmān 31/18lā yuḥibbu kulla mukhtālin fakhūr). I rely on those treatments.

And in this sūra the same pattern occurs twice:

VerseSentence
7/31Innahū lā yuḥibbu'l-musrifīn
7/55Innahū lā yuḥibbu'l-muʿtadīn

Both are in the same pattern, and both end with a word that carries the idea of "exceeding the bound" (isrāf and iʿtidāʾ). One concerns eating and drinking, the other supplication. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.

What this says to the present

The verse gives three commands and one prohibition: take, eat, drink — but do not exceed. The commands are three times the number of the prohibition.

What must be recorded is this, and it can be read off the word order: the prohibition comes after the commands and sets a limit within them; it does not cancel them. And the next verse will question the attitude that sets out to turn this limit into a prohibition.


7/32

قُلْ مَنْ حَرَّمَ زِينَةَ ٱللَّهِ ٱلَّتِىٓ أَخْرَجَ لِعِبَادِهِۦ وَٱلطَّيِّبَٰتِ مِنَ ٱلرِّزْقِ قُلْ هِىَ لِلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ فِى ٱلْحَيَوٰةِ ٱلدُّنْيَا خَالِصَةً يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ كَذَٰلِكَ نُفَصِّلُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ لِقَوْمٍ يَعْلَمُونَ

Qul man ḥarrama zīnata'llāhi'llatī akhraja li-ʿibādihī wa'ṭ-ṭayyibāti mina'r-rizq, qul hiya lilladhīna āmanū fi'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā khāliṣatan yawma'l-qiyāma, kadhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti li-qawmin yaʿlamūn

"Say: Who has forbidden the adornment God has brought forth for His servants, and the good things of provision? Say: These are for those who believe, in the life of this world; on the Day of Resurrection they will be theirs alone. Thus do We set out the signs in detail for a people who know."

The form of the question

A point of word order must be recorded: the sentence is a question opening with a command (qul), and the question is built with man (who).

In Arabic this pattern — man ḥarrama… — is a rhetorical question of denial (istifhām inkārī): no answer is expected, the question is itself a rejection. "Who has forbidden it?" = "No one has forbidden it."

And the verse contains two quls: one for the question, one for the answer. That is, it makes the messenger utter both the question and the answer.

I record this as an observation: in the twenty-eighth verse the other side ascribed something to God (wa'llāhu amaranā bihā); here the other side ascribes a prohibition to God. The two verses show the same error in two directions: presenting something as God's command, and presenting something as God's prohibition.

VerseWhat is ascribedAnswer
7/28A command — to indecencyInna'llāha lā yaʾmuru bi'l-faḥshāʾ
7/32A prohibition — of adornment and good provisionMan ḥarrama…
7/33Innamā ḥarrama rabbiya… — the real list

The three verses are a whole, and the thirty-third verse is the answer of the sequence.

ٱلطَّيِّبَٰت — the root ط-ي-ب

The sense of the root: to be pleasant, clean, good. Ṭayyib is used in the sense "both agreeable to the senses and harmless". The root was treated at 2/168 in al-Baqara (kulū mimmā fi'l-arḍi ḥalālan ṭayyibā); I rely on that treatment.

And the root will occur twice more in this sūra:

VerseExpression
7/32Wa'ṭ-ṭayyibāti mina'r-rizq
7/58Wa'l-baladu'ṭ-ṭayyib — the good land
7/157Wa yuḥillu lahumu'ṭ-ṭayyibāti wa yuḥarrimu ʿalayhimu'l-khabāʾith

Three occurrences: provision, land, what is made lawful. And in the hundred and fifty-seventh verse the word comes together with its opposite (khabāʾith — foul things), just as ṭayyib meets khabutha in verse 58.

خَالِصَةً يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ — the most disputed place in the sentence

The answering sentence (qul hiya lilladhīna āmanū fi'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā khāliṣatan yawma'l-qiyāma) has been read differently among the lexicographers. The disagreement is given in a table; I do not impose a preference.

ReadingThe division of the sentenceMeaning
1Hiya lilladhīna āmanū fi'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā · khāliṣatan yawma'l-qiyāma"These are for those who believe in the life of this world (others share in them too), and on the Day of Resurrection theirs alone"
2Hiya lilladhīna āmanū · fi'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā khāliṣatan yawma'l-qiyāma"These are for those who believe: in this world (shared), and in the hereafter unmixed"

Both readings are transmitted and both come close to the same result: in this world the bounty is shared, in the hereafter it is not. I do not impose a preference.

A variant reading must also be recorded:

ReadingSpellingCase
khāliṣatanخَالِصَةًAccusative — circumstantial
khāliṣatunخَالِصَةٌNominative — predicate

Both are transmitted; the meaning is not changed in any essential way.

The root خ-ل-ص had occurred in the twenty-ninth verse as mukhliṣīna lahu'd-dīn. The same root two verses apart: one the servant's making the religion unmixed, the other the bounty's being unmixed. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

What this says to the present

The verse says that to hold a thing forbidden is also a claim. The twenty-eighth verse asked for the ground of saying "God commanded this"; the thirty-second asks for the ground of saying "God forbade this".

No legal ruling is issued in this commentary (Method). All I record is the verse's own construction: the question asks for the source of the prohibition.


7/33

قُلْ إِنَّمَا حَرَّمَ رَبِّىَ ٱلْفَوَٰحِشَ مَا ظَهَرَ مِنْهَا وَمَا بَطَنَ وَٱلْإِثْمَ وَٱلْبَغْىَ بِغَيْرِ ٱلْحَقِّ وَأَن تُشْرِكُوا۟ بِٱللَّهِ مَا لَمْ يُنَزِّلْ بِهِۦ سُلْطَٰنًا وَأَن تَقُولُوا۟ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ مَا لَا تَعْلَمُونَ

Qul innamā ḥarrama rabbiya'l-fawāḥisha mā ẓahara minhā wa mā baṭan, wa'l-ithma wa'l-baghya bi-ghayri'l-ḥaqq, wa an tushrikū bi'llāhi mā lam yunazzil bihī sulṭānan, wa an taqūlū ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn

"Say: My Lord has forbidden only these: indecencies, open and hidden; sin; wrongful transgression; that you associate with God that for which He has sent down no warrant; and that you say about God what you do not know."

Undoing the list

This verse gives a list, and per the method (Method) no legal ruling is built here. What I shall do is to work out how many items the list has and what those items are.

A point of word order must be recorded: the sentence begins with innamā — the particle of restriction (ḥaṣr) in Arabic: "He has forbidden only these."

The list has five items, and it falls into two groups:

#ItemArabicGroup
1Indecencies — open and hiddenAl-fawāḥisha mā ẓahara minhā wa mā baṭanDeed
2SinAl-ithmDeed
3Wrongful transgressionAl-baghya bi-ghayri'l-ḥaqqDeed
4Association — associating without warrantAn tushrikū bi'llāhi mā lam yunazzil bihī sulṭānāSpeech/belief
5Ascribing to God what one does not knowAn taqūlū ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūnSpeech

The division of the two groups can be read off the word order and must be recorded: the first three items come as nouns (with the definite article: al-fawāḥish, al-ithm, al-baghy); the last two come with an + verb (an tushrikū, an taqūlū). That is, the first three are things, the last two are acts.

I record this as an observation, and its ground is the word order itself.

The roots of the items

ف-ح-ش — treated at verse 28; I rely on that treatment.

أ-ث-مithm: the root carries the idea of "lagging behind, being late"; the lexicographers explain ithm as "an act that holds its doer back from good". The root was treated at 2/219 in al-Baqara (fīhimā ithmun kabīr), where the variant reading kabīr/kathīr was recorded. I rely on that treatment.

ب-غ-يbaghy: the concrete sense of the root is "to exceed, to overflow"; a wound that festers is also said to baghā'l-jurḥ. From this comes the sense "to exceed the bound, to do wrong". And the same root occurs twice more in this sūra: at 45 and 86 (wa yabghūnahā ʿiwajā — "they seek to make it crooked").

And the qualification bi-ghayri'l-ḥaqq must be recorded. A point of word order: of the three items, a qualification is placed only on baghy. The lexicographers give two explanations of this:

ExplanationGround
1For emphasisbaghy is already wrongdoing, and the qualification reinforces it
2To distinguish — the firmness shown in recovering a right does not count as baghy

Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

مَا لَمْ يُنَزِّلْ بِهِۦ سُلْطَٰنًا

The root س-ل-ط: to prevail, to have mastery. Sulṭān is generally used in the Qurʾān in the sense "proof, evidence, warrant" — because a proof is what gives mastery in a dispute.

And the same phrase will occur in this sūra in the seventy-first verse, in the mouth of Hūd: a-tujādilūnanī fī asmāʾin sammaytumūhā antum wa ābāʾukum mā nazzala'llāhu bihā min sulṭān.

VerseWho says itSentence
7/33The command (qul)Mā lam yunazzil bihī sulṭānā
7/71HūdMā nazzala'llāhu bihā min sulṭān

I record this as an observation: the sūra applies in the seventy-first verse, in the mouth of a prophet, the measure it laid down in the thirty-third. The same technique was tabulated in Hūd Table 4; I rely on that treatment.

وَأَن تَقُولُوا۟ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ مَا لَا تَعْلَمُونَ — the end of the list

The last item of the list is word for word the same expression as the question in the twenty-eighth verse.

And its being placed last in the list must be recorded. I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the arrangement of the three verses:

In the twenty-eighth verse the other side ascribed an indecency to God; in the thirty-second it ascribed a prohibition to God. The thirty-third verse makes that very act the last item of the list. That is, the list ends with an item that takes in the list itself: if "saying what is forbidden on God's authority" enters the list, then adding to the list falls under that item too.

This is an explanation, not a ruling. And I draw no legal conclusion from it.


7/34

وَلِكُلِّ أُمَّةٍ أَجَلٌ فَإِذَا جَآءَ أَجَلُهُمْ لَا يَسْتَأْخِرُونَ سَاعَةً وَلَا يَسْتَقْدِمُونَ

Wa li-kulli ummatin ajal, fa-idhā jāʾa ajaluhum lā yastaʾkhirūna sāʿatan wa lā yastaqdimūn

"Every community has its term. When their term comes, they cannot delay it by an hour, nor bring it forward."

The position of the sentence

A point of word order must be recorded: the verse comes immediately after the list (33) and immediately before the address yā banī Ādam (35).

I record this as an observation: once the list of what is forbidden is finished, an announcement of a term comes directly. And in the twenty-fourth verse the term of the individual was named (wa matāʿun ilā ḥīn); here that of the community is named.

VerseWhose termExpression
7/24IndividualsMatāʿun ilā ḥīn
7/34CommunitiesLi-kulli ummatin ajal

يَسْتَأْخِرُونَ / يَسْتَقْدِمُونَ — the point of Form X

Both verbs are of Form X, and this form generally carries the sense of seeking.

VerbRootThe sense of the form
Yastaʾkhirūnأ-خ-رTo seek delay / to be delayed
Yastaqdimūnق-د-مTo seek to go forward / to go forward

The lexicographers give two readings here:

ReadingMeaning
1Form X is here for seeking: "even if they seek it, they are not delayed"
2Form X here has the sense of the bare verb: "they neither lag behind nor go forward"

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And the structure of the sentence must be recorded: both directions are closed at once — it neither goes back nor forward. This is a pattern repeated in the Qurʾān's announcements of the term (Yūnus 10/49, al-Naḥl 16/61, al-Muʾminūn 23/43, al-Munāfiqūn 63/11). It was treated in al-Naḥl and al-Munāfiqūn; I rely on those treatments.

Sāʿatan — "an hour, a moment" — comes indefinite, and an indefinite in a context of negation covers the smallest quantity: "not even a moment".


7/35-36

يَٰبَنِىٓ ءَادَمَ إِمَّا يَأْتِيَنَّكُمْ رُسُلٌ مِّنكُمْ يَقُصُّونَ عَلَيْكُمْ ءَايَٰتِى فَمَنِ ٱتَّقَىٰ وَأَصْلَحَ فَلَا خَوْفٌ عَلَيْهِمْ وَلَا هُمْ يَحْزَنُونَ · وَٱلَّذِينَ كَذَّبُوا۟ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَا وَٱسْتَكْبَرُوا۟ عَنْهَآ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ أَصْحَٰبُ ٱلنَّارِ هُمْ فِيهَا خَٰلِدُونَ

Yā banī Ādama immā yaʾtiyannakum rusulun minkum yaquṣṣūna ʿalaykum āyātī, fa-mani'ttaqā wa aṣlaḥa fa-lā khawfun ʿalayhim wa lā hum yaḥzanūn · Wa'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā wa'stakbarū ʿanhā ulāʾika aṣḥābu'n-nāri hum fīhā khālidūn

"O children of Adam! If messengers come to you from among yourselves, recounting My signs to you — whoever guards himself and sets himself right, no fear shall be upon them and they shall not grieve. · But those who called Our signs lies and were too great for them, those are the people of the Fire; they will remain in it."

إِمَّا يَأْتِيَنَّكُمْ — the reinforcement of the conditional particle

A point of word order must be recorded: immā is in fact in (the conditional) + (redundant), and the verb has taken the emphatic nūn (yaʾtiyanna).

In Arabic, adding to the conditional in and giving the verb the emphatic nūn is a construction implying that the condition will certainly come to pass.

And the same pattern occurred at al-Baqara 2/38: fa-immā yaʾtiyannakum minnī hudā. It was treated at 2/38 in al-Baqara; I rely on that treatment. The ring closing back to al-Fātiḥa was recorded there.

The two verses can be compared:

PlaceWhat comesFor whom
al-Baqara 2/38Hudā — guidanceAdam and his offspring
al-Aʿrāf 7/35Rusulun minkum — messengers from among yourselvesThe children of Adam

Al-Baqara says "if guidance comes", al-Aʿrāf "if messengers come". The same pattern, two different agents. I record this as an observation, and the table can be verified from the two texts.

And the qualification minkum must be recorded: the messengers will be "from among you". The same emphasis will be repeated twice in the sequence of prophets in this sūra: ʿalā rajulin minkum (63, Noah) and ʿalā rajulin minkum (69, Hūd). The same note in three places.

فَلَا خَوْفٌ عَلَيْهِمْ وَلَا هُمْ يَحْزَنُونَ

This pattern was treated at 2/38 in al-Baqara, and a table was drawn up there:

WordDirectionWhat
KhawfThe futureWhat has not yet happened
ḤuznThe pastWhat cannot be taken back

I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

What belongs here is this: the same pattern occurs twice in this sūra, and the second is in the section on the people of al-Aʿrāf.

VerseSentenceFor whom
7/35Fa-lā khawfun ʿalayhim wa lā hum yaḥzanūnThose who guard themselves and set themselves right
7/49Lā khawfun ʿalaykum wa lā antum taḥzanūnThose told to enter the Garden

The first is in the third person, the second in the second person — that is, at 49 the word is said directly to the addressee. This is an overlap that can be verified within the sūra, and it will be taken up again at 46-49.

ٱتَّقَىٰ وَأَصْلَحَ — two verbs

The protasis of the conditional clause is two verbs: ittaqā (he guarded himself) and aṣlaḥa (he set right).

The root ص-ل-ح: the going away of a defect, becoming useful and fit. The verb here is of Form IV (aṣlaḥa) and is transitive; its object is not stated.

I record this as an observation: the verse does not say "he set himself right" or "he set his affair right"; it leaves the object open. And the same root occurs seven times in this sūra, the four most striking being these:

VerseExpressionWho
7/56Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihāA command
7/85Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihāShuʿayb
7/142Ukhlufnī fī qawmī wa aṣliḥMoses → Aaron (Hārūn)
7/170Innā lā nuḍīʿu ajra'l-muṣliḥīnThose who hold fast to the Book

The root is one of the words the sūra carries from beginning to end.


This block is one of the most detailed dialogues of the gathering in the Qurʾān, and it contains five separate turns of speech:

TurnWho → whomVerse
1The angels → those who are dying37
2Those who came later ↔ those who came first38-39
3The people of the Garden → the people of the Fire, then a crier44-45
4The people of al-Aʿrāf → both sides at once46-49
5The people of the Fire → the people of the Garden50-51

Five turns, six parties. And the sūra takes its name from the fourth turn.


7/37

فَمَنْ أَظْلَمُ مِمَّنِ ٱفْتَرَىٰ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ كَذِبًا أَوْ كَذَّبَ بِـَٔايَٰتِهِۦٓ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ يَنَالُهُمْ نَصِيبُهُم مِّنَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَا جَآءَتْهُمْ رُسُلُنَا يَتَوَفَّوْنَهُمْ قَالُوٓا۟ أَيْنَ مَا كُنتُمْ تَدْعُونَ مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ قَالُوا۟ ضَلُّوا۟ عَنَّا وَشَهِدُوا۟ عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِهِمْ أَنَّهُمْ كَانُوا۟ كَٰفِرِينَ

Fa-man aẓlamu mimmani'ftarā ʿala'llāhi kadhiban aw kadhdhaba bi-āyātih, ulāʾika yanāluhum naṣībuhum mina'l-kitāb, ḥattā idhā jāʾathum rusulunā yatawaffawnahum qālū ayna mā kuntum tadʿūna min dūni'llāh, qālū ḍallū ʿannā wa shahidū ʿalā anfusihim annahum kānū kāfirīn

"Who is more wrongdoing than one who invents a lie against God or calls His signs lies? Their share of the Book reaches them. Then, when Our messengers come to take their souls, they say, 'Where are those you used to call upon beside God?' They say, 'They have gone astray from us,' and they bear witness against themselves that they were deniers."

فَمَنْ أَظْلَمُ — the Qurʾān's pattern

This pattern occurs in close to fifteen places in the Qurʾān and was treated in the index (al-Kahf 18/57, al-Sajda 32/22, al-Zumar 39/32). I rely on those treatments.

What belongs here is this: the verse counts two acts, and the two are joined by aw (or).

VerbWhatDirection
Iftarā ʿala'llāhi kadhibanTo invent a lie against GodAddition — to say what is not
Kadhdhaba bi-āyātihTo call His signs liesSubtraction — to reject what is

I record this as an observation: the two acts run in opposite directions — one adds, the other subtracts. And the last item of the thirty-third verse (an taqūlū ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn) corresponds to the first act. That is, there are four verses between the list and this verse, and the same act is named twice.

نَصِيبُهُم مِّنَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ — a disagreement

Two readings are transmitted of the expression naṣībuhum mina'l-kitāb:

ReadingWhat kitāb isMeaning
1The preserved tablet / what is decreed"The share written for them reaches them" — lifespan, provision, term
2The Book sent down"The share announced for them in the Book reaches them" — the recompense promised

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

A point of word order: yanāluhum naṣībuhum — the verb is nāla (ن-ي-ل), "to reach". And the same root will return in the forty-ninth verse: yanāluhumu'llāhu bi-raḥma. Two occurrences: one the reaching of a share, the other the not reaching of mercy.

رُسُلُنَا يَتَوَفَّوْنَهُمْ

Rusul here are not messengers (prophets) but those charged with taking the soul — this is understood from the context and from the verb (yatawaffawnahum). The same usage is present at al-Anʿām 6/61 too (tawaffathu rusulunā).

The root و-ف-ي: to be complete, to render in full. Tawaffā is "to take a thing in full" — hence "to take the soul". The root was treated at 39/42 in al-Zumar (Allāhu yatawaffa'l-anfus); I rely on that treatment.

وَشَهِدُوا۟ عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِهِمْ — the direction of the testimony

The construction of the sentence must be recorded: shahidū ʿalā anfusihim — "they bore witness against themselves".

And the same structure will return in the hundred and seventy-second verse — but there the direction differs:

VerseSentenceWhenFor what
7/37Wa shahidū ʿalā anfusihim annahum kānū kāfirīnAt the moment of deathAgainst themselves
7/172Wa ashhadahum ʿalā anfusihim a-lastu bi-rabbikumAt the beginningAn acknowledgement

There are a hundred and thirty-five verses between the two, and both use the structure shahida ʿalā nafsih.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the shared word order of the two verses: the sūra makes man a witness about himself twice — once at the beginning (172), once at the end (37). And the two testimonies face one another: the first an acknowledgement, the second a confession. This will be completed at 172-174.


7/38-39

قَالَ ٱدْخُلُوا۟ فِىٓ أُمَمٍ قَدْ خَلَتْ مِن قَبْلِكُم مِّنَ ٱلْجِنِّ وَٱلْإِنسِ فِى ٱلنَّارِ كُلَّمَا دَخَلَتْ أُمَّةٌ لَّعَنَتْ أُخْتَهَا حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَا ٱدَّارَكُوا۟ فِيهَا جَمِيعًا قَالَتْ أُخْرَىٰهُمْ لِأُولَىٰهُمْ رَبَّنَا هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ أَضَلُّونَا فَـَٔاتِهِمْ عَذَابًا ضِعْفًا مِّنَ ٱلنَّارِ قَالَ لِكُلٍّ ضِعْفٌ وَلَٰكِن لَّا تَعْلَمُونَ · وَقَالَتْ أُولَىٰهُمْ لِأُخْرَىٰهُمْ فَمَا كَانَ لَكُمْ عَلَيْنَا مِن فَضْلٍ فَذُوقُوا۟ ٱلْعَذَابَ بِمَا كُنتُمْ تَكْسِبُونَ

Qāla'dkhulū fī umamin qad khalat min qablikum mina'l-jinni wa'l-insi fi'n-nār, kullamā dakhalat ummatun laʿanat ukhtahā, ḥattā idha'ddārakū fīhā jamīʿan qālat ukhrāhum li-ūlāhum rabbanā hāʾulāʾi aḍallūnā fa-ātihim ʿadhāban ḍiʿfan mina'n-nār, qāla li-kullin ḍiʿfun wa lākin lā taʿlamūn · Wa qālat ūlāhum li-ukhrāhum fa-mā kāna lakum ʿalaynā min faḍlin fa-dhūqu'l-ʿadhāba bimā kuntum taksibūn

"He says: 'Enter the Fire among communities of jinn and men that have passed away before you.' Every time a community enters, it curses its fellow. Then, when they have all caught up with one another there, the last of them will say of the first: 'Our Lord! These led us astray; give them a double punishment of the Fire.' He says: 'For each there is double, but you do not know.' · And the first of them will say to the last: 'You have no advantage over us; taste then the punishment for what you earned.'"

لَّعَنَتْ أُخْتَهَا — "her sister"

A point of word order must be recorded: the verse does not say "it curses the one before it", it says "ukhtahā" — "its sister".

In Arabic a thing's like, one of the same kind, is called its ukht (hādhihi ukhtu hādhih — "this is the like of this"). The word states not kinship but likeness.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of the word: the side cursed is the like of the side that curses. And the thirty-ninth verse will say this outright: fa-mā kāna lakum ʿalaynā min faḍl — "you have no advantage over us."

ٱدَّارَكُوا۟ — the root د-ر-ك

The sense of the root: to catch up, to reach, to overtake. Iddāraku is originally tadāraku (Form VI); the tāʾ has been assimilated into the dāl. Form VI states reciprocity: "they caught up with one another".

And the same root was treated at 27/66 in al-Naml (bali'ddāraka ʿilmuhum fi'l-ākhira); I rely on that treatment.

أُخْرَىٰهُمْ لِأُولَىٰهُمْ — two groups, two accusations

The structure of the dialogue must be recorded, and it is symmetrical:

WhoTo whomWhat it says
The last (ukhrāhum)Of the first (ūlāhum)Hāʾulāʾi aḍallūnā — these led us astray; give them double punishment
GodLi-kullin ḍiʿfun — for each there is double
The first (ūlāhum)To the last (ukhrāhum)Fa-mā kāna lakum ʿalaynā min faḍl — you have no advantage

And the form of the answer must be recorded: the request was "give them double"; the answer becomes "for everyone there is double".

Wa lākin lā taʿlamūn — "but you do not know." That is, the one who makes the request does not know that what he asks for takes him in as well.

I record this as an observation: in the scene a transfer of responsibility is attempted and refused. And the same attempt will be repeated in the hundred and seventy-third verse of the sūra: innamā ashraka ābāʾunā min qablu wa kunnā dhurriyyatan min baʿdihim, a-fa-tuhlikunā bimā faʿala'l-mubṭilūn. The two scenes do the same work: laying the load on the past.

VerseWhoSentence
7/38Those who came laterHāʾulāʾi aḍallūnā
7/173Those who came laterInnamā ashraka ābāʾunā min qablu

This is an overlap that can be verified within the sūra, and it will be taken up again at 172-174.

ضِعْف — the indeterminacy of the word

The root ض-ع-ف carries both the sense "weakness" and the sense "fold, multiple". Ḍiʿf means "as much again of a thing"; it is understood as "double" or as "many times over".

The lexicographers have disagreed over the exactness of the quantity; I build no claim about a number. What I record is that the answer corrects not the quantity but the distribution: li-kullin — "for each".


7/40-41

إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ كَذَّبُوا۟ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَا وَٱسْتَكْبَرُوا۟ عَنْهَا لَا تُفَتَّحُ لَهُمْ أَبْوَٰبُ ٱلسَّمَآءِ وَلَا يَدْخُلُونَ ٱلْجَنَّةَ حَتَّىٰ يَلِجَ ٱلْجَمَلُ فِى سَمِّ ٱلْخِيَاطِ وَكَذَٰلِكَ نَجْزِى ٱلْمُجْرِمِينَ · لَهُم مِّن جَهَنَّمَ مِهَادٌ وَمِن فَوْقِهِمْ غَوَاشٍ وَكَذَٰلِكَ نَجْزِى ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ

Inna'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā wa'stakbarū ʿanhā lā tufattaḥu lahum abwābu's-samāʾi wa lā yadkhulūna'l-jannata ḥattā yalija'l-jamalu fī sammi'l-khiyāṭ, wa kadhālika najzi'l-mujrimīn · Lahum min jahannama mihādun wa min fawqihim ghawāsh, wa kadhālika najzi'ẓ-ẓālimīn

"As for those who called Our signs lies and were too great for them: the gates of heaven will not be opened for them, and they will not enter the Garden until the camel passes through the eye of the needle. Thus do We recompense the guilty. · For them there is a bed of Hell and coverings above them. Thus do We recompense the wrongdoers."

لَا تُفَتَّحُ لَهُمْ أَبْوَٰبُ ٱلسَّمَآءِ

A point of word order must be recorded: the verb is the passive of Form II (tufattaḥu), not tuftaḥu. Form II here carries the sense of multiplicity and of one by one: "the gates are not opened one by one."

And the same pattern occurs in this sūra in the affirmative as well:

VerseSentenceWhat is opened
7/40tufattaḥu lahum abwābu's-samāʾThe gates of heaven — not opened
7/96La-fataḥnā ʿalayhim barakātin mina's-samāʾi wa'l-arḍBlessings — opened

The same root (ف-ت-ح), in two directions. And verse 96 is the counterpart of this passage: there, on the condition of faith and God-fearing, blessings will be opened from heaven and earth. I record this as an observation, and the two verses can be verified from the text.

Two readings are transmitted about what the expression "the gates of heaven are not opened" refers to:

ReadingWhat is not opened
1To their souls — their ascent when their souls are taken
2To their deeds / their prayers — their not being accepted

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. And the Qurʾān gives no detail here; I invent no detail.

حَتَّىٰ يَلِجَ ٱلْجَمَلُ فِى سَمِّ ٱلْخِيَاطِ

This is one of the best-known expressions of impossibility in the Qurʾān.

Ḥattā here means "until", and in Arabic, used together with a condition impossible of fulfilment, it gives the sense "never". This is a known pattern in the language (taʿlīq bi'l-muḥāl).

The root و-ل-ج: to enter a narrow place. Wulūj is "to be thrust inside". The root was treated in Luqmān 31/29 and al-Ḥadīd 57/6 (yūliju'l-layla fi'n-nahār), where the sense "to pass one thing inside another" was recorded. I rely on those treatments.

I record this as an observation: the choice of the verb is worth recording — not yadkhulu (to enter) but yaliju (to be thrust into a narrow place). That is, the verb already carries narrowness, and it joins with the narrowness of the hole.

سَمِّ ٱلْخِيَاط — the eye of the needle

The root س-م-م was undone at 52/27 in al-Ṭūr (ʿadhāba's-samūm) and at 56/42 in al-Wāqiʿa. I rely on those treatments. A summary of what was recorded there:

  • The root carries two branches: pore/hole, and poison.
  • Samūm is "the scorching hot wind that works into the pores".
  • Masāmm — the pores of the body; the relation with samm (poison) was conveyed as a relation drawn by the lexicographers, not as a settled etymological ruling.

What belongs here is this: the same root comes here with its first branch. Sammu'l-khiyāṭ — "the hole of the needle".

PlaceWordWhich branch of the root
al-Ṭūr 52/27 · al-Wāqiʿa 56/42SamūmThe heat that works into the pores
al-Aʿrāf 7/40SammThe hole — the eye of the needle

The root خ-ي-ط: to sew. Khiyāṭ is the sewing needle; khayṭ is thread. And the same root occurs at al-Baqara 2/187: al-khayṭu'l-abyaḍu mina'l-khayṭi'l-aswad — "the white thread, the black thread". It was treated at 2/187 in al-Baqara; I rely on that treatment.

I record this as an observation, and the two verses can be verified from the text: the same root gives the thread in al-Baqara and the needle in al-Aʿrāf. Both come from the picture of sewing.

ٱلْجَمَل — a variant reading

There is a variant reading in this word that changes the meaning, and it must be given in a table.

ReadingSpellingMeaningIts root
al-jamalٱلْجَمَلCamel — the male camelج-م-ل
al-jummalٱلْجُمَّلShip's cable — a thick twisted ropeج-م-ل
al-jumalٱلْجُمَلThe same — cable (on another pattern)ج-م-ل
al-jumlٱلْجُمْلThe same — cableج-م-ل

The widespread reading, transmitted by mass transmission, is the first: al-jamal — camel. The other readings have been transmitted and are held to be anomalous (shādhdh). I do not impose a preference; both have been transmitted.

The effect of the two readings on the meaning must be recorded:

ReadingHow the likeness works
Jamal (camel)Two extremes: the largest animal and the smallest hole — a difference of kind
Jummal (cable)Of the same kind: thread and cable, both belonging to sewing — a difference of degree

I record this as an observation: the second reading has an inner consistency — needle and cable are the two ends of one work (sewing); thread passes through the needle, a cable does not. But the first reading is both the widespread one and the one transmitted by mass transmission, and it builds the likeness more sharply. I do not impose a preference.

One further note: the lexicographers record that the words jamal and jummal are from the same root (ج-م-ل: to gather together, to amass — jumla, ijmāl are from the same root). A cable is threads twisted together; and the camel is the animal that gathers up a load and carries it. This is a relation drawn by the lexicographers; I do not give it as a settled etymological ruling.

مِهَاد and غَوَاشٍ — below and above

The forty-first verse builds the picture of a bed with two words:

WordRootMeaningDirection
Mihādم-ه-دA mattress, a bed spread outBelow
Ghawāshغ-ش-وCoverings, things drawn overAbove

The root م-ه-د was treated at 20/53 in Ṭāhā (jaʿala lakumu'l-arḍa mahdā) and at 78/6 in al-Nabaʾ (a-lam najʿali'l-arḍa mihādā). I rely on those treatments. And the difference must be recorded: there the mihād was the earth's being spread out for man; here it is Hell's being spread out.

The root غ-ش-و: to cover, to envelop. The root was treated in al-Ghāshiya (al-ghāshiya) and at 45/23 in al-Jāthiya (ghishāwatan). I rely on those treatments. And the same root will occur in the fifty-fourth verse of this sūra: yughshi'l-layla'n-nahār.

I record this as an observation: the verse counts below and above — and these were exactly the two directions Iblīs did not count in the seventeenth verse (fawq and taḥt). There is an overlap between the two verses, and I give it as a possible reading, not as a certainty.

Two closings: مُجْرِمِين and ظَٰلِمِين

A point of word order must be recorded: both verses end with the same pattern but with a different word.

VerseClosing
7/40Wa kadhālika najzi'l-mujrimīn
7/41Wa kadhālika najzi'ẓ-ẓālimīn

The root ج-ر-م: to cut, to sever — hence jurm, "the evil act one earns". The root ظ-ل-م: to put a thing somewhere other than its place (treated at 8-9).

The two words come one after another and name the same group by two different attributes. This accords with the sūra's manner, sustained from the beginning, of defining by attribute (Method: "it is the attributes the verse describes").


7/42-43

وَٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ وَعَمِلُوا۟ ٱلصَّٰلِحَٰتِ لَا نُكَلِّفُ نَفْسًا إِلَّا وُسْعَهَآ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ أَصْحَٰبُ ٱلْجَنَّةِ هُمْ فِيهَا خَٰلِدُونَ · وَنَزَعْنَا مَا فِى صُدُورِهِم مِّنْ غِلٍّ تَجْرِى مِن تَحْتِهِمُ ٱلْأَنْهَٰرُ وَقَالُوا۟ ٱلْحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ ٱلَّذِى هَدَىٰنَا لِهَٰذَا وَمَا كُنَّا لِنَهْتَدِىَ لَوْلَآ أَنْ هَدَىٰنَا ٱللَّهُ لَقَدْ جَآءَتْ رُسُلُ رَبِّنَا بِٱلْحَقِّ وَنُودُوٓا۟ أَن تِلْكُمُ ٱلْجَنَّةُ أُورِثْتُمُوهَا بِمَا كُنتُمْ تَعْمَلُونَ

Wa'lladhīna āmanū wa ʿamilu'ṣ-ṣāliḥāti lā nukallifu nafsan illā wusʿahā ulāʾika aṣḥābu'l-jannati hum fīhā khālidūn · Wa nazaʿnā mā fī ṣudūrihim min ghillin tajrī min taḥtihimu'l-anhār, wa qālu'l-ḥamdu li'llāhi'lladhī hadānā li-hādhā wa mā kunnā li-nahtadiya lawlā an hadāna'llāh, laqad jāʾat rusulu rabbinā bi'l-ḥaqq, wa nūdū an tilkumu'l-jannatu ūrithtumūhā bimā kuntum taʿmalūn

"Those who believe and do righteous deeds — We charge no soul beyond its capacity — those are the people of the Garden; they will remain in it. · We have pulled out whatever rancour was in their breasts. Rivers run beneath them. They say: 'Praise be to God, who guided us to this. We would never have found the way had God not guided us. The messengers of our Lord did come with the truth.' And they are called to: 'This is the Garden you have been made to inherit for what you used to do.'"

The intervening sentence

A point of word order must be recorded, and it is striking: the sentence lā nukallifu nafsan illā wusʿahā comes in between the subject (wa'lladhīna āmanū wa ʿamilu'ṣ-ṣāliḥāt) and its predicate (ulāʾika aṣḥābu'l-janna).

This is a construction seen in the second verse too (there fa-lā yakun fī ṣadrika ḥarajun minh had come in between two parts). In both places the intervening sentence is an announcement that lightens a load.

VerseThe intervening sentenceWhat it does
7/2Fa-lā yakun fī ṣadrika ḥarajun minhIt lightens the messenger's load
7/42Lā nukallifu nafsan illā wusʿahāIt limits the addressee's load

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the two sentences stand in the same position of word order.

Wusʿ — the root و-س-ع: breadth. Wusʿ is "a person's breadth", that is, his capacity. The same sentence occurs at al-Baqara 2/286 (lā yukallifu'llāhu nafsan illā wusʿahā) and was treated in al-Baqara; I rely on that treatment.

And the same root will occur twice more in this sūra, and both are striking:

VerseExpression
7/42Illā wusʿahā — capacity
7/89Wasiʿa rabbunā kulla shayʾin ʿilmā — in Shuʿayb's mouth
7/156Wa raḥmatī wasiʿat kulla shayʾ

Three occurrences: one the breadth of man, two the breadth of God (knowledge and mercy).

وَنَزَعْنَا مَا فِى صُدُورِهِم مِّنْ غِلٍّ

The root ن-ز-ع was treated at the twenty-seventh verse (yanziʿu ʿanhumā libāsahumā). And the same verb comes back here.

VerseWhat was pulled outFrom whom
7/27Libāsahumā — their clothingFrom Adam and his wife — by Satan
7/43Mā fī ṣudūrihim min ghill — the rancour in their breastsFrom the people of the Garden — by God

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the two occurrences of the verb: the same verb is in one place the taking away of a covering, in the other the taking away of a burden. One a loss, the other a gain.

The root غ-ل-ل: a thing's seeping in between, entering secretly. Ghill is "rancour that has seeped into the breast"; from the same root come ghull (the ring or fetter put on the neck) and ghulūl (secretly filching from the spoils).

And the other branch of the root will occur in the hundred and fifty-seventh verse of this sūra: wa'l-aghlāla'llatī kānat ʿalayhim — "the fetters that were upon them".

VerseWordBranch of the root
7/43GhillRancour — what seeps inward
7/157Al-aghlālThe fetter — what is put on the neck

Two words from one root, and both carry the idea of a binding. And both are lifted: one in the Garden (nazaʿnā), the other by the messenger (wa yaḍaʿu ʿanhum). This is an overlap that can be verified within the sūra.

وَمَا كُنَّا لِنَهْتَدِىَ لَوْلَآ أَنْ هَدَىٰنَا ٱللَّهُ

A point of word order must be recorded: the sentence contains the lām of denial (lām al-juḥūd) — mā kunnā li-nahtadiya.

In Arabic the pattern mā kāna + li- + imperfect states negation in its strongest form: "it was not a thing that could be, there was no possibility of it." This pattern was treated in al-Shuʿarāʾ and in the sections of Yūnus.

And it is akin to the pattern mā yakūnu laka an tatakabbara in the thirty-third verse — there too an impossibility was being stated.

I record this as an observation: the first sentence of the people of the Garden is a praise, the second a withdrawal of themselves. And the third is the confirmation of the messengers' truthfulness (laqad jāʾat rusulu rabbinā bi'l-ḥaqq). Three sentences: thanks, humility, confirmation.

أُورِثْتُمُوهَا — the verb of inheritance

The root و-ر-ث: to come into an inheritance. The verb here is passive: "you have been made to inherit it."

And the same root occurs twice more in this sūra:

VerseExpressionWho
7/43ŪrithtumūhāThe people of the Garden
7/100Alladhīna yarithūna'l-arḍa min baʿdi ahlihāThose who inherit the earth
7/128Inna'l-arḍa li'llāhi yūrithuhā man yashāʾu min ʿibādihMoses's word to his people
7/137Wa awrathna'l-qawma'lladhīna kānū yustaḍʿafūna mashāriqa'l-arḍi wa maghāribahāThose who had been made weak

Four occurrences: one the Garden, three the earth.

And a point of word order must be recorded: the sentence ends with bimā kuntum taʿmalūn — "for what you used to do." In the same verse, "you were made to inherit" (a giving without return) and "for what you used to do" (a giving in return) stand side by side. I record this as an observation; the text joins the two and does not resolve the relation between them.


7/44-45

وَنَادَىٰٓ أَصْحَٰبُ ٱلْجَنَّةِ أَصْحَٰبَ ٱلنَّارِ أَن قَدْ وَجَدْنَا مَا وَعَدَنَا رَبُّنَا حَقًّا فَهَلْ وَجَدتُّم مَّا وَعَدَ رَبُّكُمْ حَقًّا قَالُوا۟ نَعَمْ فَأَذَّنَ مُؤَذِّنٌۢ بَيْنَهُمْ أَن لَّعْنَةُ ٱللَّهِ عَلَى ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ · ٱلَّذِينَ يَصُدُّونَ عَن سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ وَيَبْغُونَهَا عِوَجًا وَهُم بِٱلْءَاخِرَةِ كَٰفِرُونَ

Wa nādā aṣḥābu'l-jannati aṣḥāba'n-nāri an qad wajadnā mā waʿadanā rabbunā ḥaqqan fa-hal wajadtum mā waʿada rabbukum ḥaqqā, qālū naʿam, fa-adhdhana muʾadhdhinun baynahum an laʿnatu'llāhi ʿala'ẓ-ẓālimīn · Alladhīna yaṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāhi wa yabghūnahā ʿiwajan wa hum bi'l-ākhirati kāfirūn

"The people of the Garden call out to the people of the Fire: 'We have found what our Lord promised us to be true. Have you found what your Lord promised you to be true?' They say, 'Yes.' Then a crier calls out among them: 'The curse of God be upon the wrongdoers!' · Those who bar others from the way of God and seek to make it crooked, and who deny the hereafter."

وَجَدْنَاوَجَدتُّم — the same verb, two sides

A point of word order must be recorded: the question is built so as to carry its own answer within it.

Qad wajadnā mā waʿadanā rabbunā ḥaqqā · fa-hal wajadtum mā waʿada rabbukum ḥaqqā

The same verb (و-ج-د), the same specifying accusative (ḥaqqan), two different subjects. And the answer is a single word: naʿam — "yes".

I record this as an observation: there is no argument in the scene. The other side does not object; it confirms. And this looks to the same place as shahidū ʿalā anfusihim in the thirty-seventh verse: the admission comes from the other side.

And it must be recorded that the verb nādā occurs four times in this block:

VerseWho calledTo whom
7/44The people of the GardenTo the people of the Fire
7/46The people of al-AʿrāfTo the people of the Garden
7/48The people of al-AʿrāfTo the men they recognised
7/50The people of the FireTo the people of the Garden

Four calls, three different parties. And the people of al-Aʿrāf call out twice — the group that gives the sūra its name is the group that speaks most in the block. This is a countable datum.

فَأَذَّنَ مُؤَذِّنٌۢ بَيْنَهُمْ

The root أ-ذ-ن: ear (udhun), and from this to announce, to proclaim (adhān). Muʾadhdhin is "one who announces".

A point of word order must be recorded: muʾadhdhin comes indefinite — "a crier". Who he is is not stated.

I record this as an observation, and I do not add the detail the Qurʾān does not give: explanations of who this crier is are transmitted in the classical commentaries; none of them can be verified from the text, and none is certain knowledge. I content myself with transmitting them.

And baynahum — "among them" — must be recorded: the crier is not on either of the two sides, but between them. And two verses later "a veil between them" (wa baynahumā ḥijāb) will be named. There is an overlap between the two expressions; but I give it not as a certainty, only as a possible reading.

يَبْغُونَهَا عِوَجًا — a repetition within the sūra

The root ع-و-ج was treated at 39/28 in al-Zumar (ghayra dhī ʿiwaj) and at 18/1 in al-Kahf (wa lam yajʿal lahū ʿiwajā). I rely on those treatments. The distinction recorded there: ʿiwaj is crookedness that is not seen, ʿawaj crookedness that is seen.

And this sentence occurs twice in al-Aʿrāf:

VerseSentenceWho
7/45Yaṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāhi wa yabghūnahā ʿiwajāThe description of the wrongdoers
7/86Wa taṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāhi man āmana bihī wa tabghūnahā ʿiwajāThe notables of Madyan

The two sentences use exactly the same verbs: ṣadda and baghā … ʿiwajan. One a general description, the other a concrete community.

I record this as an observation, and the table can be verified from the text: the sūra applies in the eighty-sixth verse to a people the description it gave in the forty-fifth. And this is the third instance in al-Aʿrāf of the technique tabulated in Hūd Table 4 (the others: lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā 56→85, and mā lam yunazzil bihī sulṭānan 33→71).

The sūra applies this technique four times. In a table:

SentenceThe general announcementIts application in the sequence of prophets
Mā (lam) yunazzil bihī sulṭān7/33 — the list of what is forbidden7/71 — Hūd
Lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā7/56 — a direct command7/85 — Shuʿayb
Yaṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāhi wa yabghūnahā ʿiwajā7/45 — the description of the wrongdoers7/86 — Madyan
La-aqʿudanna lahum ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm7/16 — Iblīs's threat7/86lā taqʿudū bi-kulli ṣirāṭ

Four rows. I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the eight verses themselves: al-Aʿrāf applies in the sequence of prophets the measures it set up in the first fifty-eight verses. And three of the four applications are in the story of Shuʿayb (85, 86, 86).


7/46-49

7/46-49 — The people of al-Aʿrāf

7/46-47

وَبَيْنَهُمَا حِجَابٌ وَعَلَى ٱلْأَعْرَافِ رِجَالٌ يَعْرِفُونَ كُلًّۢا بِسِيمَىٰهُمْ وَنَادَوْا۟ أَصْحَٰبَ ٱلْجَنَّةِ أَن سَلَٰمٌ عَلَيْكُمْ لَمْ يَدْخُلُوهَا وَهُمْ يَطْمَعُونَ · وَإِذَا صُرِفَتْ أَبْصَٰرُهُمْ تِلْقَآءَ أَصْحَٰبِ ٱلنَّارِ قَالُوا۟ رَبَّنَا لَا تَجْعَلْنَا مَعَ ٱلْقَوْمِ ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ

Wa baynahumā ḥijāb, wa ʿala'l-aʿrāfi rijālun yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum, wa nādaw aṣḥāba'l-jannati an salāmun ʿalaykum, lam yadkhulūhā wa hum yaṭmaʿūn · Wa idhā ṣurifat abṣāruhum tilqāʾa aṣḥābi'n-nāri qālū rabbanā lā tajʿalnā maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn

"Between the two there is a veil. And upon al-Aʿrāf are men who recognise each by his mark. They call out to the people of the Garden: 'Peace be upon you.' They have not entered it, but they hope to. · And when their eyes are turned towards the people of the Fire they say: 'Our Lord! Do not place us with the wrongdoing people.'"

ٱلْأَعْرَاف — the word itself

The root ع-ر-ف carries two branches, and both must be recorded:

BranchMeaningDerivatives
1Height, ridgeʿUrf (a horse's mane, a cockerel's comb), aʿrāf (plural)
2To know, to recogniseMaʿrifa, ʿārif, yaʿrifūna, maʿrūf

And the verse itself uses the two branches side by side: wa ʿala'l-aʿrāfi rijālun yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum.

I record this as an observation, and its ground is the verse's own words: the same root occurs in the same sentence both as a place-name and as a verb. This is not a play on sounds or numbers but the presence of the root's two branches in one sentence — and therefore it is not a reckoning of the kind Method forbids.

And the word maʿrūf will occur twice in this sūra: wa'mur bi'l-ʿurf (199) and yaʾmuruhum bi'l-maʿrūf (157). The same root, in the name of the sūra and in two commands.

The disagreement — what is al-Aʿrāf?

This is a place where the classical commentaries divide. I give the disagreement in a table and do not impose a preference.

ViewWhat al-Aʿrāf isGround
1The high part, the crest, of the wall between the Garden and the FireThe root sense of the word (ʿurf = ridge, height); its being read together with wa baynahumā ḥijāb in the verse
2A high place / a summit, a station from which both sides are seenThe same root sense; the calling out to both sides in verses 46-49
3Derived from maʿrifa, "the place of recognising"The second branch of the root; the sentence yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum

The first and second views are close to one another, and the majority stands here. The third is also transmitted. I do not impose a preference.

A "wall" (sūr) is named in one other place in the Qurʾān: al-Ḥadīd 57/13fa-ḍuriba baynahum bi-sūrin lahū bābun bāṭinuhū fīhi'r-raḥmatu wa ẓāhiruhū min qibalihi'l-ʿadhāb. It was treated at 57/13 in al-Ḥadīd. In the classical commentaries the two verses are read together; but that the two texts describe the same thing is not said by the Qurʾān. I give this as a possible link, not as a certainty.

The disagreement — who are those upon al-Aʿrāf?

This is a more detailed disagreement, and at least five views are transmitted in the classical commentaries. I give them in a table and I DO NOT IMPOSE A PREFERENCE.

#ViewGround (from the text)Its difficulty
1Those whose good and evil come out equalLam yadkhulūhā wa hum yaṭmaʿūn — they have not yet entered but they hope; their fear in 47 of being with the wrongdoersThe word "equality" (istiwāʾ) is not in the text; a link has to be made with the weighing in verses 8-9
2Prophets, martyrs, or persons of high rankYaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum — that they recognise everyone; their addressing the proud in 48On this view the sentence lam yadkhulūhā wa hum yaṭmaʿūn must be read not of "the people of al-Aʿrāf" but of the people of the Garden
3AngelsThat they recognise everyone; that they can address both sidesThe word rijāl (men); and that a waiting (yaṭmaʿūn) is stated in 46
4A group held back, on whom judgement has not yet been passedLam yadkhulūhā wa hum yaṭmaʿūn; their being told udkhulu'l-janna in 49Being held back is not named as a verdict in the text
5A company on whom judgement has been passed but whose station is separateʿAla'l-aʿrāf — that they stand in a place apartThe text does not say the reason for this separateness

And two separate grammatical questions feed the disagreement. Both must be recorded:

One — who is the subject of the sentence lam yadkhulūhā wa hum yaṭmaʿūn?

ReadingSubjectMeaning
AThe people of al-Aʿrāf"They (the people of al-Aʿrāf) have not entered the Garden, but they hope to"
BThe people of the Garden (named in 44) — the sentence, as a circumstantial clause, looks to the state before the words of the people of al-Aʿrāf"While they (the people of the Garden) had not yet entered, the people of al-Aʿrāf greeted them"

The second reading is less widespread but has been voiced by the lexicographers. I do not impose a preference.

Two — who speaks the command udkhulu'l-janna in the forty-ninth verse, and to whom?

ReadingSpeakerAddressee
AThe people of al-AʿrāfTo the believers who had been made weak — after addressing the proud in 48
BGod / a crierTo the people of al-Aʿrāf — that is, their waiting comes to an end

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. The second reading is the ground of the fourth view (those held back).

What I must record is this, and I write it plainly: the Qurʾān does not say who the people of al-Aʿrāf are. All the views above are readings drawn from the text. I make no preference, I invent no report, and I give no personal names (Method).

سِيمَا — the root

The lexicographers disagree about the root of the word sīmā, and this was recorded at 48/29 in al-Fatḥ: و-س-م (to brand; wasm, sima) or س-و-م. I rely on that treatment and issue no settled ruling on the root.

The word was treated twice in the index, and I rely on both:

PlaceThe note
al-Baqara 2/273Taʿrifuhum bi-sīmāhum — "recognising them requires not an investigation but an attentiveness"; the bearers of the mark are not aware that they carry it
al-Fatḥ 48/29A four-line table of the disagreement (light/gravity, humility, a physical trace, a sign of the resurrection), with no preference; sīmā is what another reads, not what its bearer displays

And at 55/41 in al-Raḥmān the other direction of the word was recorded: yuʿrafu'l-mujrimūna bi-sīmāhum — the guilty too are recognised by their marks. That is, the word works in both directions.

What belongs here is this: al-Aʿrāf 7/46 and 7/48 are the only place where the word is used in both directions at once.

VerseSentenceWho is recognised
7/46Yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhumEveryone — both sides at once
7/48Yaʿrifūnahum bi-sīmāhumParticular persons — the proud

The kullan of the forty-sixth verse is indefinite and means "each one": both the people of the Garden and the people of the Fire.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the word kullan: the distinguishing attribute of the people of al-Aʿrāf is that they can recognise both sides at once. And this accords with the picture of the place where they stand (a height): one who stands on a height sees both flanks. This is an explanation, not a ruling.

وَهُمْ يَطْمَعُونَ

The root ط-م-ع: the desire to obtain a thing, hope. The word will occur again in the fifty-sixth verse in the form ṭamaʿan (wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿā).

VerseExpressionWho
7/46Wa hum yaṭmaʿūnThe people of al-Aʿrāf
7/56Wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿāThe addressee

And there is an overlap between the two verses: in the forty-seventh verse, when the eyes of the people of al-Aʿrāf are turned towards the people of the Fire, they utter a sentence of fear (rabbanā lā tajʿalnā maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn), and in the forty-sixth, while they look towards the Garden, they carry a hope (yaṭmaʿūn).

That is, verses forty-six and forty-seven together describe the state of khawf and ṭamaʿ — and the fifty-sixth verse gives those same two words as a command.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the words of the two verses. The pair khawfan wa ṭamaʿan was treated at 30/24 in al-Rūm and at 32/16 in al-Sajda; those treatments will be relied on at 7/56.

وَإِذَا صُرِفَتْ أَبْصَٰرُهُمْ — the passive verb

A point of word order must be recorded: the verb is passive — ṣurifat ("were turned"), not ṣarafū ("they turned").

The root ص-ر-ف: to turn a thing from one direction to another. And the same root will occur in the hundred and forty-sixth verse: sa-aṣrifu ʿan āyātiya'lladhīna yatakabbarūn.

I record this as an observation: the gaze turns towards the people of the Fire not by their own will but by being turned — and what they see makes them utter a prayer. The text does not say the subject of the turning.


7/50-51

وَنَادَىٰٓ أَصْحَٰبُ ٱلنَّارِ أَصْحَٰبَ ٱلْجَنَّةِ أَنْ أَفِيضُوا۟ عَلَيْنَا مِنَ ٱلْمَآءِ أَوْ مِمَّا رَزَقَكُمُ ٱللَّهُ قَالُوٓا۟ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ حَرَّمَهُمَا عَلَى ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ · ٱلَّذِينَ ٱتَّخَذُوا۟ دِينَهُمْ لَهْوًا وَلَعِبًا وَغَرَّتْهُمُ ٱلْحَيَوٰةُ ٱلدُّنْيَا فَٱلْيَوْمَ نَنسَىٰهُمْ كَمَا نَسُوا۟ لِقَآءَ يَوْمِهِمْ هَٰذَا

Wa nādā aṣḥābu'n-nāri aṣḥāba'l-jannati an afīḍū ʿalaynā mina'l-māʾi aw mimmā razaqakumu'llāh, qālū inna'llāha ḥarramahumā ʿala'l-kāfirīn · Alladhīna'ttakhadhū dīnahum lahwan wa laʿiban wa gharrathumu'l-ḥayātu'd-dunyā, fa'l-yawma nansāhum kamā nasū liqāʾa yawmihim hādhā wa mā kānū bi-āyātinā yajḥadūn

"The people of the Fire call out to the people of the Garden: 'Pour down on us some water, or some of what God has provided you.' They say: 'God has forbidden both to the deniers.' · Those who took their religion as a diversion and a game, and whom the life of this world deluded. So today We forget them — just as they forgot the meeting of this day of theirs, and as they used knowingly to deny Our signs."

The fourth call — a count of the scene

In this section nidāʾ (calling out) occurs four times, and all four come from a different direction. This is a countable datum:

#VerseWho callsAddresseeWhat is said
144The people of the GardenThe people of the FireQad wajadnā mā waʿadanā rabbunā ḥaqqāa question of confirmation
246The people of al-AʿrāfThe people of the GardenSalāmun ʿalaykuma greeting
348The people of al-AʿrāfThose who were proudMā aghnā ʿankum jamʿukuma question of reckoning
450The people of the FireThe people of the GardenAfīḍū ʿalaynāa request

Four calls, three different parties. And the direction of the sequence is worth recording: the first three come from above downwards or from the side, the fourth from below upwards.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the subjects of the four verses: through the section the speech is not one-directional. But one thing never changes: in no call does the addressee give the caller what he asks. In the forty-fourth verse the answer is "yes", but a curse follows it; in the fiftieth the answer is a flat refusal.

أَفِيضُوا۟ — the picture in the root

The root ف-ي-ض: a vessel filling and overflowing, the flowing of what overflows. Fāḍa'l-māʾu — the water overflowed. Afāḍa (Form IV) — to make overflow, to make flow, to pour.

The choice of the word is worth recording, and this is an observation about word order: what is asked for is not "give us" (aʿṭūnā) but "pour down on us". That is, the request rests on the assumption that what is to be given is abundant — a portion is asked of something that is overflowing.

And the same root is used in the Qurʾān in the passage on the pilgrimage too (thumma afīḍū min ḥaythu afāḍa'n-nās — al-Baqara 2/199) — there the pouring of people from a place is described. The picture in the root is the same in both: a mass in flow.

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ حَرَّمَهُمَا عَلَى ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ

The construction of the answer must be recorded: the people of the Garden do not say "we will not give". They are not the subject of the sentence: inna'llāha ḥarramahumāthe one who has forbidden is God.

I record this as an observation about word order: the refusal is given not as a personal stance but as the announcement of a ruling. And this accords with the forty-third verse: there the ghill (rancour) had been pulled out of the breasts of the people of the Garden. In the mouth of a company from whom rancour has been removed, a refusal can only be built this way.

And the pronoun humā (the two of them) must be recorded: two things were asked for — water and provision; and the refusal covers both at once.

لَهْوًا وَلَعِبًا — what was done with the religion

The root ل-ه-و: to be diverted, to be occupied with what keeps one from the real business. The root ل-ع-ب: play, an unserious occupation.

The lexicographers give the difference between the two words thus: laʿib is an occupation aimless in itself, while lahw is what keeps a person from his real business. That is, one looks to the act itself, the other to its outcome.

And the word order must be recorded: ittakhadhū dīnahum lahwan wa laʿibā — what is abandoned is not the religion; the religion itself has been turned into a game.

What could have been saidWhat is said
Tarakū dīnahum — they abandoned their religionIttakhadhū dīnahum lahwan wa laʿibā — they took their religion as a diversion and a game

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the object of the verb: the verse describes not the abandonment of religion but its being kept in hand and emptied of content. The religion stands where it was; its function has changed.

And this is the same pattern recorded in many places in al-Baqara: the form is preserved, the function is emptied. I rely on those treatments.

The same phrase can be compared once more with the passage on zīna treated at the thirty-first verse: there, what had been made lawful was held forbidden; here, what is serious is turned into a game. Two errors, in opposite directions.

فَٱلْيَوْمَ نَنسَىٰهُمْ كَمَا نَسُوا۟ — requital, and a note of tanzīh

The sentence is built with kamā: the requital is named in the language of the offence itself.

And in ascribing the verb to God a note of tanzīh is needed. This note was entered at 9/67 in al-Tawba (nasu'llāha fa-nasiyahum), and I rely on it: the Qurʾān itself says wa mā kāna rabbuka nasiyyā (Maryam 19/64). For this reason nansāhum here is explained, by the shared note of the lexicographers and the exegetes, by the second sense of the root — to leave aside, not to attend to, not to take into account. I do not repeat it here.

What belongs here is the name of what was forgotten: liqāʾa yawmihim hādhā"the meeting of this day of theirs". That is, what was forgotten is not a piece of information but an appointment.


7/52-53

وَلَقَدْ جِئْنَٰهُم بِكِتَٰبٍ فَصَّلْنَٰهُ عَلَىٰ عِلْمٍ هُدًى وَرَحْمَةً لِّقَوْمٍ يُؤْمِنُونَ · هَلْ يَنظُرُونَ إِلَّا تَأْوِيلَهُۥ يَوْمَ يَأْتِى تَأْوِيلُهُۥ يَقُولُ ٱلَّذِينَ نَسُوهُ مِن قَبْلُ قَدْ جَآءَتْ رُسُلُ رَبِّنَا بِٱلْحَقِّ فَهَل لَّنَا مِن شُفَعَآءَ فَيَشْفَعُوا۟ لَنَآ أَوْ نُرَدُّ فَنَعْمَلَ غَيْرَ ٱلَّذِى كُنَّا نَعْمَلُ

Wa laqad jiʾnāhum bi-kitābin faṣṣalnāhu ʿalā ʿilmin hudan wa raḥmatan li-qawmin yuʾminūn · Hal yanẓurūna illā taʾwīlah, yawma yaʾtī taʾwīluhū yaqūlu'lladhīna nasūhu min qablu qad jāʾat rusulu rabbinā bi'l-ḥaqq, fa-hal lanā min shufaʿāʾa fa-yashfaʿū lanā aw nuraddu fa-naʿmala ghayra'lladhī kunnā naʿmal, qad khasirū anfusahum wa ḍalla ʿanhum mā kānū yaftarūn

"We brought them a Book which We set out in detail upon knowledge — a guidance and a mercy for a people who believe. · Are they waiting for anything but its outcome? On the day its outcome comes, those who forgot it before will say: 'The messengers of our Lord did come with the truth. Have we now any intercessors to intercede for us? Or could we be sent back, that we might do other than what we used to do?' They have lost themselves, and what they used to invent has gone astray from them."

فَصَّلْنَٰهُ عَلَىٰ عِلْمٍ

The root ف-ص-ل: to separate two things from one another; to set a division. Faṣl — separating. Form II (faṣṣala) states multiplicity: to separate piece by piece, to set out in detail.

And the phrase is a pattern repeated in al-Aʿrāf. It is a countable datum:

VerseExpression
32Kadhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti li-qawmin yaʿlamūn
52Bi-kitābin faṣṣalnāhu ʿalā ʿilm
145Wa katabnā lahū fi'l-alwāḥi min kulli shayʾin mawʿiẓatan wa tafṣīlan li-kulli shayʾ
174Wa kadhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti wa laʿallahum yarjiʿūn

Three of the four occurrences are for this Book, one for the tablets given to Moses. That is, the sūra ascribes the same verb to two Books. I record this as an observation.

عَلَىٰ عِلْمٍ — "upon a knowledge". The particle ʿalā: the ground on which the work of setting out in detail rests is stated. And this is the same word as fa-la-naquṣṣanna ʿalayhim bi-ʿilmin in the sixth and seventh verses. The sūra ties both the recounting and the setting out in detail to the same word.

تَأْوِيل — the root of the word

The root أ-و-ل: the place to which a thing returns, the end it reaches. Āla ilayh — it returned to it, it came to it. Taʾwīl is the place where a word or an event comes out in the end — that is, the announcement in its realised form.

This differs from the sense "interpretation" that the word acquired later, and here the verse itself says which it means: yawma yaʾtī taʾwīluhthe taʾwīl "comes". What comes is not an interpretation but an event.

I give this as a note about the word, and its ground is the verb itself.

فَهَل لَّنَا مِن شُفَعَآءَأَوْ نُرَدُّ

There are two requests in the sentence, and both are joined by aw (or):

#RequestWhat is asked
1Hal lanā min shufaʿāʾa fa-yashfaʿū lanāAn intermediary — that the sentence be lightened from outside
2Aw nuraddu fa-naʿmala ghayra'lladhī kunnā naʿmalA return — that the work be done again from the start

And the order of the two requests is worth recording: first the intermediary, then their own hand. I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the order: what comes to mind first is not putting right what one did oneself, but someone's stepping in between.

And nuraddu is passive: "if we were sent back". They do not speak of returning by their own power.

This second request is recorded elsewhere in the Qurʾān as well, and each time it goes unanswered (al-Anʿām 6/27-28; al-Muʾminūn 23/99-100 — treated in al-Muʾminūn). I rely on those treatments.


7/54

إِنَّ رَبَّكُمُ ٱللَّهُ ٱلَّذِى خَلَقَ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضَ فِى سِتَّةِ أَيَّامٍ ثُمَّ ٱسْتَوَىٰ عَلَى ٱلْعَرْشِ يُغْشِى ٱلَّيْلَ ٱلنَّهَارَ يَطْلُبُهُۥ حَثِيثًا وَٱلشَّمْسَ وَٱلْقَمَرَ وَٱلنُّجُومَ مُسَخَّرَٰتٍۭ بِأَمْرِهِۦٓ أَلَا لَهُ ٱلْخَلْقُ وَٱلْأَمْرُ تَبَارَكَ ٱللَّهُ رَبُّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ

Inna rabbakumu'llāhu'lladhī khalaqa's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍa fī sittati ayyāmin thumma'stawā ʿala'l-ʿarsh, yughshi'l-layla'n-nahāra yaṭlubuhū ḥathīthā, wa'sh-shamsa wa'l-qamara wa'n-nujūma musakhkharātin bi-amrih, alā lahu'l-khalqu wa'l-amr, tabāraka'llāhu rabbu'l-ʿālamīn

"Your Lord is God, who created the heavens and the earth in six days, then mounted the Throne. He covers the day with the night — the night pursues it swiftly. And the sun, the moon and the stars are made subservient by His command. His alone are the creating and the command. Blessed is God, the Lord of all the worlds!"

The place of the verse in the sūra

This verse opens the fifth block of the sūra (54-58), and what opens the block is a change of address. Up to the fifty-third verse the scene was in the hereafter; the fifty-fourth turns directly to the addressee: inna rabbakum.

I record this as an observation about word order: the scene of the hereafter closes with ḍalla ʿanhum mā kānū yaftarūnwhat was invented disappears. Immediately afterwards comes the description of the real Lord. The place that has been emptied is filled.

فِى سِتَّةِ أَيَّامٍ — and the keeping of the limit

This expression was treated in the index at 50/38 in Qāf and at 41/9-12 in Fuṣṣilat. I rely on those treatments and keep both notes here too:

One — the note at 50/38 in Qāf: the word ي-و-م in Arabic does not mean only "a twenty-four-hour day"; the primary sense of the root is a stretch of time, a period. How long the six "days" lasted is not stated and is not known.

Two — the note at 41/9-12 in Fuṣṣilat: modern cosmology is not dressed onto these verses; the days are not equated with geological ages. Such an equation would be to make the text say what it does not say (Method).

These two limits hold here as well, and I do not repeat them.

What belongs here is what follows the expression, and this differs in the three sūras:

PlaceWhat comes after sittati ayyām
Qāf 50/38Wa mā massanā min lughūbthe negation of weariness
Fuṣṣilat 41/9-12A detailed accounting of the days and dhālika taqdīru'l-ʿazīzi'l-ʿalīm
al-Aʿrāf 7/54Istiwāʾ, and after it the scene of night and day

Three sūras tie the same expression to three different places: one to power, one to measure, one to governance. I record this as an observation.

ٱسْتَوَىٰ عَلَى ٱلْعَرْشِ — a note of tanzīh, without opening the debate

Per the method (Method) I enter a note about this phrase, and I do not open the debate.

At 40/7 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) the note kept consistently throughout the index for expressions concerning the Throne was entered, and I rely on it: these expressions cannot be understood so as to ascribe place, body or movement to God. Two chief attitudes are transmitted in the classical commentaries for verses of this kind:

AttitudeWhat is done
TafwīḍThe wording is accepted as it stands, and its modality is referred to God
TaʾwīlIt is interpreted in the sense of sovereignty and disposal

I convey both and impose no preference. The same note was entered at 32/4 in al-Sajda and at 20/5 in Ṭāhā; the shared principle is al-Shūrā 42/11. I do not repeat it, and I enter into no polemic of kalām (Method).

What belongs here is only a datum of the text, and it was counted at 20/5 in Ṭāhā: the phrase occurs in seven places in the Qurʾānal-Aʿrāf 7/54, Yūnus 10/3, al-Raʿd 13/2, Ṭāhā 20/5, al-Furqān 25/59, al-Sajda 32/4, al-Ḥadīd 57/4. This verse is the first of those seven.

يُغْشِى ٱلَّيْلَ ٱلنَّهَارَ يَطْلُبُهُۥ حَثِيثًا — the third picture

The Qurʾān tells of night and day following one another with several different pictures. Two of them were treated in the index; this is the third, and I compare the three in a table:

PlaceVerbRootPicture
Luqmān 31/29 (and al-Ḥadīd 57/6)Yūliju'l-layla fi'n-nahāri wa yūliju'n-nahāra fi'l-laylو-ل-جTo pass one inside the other — each is thrust into the other
al-Zumar 39/5Yukawwiru'l-layla ʿala'n-nahāri wa yukawwiru'n-nahāra ʿala'l-laylك-و-رTo wind over — as a turban is wound, each over the other
al-Aʿrāf 7/54Yughshi'l-layla'n-nahāra yaṭlubuhū ḥathīthāغ-ش-و + ط-ل-بTo cover and to pursue — one covers the other over, running after it

The concrete senses of the three roots must be recorded separately:

  • و-ل-ج — to enter through a narrow place. Wulūj — entry. Picture: passing one within the other.
  • ك-و-ر — to wind a thing by folding. Kawr — the winding of a turban. Picture: winding over.
  • غ-ش-و — to cover a thing over, to overspread. Ghishāwa — the film that comes over the eye (it occurred at 45/23 in al-Jāthiya). Picture: closing over the top.
  • ط-ل-ب — to seek, to look for, to go after. Picture: coming from behind.

حَثِيثًا — the root ح-ث-ث: to urge on, to go continuously and fast. Ḥaththa — he drove without stopping, he urged on. Ḥathīth means "without any halt and fast". The word in this pattern occurs only here in the Qurʾān; this is a countable datum.

And the difference of the three pictures is worth recording. I give this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the concrete senses of the three roots:

Luqmān 31/29al-Zumar 39/5al-Aʿrāf 7/54
Kind of relationInterpenetrationWindingPursuit
Is it reciprocalYes — two-directionalYes — two-directionalNo — one-directional
Is speed statedNoNoYesḥathīthā

The third row is what belongs to al-Aʿrāf alone: only here is there a note of speed, and only here is the movement one-directional.

And this accords with the rest of the sūra — I give this as a reading: al-Aʿrāf is the sūra that tells of something that comes in haste. In the fourth verse the destruction had come bayātan aw hum qāʾilūn (by night or in the noon sleep); in the thirty-fourth the term was not delayed by even an hour. The ḥathīthā of the fifty-fourth verse is the picture of the same line on the scale of the universe.

On the connection with natural science I draw the limit: no conclusion about planetary motion, rotational speed or the terminator line is to be drawn from this. The verse builds the picture of an observation: on the horizon, darkness coming swiftly after light. This is a fact everyone sees with his own eyes, and it is what the verse uses (Method).

مُسَخَّرَٰتٍۭ بِأَمْرِهِۦ and أَلَا لَهُ ٱلْخَلْقُ وَٱلْأَمْرُ

The root س-خ-ر: to make a thing subservient to a work, to set it to service.

And the closing of the verse must be recorded: alā lahu'l-khalqu wa'l-amr. Two words are set side by side, and both had occurred within the verse:

WordWhere it occurred in the verse
KhalqKhalaqa's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍat the beginning
AmrMusakhkharātin bi-amrihat the end

That is, the closing sentence gathers the verse's own two halves. I record this as an observation about word order.

And the lexicographers give the difference of the two words thus: khalq is to bring into being, amr is to govern what has been brought into being. The sentence ties both at once to the same placeand this is the ground of what will be repeated in the later sections of the sūra: the one who creates is the one who lays down the ruling (see 7/32, 7/33, 7/70).

تَبَارَكَ — the root ب-ر-ك: a thing's being fixed and lasting; and from this, blessing, increasing good. The pattern is Form VI, and the lexicographers give here the sense "the fixedness of loftiness and abundance". The word will occur once more in this sūra, at the ninety-sixth verse, in the form barakāt.


7/55-56

ٱدْعُوا۟ رَبَّكُمْ تَضَرُّعًا وَخُفْيَةً إِنَّهُۥ لَا يُحِبُّ ٱلْمُعْتَدِينَ · وَلَا تُفْسِدُوا۟ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ بَعْدَ إِصْلَٰحِهَا وَٱدْعُوهُ خَوْفًا وَطَمَعًا إِنَّ رَحْمَتَ ٱللَّهِ قَرِيبٌ مِّنَ ٱلْمُحْسِنِينَ

Udʿū rabbakum taḍarruʿan wa khufya, innahū lā yuḥibbu'l-muʿtadīn · Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿā, inna raḥmata'llāhi qarībun mina'l-muḥsinīn

"Call upon your Lord in humility and in secret. He does not love those who exceed the bounds. · Do not work corruption on the earth after it has been set in order. Call upon Him in fear and in hope. The mercy of God is near to those who do good."

The place of the passage on supplication

The fifty-fourth verse had stated who the Lord is; the fifty-fifth says how He is to be called upon. The order is worth recording: first the description, then the manner of address.

تَضَرُّعًا وَخُفْيَةً

The root ض-ر-ع: weakness, submission, being brought low. Ḍariʿ — weak, without strength. Form V (taḍarruʿ) states a person's putting himself into that condition: to lower oneself, to plead.

The root خ-ف-ي: to hide, to conceal. Khufya — secrecy.

The relation of the two words must be recorded: one is a bearing, the other a level of voice.

WordWhat it looks to
TaḍarruʿanThe inward state — holding oneself small
KhufyatanThe outward state — the voice not being heard

And this pair will overlap with one of the last verses of the sūra. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra:

VerseExpression
7/55Udʿū rabbakum taḍarruʿan wa khufyatan
7/205Wa'dhkur rabbaka fī nafsika taḍarruʿan wa khīfatan wa dūna'l-jahri mina'l-qawl

In both verses the same word (taḍarruʿ), and in both a note about the voice. The difference: at 55 khufya (secrecy), at 205 khīfa (fear). That is, where the sūra opens the command to pray and where it closes it, it presses on the same two axes: lowering oneself, and voice. I record this as my own reading; its ground is the words of the two verses.

إِنَّهُۥ لَا يُحِبُّ ٱلْمُعْتَدِينَ — the place the sentence attaches to

The root ع-د-و: to exceed the bound, to cross the limit. Iʿtidāʾ — Form VIII.

And a question of word order must be recorded: exceeding the bound in what does the sentence forbid? Two readings are transmitted in the classical commentaries, and I give the disagreement in a table:

ReadingWhere the iʿtidāʾ isGround
1In supplication — exceeding the bound while praying (shouting, asking for what cannot be, demanding what is not one's own)That the sentence comes immediately after the supplication; that the qualification taḍarruʿan wa khufyatan is setting a measure
2In general — exceeding the bound in every fieldThat the sentence is left without an object; that the word al-muʿtadīn comes unrestricted

Both readings are transmitted. I do not impose a preference. And the two do not exclude each other: the next verse already moves out of supplication and on to the earth.

وَلَا تُفْسِدُوا۟ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ بَعْدَ إِصْلَٰحِهَا

This sentence occurs twice in the sūra, in word-for-word identical form56 and 85and its second occurrence is in the mouth of Shuʿayb. This repetition was tabulated in the section on the structure of the sūra; I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

What belongs here is the link built between supplication and corruption:

VerseCommandField
55Udʿū rabbakumVertical — the servant towards his Lord
56aWa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍHorizontal — the servant towards the earth
56bWa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿāVertical — supplication again

That is, the command about the earth has been placed between two commands about supplication. I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the order of the three sentences.

بَعْدَ إِصْلَٰحِهَا — "after it has been set in order". What must be recorded is this: the sentence presupposes a prior condition. The earth is named not as a neutral ground but as a ground that has been set right. Corruption is described not as adding something to a void but as breaking an order that exists.

Who set it right is not stated, and several explanations are transmitted in the classical commentaries for this gap (the order in creation; the order the messengers brought; both at once). The text does not name it; nor do I make a preference.

خَوْفًا وَطَمَعًا — the third note in the index

This pair was treated in the index, and I rely on those treatments:

PlaceExpressionWhose state
al-Rūm 30/24Yurīkumu'l-barqa khawfan wa ṭamaʿāThe state of one who looks at lightning — fear of the bolt, hope of rain
al-Raʿd 13/12Yurīkumu'l-barqa khawfan wa ṭamaʿāThe same scene — treated on the basis of al-Rūm
al-Sajda 32/16Yadʿūna rabbahum khawfan wa ṭamaʿāThe state of one who prays
al-Aʿrāf 7/56Wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿāA command — the one who prays is commanded

And what al-Aʿrāf adds must be recorded, and it is a datum of the text: in al-Rūm and al-Raʿd the pair is the description of an observation, in al-Sajda the attribute of a company, and in al-Aʿrāf a direct command.

That is, the same pair occurs in the index first as a fact, then as an attribute, and here as a demand. I record this as an observation.

And within the sūra this pair has a precedent — it was treated at the forty-sixth and forty-seventh verses: the people of al-Aʿrāf, looking towards the Garden, were yaṭmaʿūn (hoping), and looking towards the Fire were saying rabbanā lā tajʿalnā maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn (fearing). The fifty-sixth verse turns the state described there into a command. This link was recorded at 46-47; here it closes.

إِنَّ رَحْمَتَ ٱللَّهِ قَرِيبٌ — a grammatical point

A point of word order must be recorded, and the lexicographers dwell on it: raḥma is a feminine word, but its predicate comes as qarībun — masculine. The expected form would be qarībatun.

The lexicographers give several explanations, and I convey all of them as transmitted, imposing no preference:

#Explanation
1Raḥma here is grammatically feminine only (it states no real femininity); the predicate of such words may come masculine
2Qarīb is used here not as an adjective but as an adverbial — in the sense "in a near place"; adverbials do not take the feminine
3Raḥma stands in place of a masculine word of like meaning such as raḥm or faḍl

This is a question of case (iʿrāb) that does not change the meaning and generates no ruling; I record it for the sake of the analysis of the word.

And it must be recorded to whom the mercy is near: mina'l-muḥsinīn. It does not say those who pray, but those who do good. I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the word itself: for two verses supplication has been described, and at the closing the measure set is not supplication itself but conduct.


7/57-58

وَهُوَ ٱلَّذِى يُرْسِلُ ٱلرِّيَٰحَ بُشْرًۢا بَيْنَ يَدَىْ رَحْمَتِهِۦ حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَآ أَقَلَّتْ سَحَابًا ثِقَالًا سُقْنَٰهُ لِبَلَدٍ مَّيِّتٍ فَأَنزَلْنَا بِهِ ٱلْمَآءَ فَأَخْرَجْنَا بِهِۦ مِن كُلِّ ٱلثَّمَرَٰتِ كَذَٰلِكَ نُخْرِجُ ٱلْمَوْتَىٰ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَذَكَّرُونَ · وَٱلْبَلَدُ ٱلطَّيِّبُ يَخْرُجُ نَبَاتُهُۥ بِإِذْنِ رَبِّهِۦ وَٱلَّذِى خَبُثَ لَا يَخْرُجُ إِلَّا نَكِدًا كَذَٰلِكَ نُصَرِّفُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ لِقَوْمٍ يَشْكُرُونَ

Wa huwa'lladhī yursilu'r-riyāḥa bushran bayna yaday raḥmatih, ḥattā idhā aqallat saḥāban thiqālan suqnāhu li-baladin mayyitin fa-anzalnā bihi'l-māʾa fa-akhrajnā bihī min kulli'th-thamarāt, kadhālika nukhriju'l-mawtā laʿallakum tadhakkarūn · Wa'l-baladu'ṭ-ṭayyibu yakhruju nabātuhū bi-idhni rabbih, wa'lladhī khabutha lā yakhruju illā nakidā, kadhālika nuṣarrifu'l-āyāti li-qawmin yashkurūn

"It is He who sends the winds as bearers of good news before His mercy. Then, when they have taken up heavy clouds, We drive them to a dead land and send down water by them, and by it bring forth every kind of fruit. So too do We bring forth the dead — perhaps you will take it to heart. · The good land brings forth its plants by the leave of its Lord; but that which is bad brings forth nothing but a stunted growth. Thus do We turn the signs about for a people who give thanks."

بُشْرًۢا بَيْنَ يَدَىْ رَحْمَتِهِۦ

بَيْنَ يَدَىْ — word for word "between his two hands"; in Arabic it is an idiom meaning "before him, ahead of him". The rain is named raḥma (mercy), and the wind is the good news that goes before it.

A note on the variant reading: for the word bushran the readings nushran (scattering), nushuran and nashran are also transmitted. The difference affects the meaning: on the first reading the wind is a bearer of good news, on the others a scatterer, a disperser. Both senses accord with the picture of the verse; I do not impose a preference.

حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَآ أَقَلَّتْ سَحَابًا ثِقَالًا — shifts of pronoun and person

There are two shifts in the verse, and both must be recorded.

One — the person changes: the sentence begins with huwa'lladhī yursilu (third person), then becomes suqnāhu … fa-anzalnā … fa-akhrajnā (first person plural). This is the technique called iltifāt (a shift in the direction of address) in Arabic, and it was treated in many places in the index.

I record this as an observation about word order: the shift comes exactly at the point where the verb turns into direct intervention — the wind "is sent", but of the cloud it is said "We drove it".

Two — the number changes: saḥāban thiqālan (heavy clouds, plural adjective) is said, and immediately after it suqnā-hu (it, singular). The lexicographers explain this by the fact that the word saḥāb can count both as a collective noun and as a plural.

أَقَلَّتْ — the root ق-ل-ل: fewness; in Form IV it gives the sense to lift a thing, to take up a load. The lexicographers tie this sense to the picture of "finding a load light and lifting it". That is, the wind carries the heavy cloud as though it were a light load.

I give this as a note about the word, and its ground is the meeting of the root's two senses in the same pattern: the verse sets thiqālan (heavy) and aqallat (lifted lightly) side by side. This is a contrast that can be read from the text.

كَذَٰلِكَ نُخْرِجُ ٱلْمَوْتَىٰ — the form of the proof

The verse passes from an observation to a conclusion, and the particle of transition is kadhālika (thus).

And that the verb is the same must be recorded: fa-akhrajnā bihī min kulli'th-thamarātkadhālika nukhriju'l-mawtā. The same verb, two objects.

ObjectFrom whereVerb
Min kulli'th-thamarātA dead landAkhrajnā
Al-mawtā(not stated)Nukhriju

I record this as an observation about word order: the proof is built not by a likeness but by repeating the same verb. And this connects with the twenty-fifth verse of the sūra: wa minhā tukhrajūn. The same root, the same work.

The likeness of the two soils — and a comparison with al-Raʿd 13/4

The fifty-eighth verse is one of the densest likenesses in the Qurʾān, and it must be read together with the observation treated at 13/4 in al-Raʿd.

What was recorded at 13/4 in al-Raʿd was this, and I rely on it:

What is sharedWhat differs
Yusqā bi-māʾin wāḥidone waterNufaḍḍilu baʿḍahā ʿalā baʿḍin fi'l-ukulthe fruits

The conclusion recorded there was this: the same soil, the same water, even the same root — and yet a different fruit; that is, the difference does not lie in the means that come from outside.

Now I set the two verses side by side, and the difference can be read from the text:

al-Raʿd 13/4al-Aʿrāf 7/58
What is sharedWateryusqā bi-māʾin wāḥidWater — the rain that comes down in verse 57
The variableThe plantsṣinwānun wa ghayru ṣinwānThe soilal-baladu'ṭ-ṭayyib / alladhī khabutha
Where the difference standsAmong those that grow in the same soilBetween two different soils
The closing sentenceLi-qawmin yaʿqilūnLi-qawmin yashkurūn

This is a difference that can be verified from the two texts, and I record the following as my own reading: al-Raʿd shows the difference within the same ground; al-Aʿrāf shows the difference in the ground itself. Read together, two separate questions are answered: why those who receive the same means diverge (al-Raʿd), and why what is received does not yield the same result (al-Aʿrāf). This is an explanation, not a ruling.

طَيِّب and خَبُثَ — two roots

The root ط-ي-ب: to be pleasant, clean, good; and to be fertile. Baladun ṭayyib — according to the lexicographers, a land both pleasant and fertile.

The root خ-ب-ث: to be bad, foul, corrupt. The two roots regularly form an opposed pair in the Qurʾān.

And the pattern of the terms is worth recording, and this is a point of word order:

SideExpressionPattern
The good oneAl-baladu'ṭ-ṭayyibA noun (adjective) — a fixed attribute
The bad oneWa'lladhī khabuthaA verb (perfect) — a condition that came about

The expected construction would be wa'l-baladu'l-khabīth; the verse does not build it that way.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the difference of pattern: the good soil is named by an adjective, the bad soil by a verb. An adjective states a condition, a verb states a becoming. In the second a process is intimated. The text does not explain this; the difference of pattern, however, is a countable datum.

And on the second side the word balad is not repeated: wa'lladhī khabutha"that which is bad". The naming is left incomplete.

نَكِدًا

The root ن-ك-د: unfruitfulness, giving with difficulty and little. The lexicographers explain the word as "giving with hardship, in small amounts and grudgingly"; biʾrun nakidun — a well whose water comes up with difficulty.

The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān. This is a countable datum.

And there is a nicety to be recorded: the verse does not say "nothing comes forth". Lā yakhruju illā nakidāwith the particle of exception: something does come forth, but it is stunted.

I record this as an observation about word order: in the likeness the second side is not drawn as wholly barren. There is an output; its measure is low.

بِإِذْنِ رَبِّهِۦ — the position of the qualification

A point of word order must be recorded: the qualification bi-idhni rabbih is placed only on the first side. On the second side there is no such qualification.

The text does not say the reason for this. Several explanations are transmitted in the classical commentaries (that the qualification is placed on the good side to state that what comes forth is not of itself; or that a single qualification looks to both sides at once). I impose no preference and build no ruling; that the qualification stands on only one side is a datum that can be read from the text, and I write that much.

كَذَٰلِكَ نُصَرِّفُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ

The root ص-ر-ف had occurred at the forty-seventh verse (ṣurifat abṣāruhum); here it comes in Form II, and as was recorded at 46/27 in al-Aḥqāf, it states repetition and variation: the telling of the same thing by different routes and from different faces. I rely on that treatment.

And the root's three occurrences in the sūra can be gathered in a table:

VerseExpressionWho / what is turned
47Idhā ṣurifat abṣāruhumGazes — passive
58Kadhālika nuṣarrifu'l-āyātThe signs — variation
146Sa-aṣrifu ʿan āyātiya'lladhīna yatakabbarūnThe proud — being turned away from the signs

One root, three different works. This is a distribution that can be verified within the sūra.

And the closing of the fifty-eighth verse is li-qawmin yashkurūn. The tenth verse had ended with qalīlan mā tashkurūn. The sūra comes from where it stated the littleness of thanks to naming a people who give thanks. I record this as an observation.


7/59-93

7/59-93 — The sequence of prophets: al-Aʿrāf's own pattern

The sixth block of the sūra (59-102) tells of five prophets one after another: Noah, Hūd, Ṣāliḥ, Lot, Shuʿayb. The same five names occur in sequence in other sūras of the Qurʾān too, and two tables of pattern were drawn up in the index. I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them; I work out al-Aʿrāf's own pattern separately.

The two tables I rely on

SourceWhat was recorded there
al-Shuʿarāʾ"The backbone of the sūra: seven stories, four patterns"A four-part frame: the announcement of denial (kadhdhabat … al-mursalīn), the opening (idh qāla lahum akhūhum … alā tattaqūn), the threefold entry (innī lakum rasūlun amīn · fa'ttaqu'llāha wa aṭīʿūn · wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajr), the closing seal (inna fī dhālika la-āyatan… · wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm). Eight blocks, word for word the same seal.
HūdTable 3 and Table 4No seal, but five scattered closing patterns (jāʾa amrunā, najjaynā, buʿdan li-, ka-an lam yaghnaw fīhā, a closing of its own); and the sūra distributes its own opening call (istaghfirū rabbakum thumma tūbū ilayh, 11/3) among the mouths of three prophets. The address yā qawmi occurs sixteen times.

The difference between the three sūras can be gathered in a single sentence, and it is a countable datum: al-Shuʿarāʾ likens its stories to one another, Hūd separates them from one another, and al-Aʿrāf stands between the twoit has a shared opening sentence but no shared closing seal.

Al-Aʿrāf's own pattern — the opening

يَٰقَوْمِ ٱعْبُدُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ مَا لَكُم مِّنْ إِلَٰهٍ غَيْرُهُۥ Yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh "O my people! Serve God; you have no god but Him."

This sentence occurs four times in the sūra, in word-for-word identical form. This is the result of a count:

ProphetVerseWhat comes before the sentenceWhat comes after the sentence
Noah59Laqad arsalnā Nūḥan ilā qawmihī fa-qālaInnī akhāfu ʿalaykum ʿadhāba yawmin ʿaẓīma statement of fear
Hūd65Wa ilā ʿĀdin akhāhum Hūdā, qālaA-fa-lā tattaqūna question
Ṣāliḥ73Wa ilā Thamūda akhāhum Ṣāliḥā, qālaQad jāʾatkum bayyinatun min rabbikuma proof
Shuʿayb85Wa ilā Madyana akhāhum Shuʿaybā, qālaQad jāʾatkum bayyinatun min rabbikuma proof
Lot80Wa Lūṭan idh qāla li-qawmihīNo sentence — directly a-taʾtūna'l-fāḥishata

And four facts can be read straight off the table:

One — in the story of Lot there is no shared opening sentence. In four of the five stories yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh is present; in Lot's it is not. And as was recorded in the section on the structure of the sūra, the word malaʾ too is absent only from the story of Lot. Two absences gather in the same story; this is a countable datum.

Two — Noah's entry is built differently from the others. Only for Noah is the verb laqad arsalnā (We sent) used; for the others there is the pattern wa ilā … akhāhum (their brother), without a verb. That is, the first link of the sequence is built with a full sentence, the later ones by attachment.

Three — the qualification akhāhum (their brother) is present in three stories (65, 73, 85), and absent in Noah's and Lot's. In al-Shuʿarāʾ Table 2 the distribution of akhūhum in al-Shuʿarāʾ was worked out, and it was recorded there that it drops out in Shuʿayb's case, the reason being that the addressees are named by a place. In al-Aʿrāf the distribution is different: with Shuʿayb akhāhum is present, because al-Aʿrāf names the addressees as Madyanat 26/176 in al-Shuʿarāʾ the addressees were aṣḥābu'l-Ayka (the people of a place). The two sūras name the addressees of the same prophet by two different names, and the qualification akhūhum changes accordingly. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts, and it supports the explanation given at 26/176 in al-Shuʿarāʾ.

Four — what follows the opening sentence is different in every story: fear, question, proof, proof. What is shared is the call; what changes is the ground placed behind the call.

Al-Aʿrāf's own pattern — the closing

Al-Aʿrāf has no shared seal. The closings are scattered, and they can be tabulated:

ProphetClosingPattern
Noah (64)Fa-kadhdhabūhu fa-anjaynāhu wa'lladhīna maʿahū fi'l-fulki wa aghraqnā'lladhīna kadhdhabūDeliverance + drowning
Hūd (72)Fa-anjaynāhu wa'lladhīna maʿahū bi-raḥmatin minnā wa qaṭaʿnā dābira'lladhīna kadhdhabūDeliverance + cutting off the line
Ṣāliḥ (78)Fa-akhadhathumu'r-rajfatu fa-aṣbaḥū fī dārihim jāthimīnThe quaking
Lot (83-84)Fa-anjaynāhu wa ahlahū … wa amṭarnā ʿalayhim maṭarāDeliverance + a raining down
Shuʿayb (91)Fa-akhadhathumu'r-rajfatu fa-aṣbaḥū fī dārihim jāthimīnThe quaking

And two data must be recorded:

One — the seventy-eighth and ninety-first verses are word for word identical. This repetition was counted in the section on the structure of the sūra; here it falls into place: al-Aʿrāf's only word-for-word repeated closing is between Thamūd and Madyan.

Two — in three stories anjaynā (We delivered) is present, in two it is absent (Ṣāliḥ and Shuʿayb). And in exactly those two stories the rajfa is present. That is, where deliverance is named the quaking is not, and where the quaking is named deliverance is not. I record this as the result of a count; the text does not say the reason, and I invent no reason.

A third shared element: fa-tawallā ʿanhum wa qāla

Two stories end with the same sentence, and both are in a prophet's mouth:

VerseWhoSentence
79ṢāliḥFa-tawallā ʿanhum wa qāla yā qawmi laqad ablaghtukum risālata rabbī wa naṣaḥtu lakum wa lākin lā tuḥibbūna'n-nāṣiḥīn
93ShuʿaybFa-tawallā ʿanhum wa qāla yā qawmi laqad ablaghtukum risālāti rabbī wa naṣaḥtu lakum, fa-kayfa āsā ʿalā qawmin kāfirīn

The only difference is singular against plural: risālata (singular) and risālāti (plural). This is a difference that can be verified from the text, and the lexicographers explain risālāt by "the multiplicity of the messages sent".

And the second difference is at the end of the sentence: Ṣāliḥ says lā tuḥibbūna'n-nāṣiḥīn (you do not love those who counsel) — he describes the addressee; Shuʿayb says fa-kayfa āsā ʿalā qawmin kāfirīn (how then should I grieve?) — he states his own condition.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the endings of the two sentences: the same pattern is used twice, and in both the final sentence is a note of feeling, and the two look in different directions.

The word peculiar to this block of the sūra: نُصْح

The root ن-ص-ح: purity, freedom from admixture; and from this, to counsel out of a wish for another's good. The lexicographers tie the root to the pictures of the clarifying of honey (nāṣiḥu'l-ʿasal — pure honey) and the soundness of a seam (niṣāḥ — sewing thread). That is, counsel is both unmixed and something that joins parts together.

The root occurs four times in this block, and this is a countable datum:

VerseExpressionWho
62Wa anṣaḥu lakumNoah
68Wa anā lakum nāṣiḥun amīnHūd
79Wa naṣaḥtu lakum … lā tuḥibbūna'n-nāṣiḥīnṢāliḥ
93Wa naṣaḥtu lakumShuʿayb

And the same root had occurred once more in the second block of the sūra — but in the opposite direction: wa qāsamahumā innī lakumā la-mina'n-nāṣiḥīn (21) — in the mouth of Iblīs.

This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record the following as my own reading: al-Aʿrāf puts the sentence "I am one who counsels you" first into the mouth of a liar, then into the mouths of four prophets. And the difference between them is given in the sūra's own words: Iblīs's is built with an oath (wa qāsamahumā), the prophets' without one. This is an explanation, not a ruling.


7/59-64

7/59-64 — Noah

Laqad arsalnā Nūḥan ilā qawmihī fa-qāla yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh, innī akhāfu ʿalaykum ʿadhāba yawmin ʿaẓīm · Qāla'l-malaʾu min qawmihī innā la-narāka fī ḍalālin mubīn · Qāla yā qawmi laysa bī ḍalālatun wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · Uballighukum risālāti rabbī wa anṣaḥu lakum wa aʿlamu mina'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn · A-wa ʿajibtum an jāʾakum dhikrun min rabbikum ʿalā rajulin minkum li-yundhirakum wa li-tattaqū wa laʿallakum turḥamūn · Fa-kadhdhabūhu fa-anjaynāhu wa'lladhīna maʿahū fi'l-fulki wa aghraqnā'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā innahum kānū qawman ʿamīn

"We sent Noah to his people. He said: 'O my people! Serve God; you have no god but Him. I fear for you the punishment of a mighty day.' · The notables of his people said: 'We see you in plain error.' · He said: 'O my people! There is no error in me; I am a messenger from the Lord of all the worlds. · I convey to you the messages of my Lord, and I counsel you, and I know from God what you do not know. · Do you find it strange that a reminder from your Lord should come to you through a man from among yourselves, to warn you, that you may guard yourselves and be shown mercy?' · They called him a liar; so We delivered him and those with him in the ark, and drowned those who called Our signs lies. They were indeed a blind people."

إِنَّا لَنَرَىٰكَ فِى ضَلَٰلٍ مُّبِينٍ and the form of the answer

The relation between the words of the other side and the words of the answer must be recorded, and this is a point of word order:

WhoExpressionPattern of the word
The notables (60)Innā la-narāka fī ḍalālin mubīnḌalāl — verbal noun
Noah (61)Laysa bī ḍalālatunḌalāla — feminine verbal noun

The two words are from the same root (ض-ل-ل) but their patterns differ. The lexicographers explain this difference thus: the pattern ḍalāla lends itself, as against ḍalāl, to a negation that takes in even the smallest amountthat is, the answer means not "I am not in a great error" but "there is no straying in me at all".

I convey this explanation as it is transmitted, and the difference of pattern is a datum that can be read from the text.

And the construction of the answer must also be recorded: laysa bī ḍalālatun wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn. The objection is rejected and something is put in its place. I record this as an observation about word order: the answer is not a defence but a statement of identity.

And the same two-step answer will be repeated word for word in the story of Hūd (66-67: the objection safāhalaysa bī safāhatun wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn). The same structure in two stories, with two different words of objection. This is a countable datum and will be tabulated at Hūd.

وَأَعْلَمُ مِنَ ٱللَّهِ مَا لَا تَعْلَمُونَ

The limit of the sentence must be recorded: aʿlamu mina'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn — the source of the knowledge is stated.

That is, the sentence does not say "I know more than you"; it says "I know something that comes from God". I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the particle min.

أَوَعَجِبْتُمْ أَن جَآءَكُمْ ذِكْرٌ

The sentence begins with a question, and the subject of the question is not what has come but through whom it has come: ʿalā rajulin minkum.

And this question occurs twice in the sūra, in almost the same words:

VerseWhoSentence
63NoahA-wa ʿajibtum an jāʾakum dhikrun min rabbikum ʿalā rajulin minkum li-yundhirakum wa li-tattaqū wa laʿallakum turḥamūn
69HūdA-wa ʿajibtum an jāʾakum dhikrun min rabbikum ʿalā rajulin minkum li-yundhirakum

The difference: with Noah three purposes are counted (warning, guarding, mercy), with Hūd only one (warning). This is a difference that can be verified from the text.

And the subject of the objection is worth recording: what is objected to is not the message but the messenger's being a human being. The same objection will be turned back on the addressee in the last block of the sūra (7/184: a-wa lam yatafakkarū mā bi-ṣāḥibihim min jinna). This link will close at verse 184.

كَانُوا۟ قَوْمًا عَمِينَ — the word of the closing

The root ع-م-ي: blindness. ʿAmīn is the plural of ʿamā, and the lexicographers record a difference of emphasis between aʿmā (one whose eye does not see) and ʿamī: ʿamī is used more for blindness of heart.

I convey this explanation as it is transmitted.

And the place of the word in the sūra must be recorded: the theme of blindness will return in the last block of the sūra7/179 (lahum aʿyunun lā yubṣirūna bihā) and 7/198 (wa tarāhum yanẓurūna ilayka wa hum lā yubṣirūn). The word the sūra uses to close the first story of the sequence it turns at the end into a general diagnosis. I record this as an observation.


7/65-72

7/65-72 — Hūd

Wa ilā ʿĀdin akhāhum Hūdā, qāla yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh, a-fa-lā tattaqūn · Qāla'l-malaʾu'lladhīna kafarū min qawmihī innā la-narāka fī safāhatin wa innā la-naẓunnuka mina'l-kādhibīn · Qāla yā qawmi laysa bī safāhatun wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · Uballighukum risālāti rabbī wa anā lakum nāṣiḥun amīn

"And to ʿĀd [We sent] their brother Hūd. He said: 'O my people! Serve God; you have no god but Him. Will you not then guard yourselves?' · The notables of his people who denied said: 'We see you in folly, and we think you are one of the liars.' · He said: 'O my people! There is no folly in me; I am a messenger from the Lord of all the worlds. · I convey to you the messages of my Lord, and I am to you a trustworthy counsellor.'"

Two objections, one structure

In the stories of Noah and Hūd the objection and the answer settle into the same pattern. This is a countable datum:

Noah (60-61)Hūd (66-67)
The objectorAl-malaʾu min qawmihwithout qualifierAl-malaʾu'lladhīna kafarū min qawmih
The word of the objectionḌalāl — straying from the waySafāha — lightness of mind
A second objection(none)Wa innā la-naẓunnuka mina'l-kādhibīnthe suspicion of lying
The answerLaysa bī ḍalālatun wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīnLaysa bī safāhatun wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn
What followsWa anṣaḥu lakum wa aʿlamu mina'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūnWa anā lakum nāṣiḥun amīn

The second half of the sentence (wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn) is word for word identical in the two stories; what changes is only the word that is rejected.

And the difference between the two objections is worth recording: ḍalāl is a fault of direction (on the wrong road), safāha a fault of capacity (light of mind). The root س-ف-ه: lightness, want of measure. The lexicographers tie the root to a garment or a rope being light and slack.

I record this as an observation: the second objection is heavier than the first — it aims not at the road but at the mind. And the third thing added to it is a statement of supposition: la-naẓunnuka — "we think". That is, the claim is offered not as proof but as opinion.

وَٱذْكُرُوٓا۟ إِذْ جَعَلَكُمْ خُلَفَآءَ — twice in the sūra

The same pattern occurs in the sixty-ninth and seventy-fourth verses, and both are a reminder:

VerseWhoSuccessors after whomWhat was given
69Hūd → ʿĀdMin baʿdi qawmi NūḥWa zādakum fi'l-khalqi basṭatan — an increase in build
74Ṣāliḥ → ThamūdMin baʿdi ʿĀdTattakhidhūna min suhūlihā quṣūran wa tanḥitūna'l-jibāla buyūtā — palaces on the plain, houses hewn in the mountains

The two reminders build a chain: the people of Noah → ʿĀd → Thamūd. That is, the sūra lines up the stories not side by side but one after another, each link taking the place of the one before it. This is a weave that can be verified from the text.

And both are joined by the same sentence: fa'dhkurū ālāʾa'llāh — "so remember the bounties of God".

بَسْطَةً فِى ٱلْخَلْقِ — the root ب-س-ط: to spread, to extend. What it is an extension of is not named in the text. In the classical commentaries it is explained as stature and strength; I convey this explanation as it is transmitted and go into no further detail, because the verse does not (Method).

أَتُجَٰدِلُونَنِى فِىٓ أَسْمَآءٍ سَمَّيْتُمُوهَآ

The seventy-first verse is one of the densest sentences to be recorded in this block:

A-tujādilūnanī fī asmāʾin sammaytumūhā antum wa ābāʾukum mā nazzala'llāhu bihā min sulṭān "Do you dispute with me about names that you and your forefathers have given? God has sent down no warrant for them."

The work of the sentence must be recorded, and this is an observation about word order: the subject of the dispute is named not as an entity but as a name.

The sentence could have been built thusWhat is built
"Do you dispute about the things you worship?"Asmāʾin sammaytumūhā — "about names that you have given"

And a second note is entered: mā nazzala'llāhu bihā min sulṭān — there is no warrant sent down.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is two words (asmāʾ and sulṭān): the verse brings what the other side holds down to the level of naming, and sets against it the measure of a warrant sent down. That is, the dispute is taken off the axis of "your god or mine" and moved onto the axis of "what do you have in hand".

And the same sentence will return in the last block of the sūra: at 7/194-195 what the things called upon can do will be counted one by one. That link will close there.

And there is a limit to be recorded: no general ruling about naming as such is to be drawn from this. The subject of the verse is namings for which there is no support whatever, and the sentence enters that qualification itself.

كَذَٰلِكَوَقَطَعْنَا دَابِرَ

دَابِر — the root د-ب-ر: the back, the end of a thing, what comes behind it. Dābir is the hindmost of a company, that is, the continuation of a line. Qaṭaʿnā dābirahum — "We cut off what was behind them", that is, We left them no continuation.

The expression occurs in al-Aʿrāf only in this verse (72), and it is the closing of only one of the five stories. This is a countable datum.

And the two halves of the closing must be recorded: fa-anjaynāhu … bi-raḥmatin minnā and wa qaṭaʿnā dābira'lladhīna kadhdhabū. The deliverance is given with a note of mercy, the destruction with a note of continuity: one remains, the other's line is cut off.


7/73-79

7/73-79 — Ṣāliḥ

Wa ilā Thamūda akhāhum Ṣāliḥā, qāla yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh, qad jāʾatkum bayyinatun min rabbikum, hādhihī nāqatu'llāhi lakum āyatan fa-dharūhā taʾkul fī arḍi'llāh wa lā tamassūhā bi-sūʾin fa-yaʾkhudhakum ʿadhābun alīm

"And to Thamūd [We sent] their brother Ṣāliḥ. He said: 'O my people! Serve God; you have no god but Him. A clear proof has come to you from your Lord: this is the she-camel of God — a sign for you. Let her be, to eat in God's earth; do not touch her with harm, or a painful punishment will seize you.'"

نَاقَة — and what is not told

The root ن-و-ق: a she-camel. The Qurʾān speaks of this camel in several places (al-Aʿrāf 7/73; Hūd 11/64; al-Isrāʾ 17/59; al-Qamar 54/27; al-Shams 91/13) and it was treated in al-Qamar and al-Shams. I rely on those treatments.

And here there is a limit I must write out plainly, per the method: the Qurʾān says nothing about where the camel came from, how she appeared, her size, her colour, or her milk. There are detailed accounts transmitted in the classical sources; this commentary does not enter into thembecause the verse does not, and their soundness cannot be established (Method).

What the text says is this, and that much I record:

What is saidVerse
The camel is a signHādhihī nāqatu'llāhi lakum āyatan
She is to be left aloneFa-dharūhā taʾkul fī arḍi'llāh
She is not to be touchedWa lā tamassūhā bi-sūʾin
The consequenceFa-yaʾkhudhakum ʿadhābun alīm

And a point of word order must be recorded: the sign given is not a thing to be done but a thing not to be done. Both commands are a withdrawal: let her be, and do not touch.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the two verbs themselves: the test is built not with a demand for an act but with a demand for a withholding of the hand. And what was given to Adam in the second block of the sūra was of the same kind: wa lā taqrabā hādhihi'sh-shajarata (19) — a prohibition. In both scenes the subject of the test is that what is given not be taken. This is an overlap that can be verified within the sūra.

ٱلْمَلَأُ ٱلَّذِينَ ٱسْتَكْبَرُوا۟ and ٱلَّذِينَ ٱسْتُضْعِفُوا۟

The seventy-fifth verse is the clearest instance of the "line of class" recorded in the section on the structure of the sūra:

Qāla'l-malaʾu'lladhīna'stakbarū min qawmihī lilladhīna'stuḍʿifū li-man āmana minhum: a-taʿlamūna anna Ṣāliḥan mursalun min rabbih

Two patterns are set facing one another, and both are Form X:

PatternRootMeaning
Istakbarūك-ب-رTo reckon oneself great — with a subject, what they themselves did
Ustuḍʿifūض-ع-فTo be made weakpassive, what another did

The difference of voice must be recorded, and it is a datum of word order: the first is active, the second passive. That is, the verse gives weakness not as an attribute but as something that was done.

The same root was treated at 26/22 in al-Shuʿarāʾ, where it was recorded: istiḍʿāf — weakness is not something that comes of itself, it is something done. I rely on that treatment.

And there is an appositive note within the verse, and it must be recorded: lilladhīna'stuḍʿifū li-man āmana minhum — "to those made weak, to those of them who believed". The second expression narrows the first.

I record this as an observation about word order: the verse does not equate "those made weak" with "those who believed"; it separates the second out from within the first. That is, here too the sūra builds no blanket judgement about a class (Method).

فَعَقَرُوا۟ ٱلنَّاقَةَ وَعَتَوْا۟ عَنْ أَمْرِ رَبِّهِمْ

The root ع-ق-ر: to bring an animal down by cutting its leg; and from this, to kill. The lexicographers give the primary sense as the cutting of the leg tendon.

The root ع-ت-و: to exceed the bound, to hold out in pride, to dry and harden. ʿAtā ʿan amri rabbih — "he went out from the command of his Lord".

And the order of the verbs is worth recording: first the act, then the naming of the act. The verse does not say "they went out from the command and hamstrung the camel"; it says the reverse. I record this as an observation about word order.

And the sentence that follows is in the same pattern as the one in the story of Hūd:

VerseWhoSentence
70ʿĀdFa'tinā bimā taʿidunā in kunta mina'ṣ-ṣādiqīn
77ThamūdYā Ṣāliḥu'tinā bimā taʿidunā in kunta mina'l-mursalīn

The only difference is in the last word: one ṣādiqīn (those who speak truly), the other mursalīn (those who are sent). This is a difference that can be verified from the text.

And as was recorded at 26/31 in al-Shuʿarāʾ, the conditional particle is in, not idhāin Arabic in is used for the doubtful, idhā for the certain. I rely on that treatment.

ٱلرَّجْفَة and جَٰثِمِين

The root ر-ج-ف: violent shaking, trembling. Rajfa — a quaking.

The root ج-ث-م: an animal's sinking down on its breast and knees, sticking fast to the ground. The lexicographers use the word especially for a bird's crouching to the ground.

And the choice of the word is worth recording: jāthimīn states a posture, not an annihilation. The scene is of bodies left collapsed where they were.

And precisely this sentence occurs twice in the sūra (78 and 91) — it was counted in the section on the structure of the sūra. It must also be recorded that for the same event the Qurʾān uses other words in other sūras (ṣāʿiqa at Fuṣṣilat 41/13; ṣayḥa at al-Qamar 54/31). They were treated in Fuṣṣilat and al-Qamar; I rely on those treatments. This variation is explained as the naming of different aspects of the same event; I convey it as transmitted and impose no preference.


7/80-84

7/80-84 — Lot

Wa Lūṭan idh qāla li-qawmihī a-taʾtūna'l-fāḥishata mā sabaqakum bihā min aḥadin mina'l-ʿālamīn · Innakum la-taʾtūna'r-rijāla shahwatan min dūni'n-nisāʾ, bal antum qawmun musrifūn · Wa mā kāna jawāba qawmihī illā an qālū akhrijūhum min qaryatikum innahum unāsun yataṭahharūn · Fa-anjaynāhu wa ahlahū illa'mraʾatahū kānat mina'l-ghābirīn · Wa amṭarnā ʿalayhim maṭarā, fa'nẓur kayfa kāna ʿāqibatu'l-mujrimīn

"And Lot too [We sent]. He said to his people: 'Do you commit that indecency which no one in all the worlds committed before you? · You approach men with desire instead of women. You are indeed a people who exceed all bounds.' · And the only answer of his people was to say: 'Drive them out of your town; they are people who would keep themselves pure.' · We delivered him and his household — except his wife; she was of those who stayed behind. · And We rained down upon them a rain. See, then, what was the end of the guilty!"

Where the pattern breaks

This story is the link in the sūra's sequence of prophets where the pattern breaks most, and it carries three absences at once. All three are countable:

Shared elementIn the other four storiesIn the story of Lot
Yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruhpresent (59, 65, 73, 85)absent
Akhāhum — "their brother"present at 65, 73, 85absent
Al-malaʾ — the notablespresent at 60, 66, 75, 88, 90absent — the addressee is directly qawmuh

And there is a fourth difference: the verb of entry. In the others there was arsalnā or the pattern wa ilā … akhāhum; here it is wa Lūṭan idh qāla li-qawmihī — the speech is entered directly.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the four absences above: in al-Aʿrāf's story of Lot the call opens not as a call to tawḥīd but directly as a question about conduct. The text does not say the reason for this. And in the classical commentaries the explanation is transmitted that Lot's people were not of his own lineage — and that therefore akhūhum is not said; I convey this explanation as transmitted and claim no certainty for it.

فَٰحِشَة and مُسْرِفُون — where the words attach

The root ف-ح-ش was treated at the thirty-third verse (innamā ḥarrama rabbiya'l-fawāḥisha mā ẓahara minhā wa mā baṭan); the sense of the root: an indecency that exceeds the measure. I rely on that treatment.

The root س-ر-ف was treated at the thirty-first verse (wa lā tusrifū innahū lā yuḥibbu'l-musrifīn); the sense of the root: to exceed the bound in something, to put it out of its place. I rely on that treatment.

And the return of the two roots in this story is worth recording, and it is a weave that can be verified within the sūra:

RootWhere earlier in the sūraHere
ف-ح-ش28 (idhā faʿalū fāḥishatan), 33 (ḥarrama … al-fawāḥish)80a-taʾtūna'l-fāḥishata
س-ر-ف31 (wa lā tusrifū)81qawmun musrifūn

That is, the sūra places in the sixth block, inside a story, the two measures it laid down in the third block. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the words themselves.

And I draw no legal ruling from this; I content myself with conveying the naming the verse sets down (Method). And this note is necessary: the verse names a behaviour; it builds no blanket judgement about a community. This is the sūra's own principle, and it was recorded in the section on the structure: what is described is an attribute, and whoever carries that attribute is included in it.

إِنَّهُمْ أُنَاسٌ يَتَطَهَّرُونَ — the form of the answer

The answer of the other side is worth recording, and it is one of the most striking sentences in the block.

The root ط-ه-ر: cleanness, purification. Form V (taṭahhara) states "to keep oneself clean".

That is, what is counted as the ground for banishment is, in the other side's own mouth, a word of praise.

The expected groundThe ground given
An accusationInnahum unāsun yataṭahharūn — "people who would keep themselves pure"

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the sentence itself: the decision to drive them out is grounded not on a fault of the one driven out but on his attribute. And it is recorded in the classical commentaries that there is a tone of mockery in the language of the sentence; I convey this explanation as transmitted.

And the sentence akhrijūhum min qaryatikum is not alone in the sūra: the same will be said to Shuʿayb in verse 88la-nukhrijannaka yā Shuʿaybu … min qaryatinā.

VerseWho is to be driven outWho says it
82Lot and those with himHis people
88Shuʿayb and those who believedAl-malaʾ

The same threat in two stories. And the same root had occurred elsewhere in the second block of the sūra: fa-akhrajahumā mimmā kānā fīh (the counterpart in al-Aʿrāf of al-Baqara 2/36 being 7/27: kamā akhraja abawaykum mina'l-janna). In this sūra being driven out is a repeated verb. I record this as an observation.

ٱلْغَٰبِرِين and وَأَمْطَرْنَا

The root غ-ب-ر: to remain behind, to be left over. Ghābir — the one who remains behind, who is left after those who go. The word is repeated several times in the Qurʾān for this event (al-Aʿrāf 7/83; al-Ḥijr 15/60; al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/171) and was treated in al-Shuʿarāʾ. I rely on that treatment.

And a point of word order must be recorded: kānat mina'l-ghābirīn — a feminine subject is ascribed to a masculine plural group. This is a common construction in Arabic for stating inclusion in a company, and it has occurred elsewhere in the index too.

The root م-ط-ر: rain. And the pattern of the verb must be recorded: Form IV, amṭara. The lexicographers transmit a distinction: maṭara (Form I) is used for mercy, amṭara (Form IV) for punishment.

This distinction is not certain and does not hold everywhere; but it is transmitted, and it accords with this verse. I convey it as transmitted and do not present it as a settled rule of the language.

And it must be recorded that the word maṭarā (rain) is left without a specification: what was rained down is not said here. In other places in the Qurʾān stones are named for this event (al-Ḥijr 15/74; Hūd 11/82); al-Aʿrāf does not say it. Where it does not say, neither do I.


7/85-93

7/85-93 — Shuʿayb

Wa ilā Madyana akhāhum Shuʿaybā, qāla yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh, qad jāʾatkum bayyinatun min rabbikum, fa-awfu'l-kayla wa'l-mīzāna wa lā tabkhasu'n-nāsa ashyāʾahum wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā, dhālikum khayrun lakum in kuntum muʾminīn

"And to Madyan [We sent] their brother Shuʿayb. He said: 'O my people! Serve God; you have no god but Him. A clear proof has come to you from your Lord. Give full measure and full weight; do not give people less than their due; do not work corruption on the earth after it has been set in order. That is better for you, if you are believers.'"

What is placed after the call

In the four stories what came after the shared opening sentence was different (it was given in the table of the pattern above). With Shuʿayb that place is filled with three prohibitions, and all three concern measure:

#Command/prohibitionField
1Fa-awfu'l-kayla wa'l-mīzānMeasure and weight — an affirmative command
2Wa lā tabkhasū'n-nāsa ashyāʾahumGiving short — a prohibition
3Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihāThe earth — a prohibition

The third is word for word identical with the fifty-sixth verse, and this repetition was tabulated in the section on the structure of the sūra: the sūra puts its own command into the mouth of a prophet. In Hūd Table 4 it was shown that Sūrat Hūd does the same thing four times (istaghfirū rabbakum thumma tūbū ilayh11/3 and the mouths of three prophets). I rely on that treatment: al-Aʿrāf applies the same technique once.

The root ب-خ-س: to give a thing less than its due, to lower its value. The verb occurs in Shuʿayb's mouth in other places in the Qurʾān too (al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/183; Hūd 11/85) and the subject of measure was treated in detail in al-Muṭaffifīn. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

وَلَا تَقْعُدُوا۟ بِكُلِّ صِرَٰطٍ تُوعِدُونَ

The eighty-sixth verse is the picture that belongs to this block:

Wa lā taqʿudū bi-kulli ṣirāṭin tūʿidūna wa taṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāhi man āmana bihī wa tabghūnahā ʿiwajā "Do not sit on every road, threatening; do not bar from the way of God those who believe in Him, and do not seek to make that way crooked."

And this sentence has a precedent within the sūra. This is a verifiable overlap and must be recorded:

VerseWhoSentence
16IblīsLa-aqʿudanna lahum ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm
86MadyanWa lā taqʿudū bi-kulli ṣirāṭin tūʿidūna

The same verb (ق-ع-د — to sit) and the same word (ṣirāṭ). The first a statement of intent, the second a prohibition.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the verb and object of the two verses: the sūra forbids to a human community, in the eighty-sixth verse, the work described in the sixteenth. That is, sitting at the head of the road is first told in the sūra as a stance, then forbidden as something a human being can do. This is an explanation, not a ruling.

And the sentence wa tabghūnahā ʿiwajā occurs twice in the sūra (45 and 86) — it was counted in the section on the structure. The first was the description of the wrongdoers in the scene of the hereafter; the second is a prohibition here.

The root ع-و-ج: crookedness. And the lexicographers record a distinction between ʿiwaj (with kasra) and ʿawaj (with fatḥa): ʿawaj is used for crookedness seen by the eye (a stick, a wall), ʿiwaj for crookedness that is not seen (a word, a religion, a road). This distinction is transmitted and accords with the verse; I convey it as transmitted.

Two malaʾs, two different threats

In the story of Shuʿayb malaʾ occurs twice, and this is the highest number for any one prophet in the sūra. It was counted in the section on the structure; here it is treated:

VerseHow it is qualifiedTo whom it speaksWhat it says
88Al-malaʾu'lladhīna'stakbarūTo Shuʿayb and those who believedLa-nukhrijannaka … aw la-taʿūdunna fī millatinā — banishment or return
90Al-malaʾu'lladhīna kafarūTo their own peopleLa-ini'ttabaʿtum Shuʿayban innakum idhan la-khāsirūn — a warning of loss to whoever follows

The direction of the two addresses differs: one outward, the other inward. I record this as an observation about word order: the other side speaks first with the messenger, then with those who might listen to the messenger.

And in the ninety-second verse this second sentence is answered with the same word:

VerseSentence
90La-ini'ttabaʿtum Shuʿayban innakum idhan la-khāsirūn
92Alladhīna kadhdhabū Shuʿayban kānū humu'l-khāsirīn

The same word, with the subject reversed. Of those who said "if you follow him you will be losers" it is said "they were the losers themselves". This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

The question of ٱلْعَوْد — a point of language

The lexicographers dwell on aw la-taʿūdunna fī millatinā ("or you shall return to our creed") in the eighty-eighth verse and on the expression in ʿudnā fī millatikum in the eighty-ninth.

The question is this: does the verb ʿawda (to return) require having previously been in that state? Two explanations are transmitted in the classical commentaries, and I give them in a table:

ReadingWhat ʿawd is hereGround
1The verb has the sense "to enter, to pass into"; it does not require having previously been in that stateThe use of the verb ʿāda in Arabic in the sense of ṣāra (he became, he came to be)
2The word is spoken with regard to the majority of those who believed; the condition of the many is ascribed to the companyThat the addressees of the sentence are Shuʿayb and those with him — for the second group returning is meant in its literal sense

Both explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. This is a question of language and is not used to build a ruling about prophets (Method).

كَأَن لَّمْ يَغْنَوْا۟ فِيهَا

The root غ-ن-ي: to settle and remain in a place, to live there without want. Maghnā — a dwelling place. The pattern means "as though they had never dwelt there".

In Hūd Table 3 this pattern was counted as one of the five closing patterns of Sūrat Hūd (11/68, 11/95). I rely on that treatment.

And in al-Aʿrāf the pattern occurs only once, in the story of Shuʿayb. This is a countable datum.

And a point of word order must be recorded: in the ninety-second verse the expression alladhīna kadhdhabū Shuʿayban occurs twiceat the beginning of the sentence and in the middle. A pronoun could have been used; it was not.

I record this as an observation about word order: the repetition fixes twice over who the subject is. And in the second sentence the pronoun hum (they) is added as well: kānū humu'l-khāsirīnthe pronoun of separation (ḍamīr al-faṣl), which states restriction: "they were the losers themselves".


7/94-95

وَمَآ أَرْسَلْنَا فِى قَرْيَةٍ مِّن نَّبِىٍّ إِلَّآ أَخَذْنَآ أَهْلَهَا بِٱلْبَأْسَآءِ وَٱلضَّرَّآءِ لَعَلَّهُمْ يَضَّرَّعُونَ · ثُمَّ بَدَّلْنَا مَكَانَ ٱلسَّيِّئَةِ ٱلْحَسَنَةَ حَتَّىٰ عَفَوا۟ وَّقَالُوا۟ قَدْ مَسَّ ءَابَآءَنَا ٱلضَّرَّآءُ وَٱلسَّرَّآءُ فَأَخَذْنَٰهُم بَغْتَةً وَهُمْ لَا يَشْعُرُونَ

Wa mā arsalnā fī qaryatin min nabiyyin illā akhadhnā ahlahā bi'l-baʾsāʾi wa'ḍ-ḍarrāʾi laʿallahum yaḍḍarraʿūn · Thumma baddalnā makāna's-sayyiʾati'l-ḥasanata ḥattā ʿafaw wa qālū qad massa ābāʾana'ḍ-ḍarrāʾu wa's-sarrāʾu fa-akhadhnāhum baghtatan wa hum lā yashʿurūn

"Into whatever land We sent a prophet, We seized its people with hardship and affliction — that they might humble themselves. · Then We put good in the place of ill, until they grew many and said, 'Hardship and ease touched our forefathers too.' So We seized them suddenly, while they were unaware."

The rule that follows the stories

When the five stories are finished the sūra lays down a rule, and the form of the rule must be recorded: negation + exception (mā … illā).

This pattern is the strongest generalisation in Arabic: "We sent to no place without … coming about."

A two-stage test

The verse counts two stages, and the two run in opposite directions:

StageWhat is doneWhat is expectedWhat happens
1 (94)Baʾsāʾ and ḍarrāʾhardshipLaʿallahum yaḍḍarraʿūn — pleading(the text does not state the outcome)
2 (95)Baddalnā makāna's-sayyiʾati'l-ḥasanataeaseḤattā ʿafaw and a sentence: qad massa ābāʾana'ḍ-ḍarrāʾu wa's-sarrāʾu

And the outcome of the second stage is a sentence, not a behaviour. I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the verse itself: what nullifies the test turns out to be an explanation — "such things happen anyway, they happened to our forefathers too."

That is, the event is taken out of being a sign and turned into a natural occurrence. And this lies on the same line as the twenty-eighth verse of the sūra: there too the ground of the behaviour was tied to the forefathers (wajadnā ʿalayhā ābāʾanā).

عَفَوا۟ — the root ع-ف-و. One of the primary senses of the root is to become many, to increase (when hair grows long and thick it is said ʿafā'sh-shaʿr). The lexicographers dwell on the meaning of the word in this verse, and two explanations are transmitted:

ReadingWhat ʿafaw means
1They grew many — they increased in number and in goods
2They became well off, at ease — their livelihood widened

Both explanations rest on the same root and are close to one another; I do not impose a preference.

And this word will return in the last block of the sūra with another sense: khudhi'l-ʿafw (199). The same root, two different branches of meaning. This link will be treated at verse 199.

بَغْتَةً وَهُمْ لَا يَشْعُرُونَ

The root ب-غ-ت: to be seized suddenly, unprepared.

The root ش-ع-ر: to notice a fine thing, to sense it. The root is akin to shaʿr (hair); the lexicographers tie shuʿūr to the picture of "becoming aware of something as fine as a hair".

And the coming together of the two words is worth recording: baghtatan states the speed of the event, lā yashʿurūn the condition of the addressee. Together they overlap with the picture in the fourth verse of the sūra: fa-jāʾahā baʾsunā bayātan aw hum qāʾilūn — in the sleep of night or in the sleep of noon. The sūra says the same thing twice, with two different words.


7/96-99

وَلَوْ أَنَّ أَهْلَ ٱلْقُرَىٰٓ ءَامَنُوا۟ وَٱتَّقَوْا۟ لَفَتَحْنَا عَلَيْهِم بَرَكَٰتٍ مِّنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ وَلَٰكِن كَذَّبُوا۟ فَأَخَذْنَٰهُم بِمَا كَانُوا۟ يَكْسِبُونَ

Wa law anna ahla'l-qurā āmanū wa'ttaqaw la-fataḥnā ʿalayhim barakātin mina's-samāʾi wa'l-arḍi wa lākin kadhdhabū fa-akhadhnāhum bimā kānū yaksibūn · A-fa-amina ahlu'l-qurā an yaʾtiyahum baʾsunā bayātan wa hum nāʾimūn · Aw amina ahlu'l-qurā an yaʾtiyahum baʾsunā ḍuḥan wa hum yalʿabūn · A-fa-aminū makra'llāh, fa-lā yaʾmanu makra'llāhi illa'l-qawmu'l-khāsirūn

"Had the people of those towns believed and guarded themselves, We would have opened upon them blessings from heaven and earth. But they called it a lie; so We seized them for what they had earned. · Did the people of those towns feel secure that Our violence would not come upon them by night, while they slept? · Or did the people of those towns feel secure that Our violence would not come upon them in the forenoon, while they played? · Did they feel secure from the devising of God? None feels secure from the devising of God but a people who are lost."

The construction of the sentence: an unfulfilled condition

The ninety-sixth verse is the most striking sentence in the sūra's section of rules, and its construction must be recorded.

Law — in Arabic the particle of the unfulfilled condition. In English it answers to "had they … We would have": it states that the condition did not obtain, and therefore neither did the consequence.

That is, the verse is not a promise but the record of a possibility that did not come about. I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the particle.

And the second half of the sentence confirms it: wa lākin kadhdhabū — "but they called it a lie". The adversative particle (lākin) says outright that the condition did not obtain.

Two conditions, two verbs

The condition is built with two verbs, and the order of the two is worth recording:

OrderVerbWhat
1ĀmanūFaith — belonging to the inward
2IttaqawGod-fearing — belonging to conduct

The two are asked for together; neither is set as a condition on its own.

فَتَحْنَا عَلَيْهِم — the distribution of the pattern in the Qurʾān

This pattern was treated at 23/77 in al-Muʾminūn, where a table of three links was drawn up. I rely on that treatment and carry the table over here:

PlaceWhat is openedWhat
al-Anʿām 6/44Abwāba kulli shayʾthe gates of everythingBounty
al-Aʿrāf 7/96Barakātin mina's-samāʾi wa'l-arḍBlessing
al-Muʾminūn 23/77Bāban dhā ʿadhābin shadīdPunishment

The conclusion recorded there was: the same pattern, the reverse content. And it was further recorded in al-Muʾminūn that at al-Anʿām 6/44, after the gates of bounty are opened, akhadhnāhum baghtatan follows.

The difference that belongs here is this, and it must be recorded: in al-Aʿrāf the gate is not opened. In al-Anʿām and al-Muʾminūn the act has taken place (fataḥnā), in al-Aʿrāf it is the apodosis of an unfulfilled condition (la-fataḥnā).

That is, the three verses hold three states of the same pattern: opened-bounty, opened-punishment, would-have-opened-did-not. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the verb forms of the three verses.

بَرَكَٰت — the root of the word and its plural

The root ب-ر-ك: a thing's staying fixed, settling; and from this, increasing, lasting good. The lexicographers tie the root to the picture of a camel kneeling and settling (baraka'l-baʿīr); and a pool of water (birka) is from the same root. That is, blessing is what stays, not what flows away.

And the word occurs twice in this sūra:

VerseFormWhat
54Tabāraka'llāhu rabbu'l-ʿālamīnA verb — the fixedness of loftiness
96Barakātin mina's-samāʾi wa'l-arḍA noun, plural — what would have been opened

The same root, in the verse that opens the fifth block of the sūra and in the rule that closes the sixth. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

And the plural pattern must be recorded: barakāt — an indefinite plural. Not the singular (baraka). The lexicographers record that the indefinite plural here states multiplicity and variety.

مِّنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ — the extent of the pair

And the source of the blessing is given in two directions: heaven and earth.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the fifty-seventh verse: there too the water came down from the sky (fa-anzalnā bihi'l-māʾa) and the produce came out of the earth (fa-akhrajnā bihī min kulli'th-thamarāt). The pair in the ninety-sixth verse is the name of the two movements in the fifty-seventh. This is a reading, not a ruling.

And per the method (Method) I draw a limit: no mechanical law between faith and economic prosperity is to be derived from this. The sūra's own verses do not allow it: the ninety-fourth verse says that in every place a messenger was sent the people were seized with hardship; the ninety-fifth says that abundance too is a test. And the fifty-first verse records that the life of this world can delude.

That is, the sūra does not set up prosperity as a mark of reward. I record this as a datum of the text, and its ground is the sūra's own verses.

Three "did they feel secure" — and a note of tanzīh

The ninety-seventh, ninety-eighth and ninety-ninth verses begin with the same verb: amina (he felt secure). Three questions, three different objects:

VerseWhat they felt secure fromTime/state
97Baʾsunā — the violenceBayātan wa hum nāʾimūnby night, asleep
98Baʾsunā — the violenceḌuḥan wa hum yalʿabūnin the forenoon, at play
99Makra'llāh(no time given)

The first two verses overlap with the fourth verse of the sūra (bayātan aw hum qāʾilūn) and both choose the slackest moments of daily life: sleep and play.

I record this as an observation: the sūra places the danger not in the hour of work but in the hour of rest.

And the verb yalʿabūn connects with the fifty-first verse: there it was said that they took their religion as lahwan wa laʿibā. The same root, one an attribute and one a state.

For the word مَكْر I enter a note of tanzīh, per the method (Method):

The root م-ك-ر: to take a hidden measure, to act by a route the other side has not reckoned with. The word is not of itself pejorative in Arabic; the evil comes from against whom and for what it is done.

And when the word is ascribed to God in the Qurʾān, the shared note of the lexicographers and the exegetes is this: it is the requiting of the devising men have set up, by a route they have not reckoned with. It does not mean deception, trickery or injustice.

And the Qurʾān itself sets this out expressly in another place: wa yamkurūna wa yamkuru'llāh wa'llāhu khayru'l-mākirīn (al-Anfāl 8/30). That is, the word occurs in a context of requital.

I enter this note and close the discussion; I enter into no polemic of kalām (Method).

And the closing of the ninety-ninth verse must be recorded: fa-lā yaʾmanu makra'llāhi illa'l-qawmu'l-khāsirūn. The same word had occurred in the ninetieth and ninety-second verses in the story of Shuʿayb. The sūra carries the word of the story over into the rule.


7/100-102

أَوَلَمْ يَهْدِ لِلَّذِينَ يَرِثُونَ ٱلْأَرْضَ مِنۢ بَعْدِ أَهْلِهَآ أَن لَّوْ نَشَآءُ أَصَبْنَٰهُم بِذُنُوبِهِمْ وَنَطْبَعُ عَلَىٰ قُلُوبِهِمْ فَهُمْ لَا يَسْمَعُونَ

A-wa lam yahdi lilladhīna yarithūna'l-arḍa min baʿdi ahlihā an law nashāʾu aṣabnāhum bi-dhunūbihim wa naṭbaʿu ʿalā qulūbihim fa-hum lā yasmaʿūn · Tilka'l-qurā naquṣṣu ʿalayka min anbāʾihā, wa laqad jāʾathum rusuluhum bi'l-bayyināti fa-mā kānū li-yuʾminū bimā kadhdhabū min qabl, kadhālika yaṭbaʿu'llāhu ʿalā qulūbi'l-kāfirīn · Wa mā wajadnā li-aktharihim min ʿahd, wa in wajadnā aktharahum la-fāsiqīn

"Has it not been made plain to those who inherit a land after its former people that, if We willed, We could strike them for their sins and set a seal upon their hearts so that they would not hear? · Those are the towns — We recount to you something of their tidings. Their messengers did come to them with clear proofs; but they were not going to believe in what they had called a lie before. Thus does God set a seal upon the hearts of the deniers. · In most of them We found no keeping of a covenant; most of them We found to be transgressors."

يَرِثُونَ ٱلْأَرْضَ مِنۢ بَعْدِ أَهْلِهَا — the addressee of the block

The closing of the block turns from the stories to the present, and the word of the turn is heir.

The root و-ر-ث: to come into possession of what another has left behind him.

And this is the last link of the chain built up in the sūra. The chain is countable:

VerseWho after whomExpression
69ʿĀd, after the people of NoahJaʿalakum khulafāʾa min baʿdi qawmi Nūḥ
74Thamūd, after ʿĀdJaʿalakum khulafāʾa min baʿdi ʿĀd
100The addressee, after all of themYarithūna'l-arḍa min baʿdi ahlihā

That is, the sūra ties to the reader, in a third link, the chain of succession it built in two stories. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.

And the tense of the verb must be recorded: yarithūna — the imperfect, the present. The stories are built in the past tense, this sentence in the present.

ٱلطَّبْع — the seal

The root ط-ب-ع: to press a stamp upon a thing, to seal it. The lexicographers tie the root to the picture of the stamping of coin and of wax. Ṭabīʿa (nature) is from the same root: what has been stamped on, a settled condition.

And the occurrences of the root in the sūra are countable: 100, 101 — and at 7/40 (in the context of wa kadhālika najzi'l-mujrimīn) other verbs of the same field will be used.

And per the method (Method) a note is required, and I write it plainly: the question of the seal is a field of kalām debate (the relation between the servant's act and divine decree). This commentary takes no side in that debate.

I record the one thing that can be verified from the text, and that is the order of the sentence:

OrderVerseWhat
1101Fa-mā kānū li-yuʾminū bimā kadhdhabū min qablfirst the calling of a lie
2101Kadhālika yaṭbaʿu'llāh ʿalā qulūbi'l-kāfirīnthen the seal

The verse places the seal after a prior calling of a lie. I record this as an observation about word order; I build no ruling beyond it.

عَهْد — the last word of the block

The root ع-ه-د: to guard a thing, to watch over it, to keep one's word. ʿAhd is the word that is given, and within the root lies the idea of "watching over" — a word is given in order to be kept.

And the placing of the word here is worth recording, because the eighth block of the sūra (172-174) will be built precisely on this word: there a testimony will be taken from man.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the words of the two blocks: the hundred and second verse says "in most of them We found no keeping of a covenant"; the hundred and seventy-second tells when that word was taken. There are seventy verses between the two, and the sūra sets down the claim first and gives its ground afterwards. This is an explanation, not a ruling.

The root ف-س-ق: a thing's coming out of its husk or out of its place. The lexicographers tie the root to the picture of a date coming out of its skin (fasaqa'r-ruṭabu). That is, a fāsiq is one who has come out of the place where he should be.

And this word closes the block: wa in wajadnā aktharahum la-fāsiqīn. In the section on the structure of the sūra this was recorded as the closing sentence of the sixth block.


7/103-108

ثُمَّ بَعَثْنَا مِنۢ بَعْدِهِم مُّوسَىٰ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَآ إِلَىٰ فِرْعَوْنَ وَمَلَإِي۟هِۦ فَظَلَمُوا۟ بِهَا فَٱنظُرْ كَيْفَ كَانَ عَٰقِبَةُ ٱلْمُفْسِدِينَ

Thumma baʿathnā min baʿdihim Mūsā bi-āyātinā ilā Firʿawna wa malaʾihī fa-ẓalamū bihā, fa'nẓur kayfa kāna ʿāqibatu'l-mufsidīn · Wa qāla Mūsā yā Firʿawnu innī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · Ḥaqīqun ʿalā an lā aqūla ʿala'llāhi illa'l-ḥaqq, qad jiʾtukum bi-bayyinatin min rabbikum fa-arsil maʿiya banī Isrāʾīl · Qāla in kunta jiʾta bi-āyatin fa'ti bihā in kunta mina'ṣ-ṣādiqīn · Fa-alqā ʿaṣāhu fa-idhā hiya thuʿbānun mubīn · Wa nazaʿa yadahū fa-idhā hiya bayḍāʾu li'n-nāẓirīn

"Then, after them, We sent Moses with Our signs to Pharaoh and his notables. But they did wrong in the matter of those signs. See, then, what was the end of the corrupters! · Moses said: 'O Pharaoh! I am a messenger from the Lord of all the worlds. · It is incumbent on me to say nothing about God but the truth. I have brought you a clear proof from your Lord; so send the Children of Israel with me.' · He said: 'If you have brought a sign, produce it, if you are among the truthful.' · So he cast down his staff, and there it was, a plain serpent! · And he drew out his hand, and there it was, white to those who looked!"

The weight of the block in the sūra

The Moses block runs from verse 103 to verse 171: sixty-nine verses. More than a third of the sūra. It was recorded in the section on the structure; here it is treated.

And the point at which the block departs from the earlier ones in respect of pattern must be recorded, and it is a countable datum:

ElementIn the five storiesIn the Moses block
Yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh4 timesabsent
Akhāhum3 timesabsent
Al-malaʾ5 timespresent (103, 109, 127)
The name of the addresseeThe name of a people (ʿĀd, Thamūd, Madyan)A single person (Firʿawn)

That is, the Moses block stands outside the shared opening. The same was recorded for al-Shuʿarāʾ in al-Shuʿarāʾ Table 2: there too the stories of Moses and Abraham stood outside the pattern of the opening. The two sūras make the same exception independently. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts, and I record it as an observation.

فَظَلَمُوا۟ بِهَا — the work of the preposition

A point of word order must be recorded: the verb ẓalama is here made transitive with the preposition bi-.

The expected construction would be fa-ẓalamūhā ("they wronged them"). The lexicographers explain the usage with bi- as either "they did wrong on account of them" or "they behaved wrongfully towards them"; both explanations are transmitted.

And the same construction had occurred in the ninth verse of the sūra: bimā kānū bi-āyātinā yaẓlimūn. The same verb, the same preposition, the same object. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

حَقِيقٌ عَلَىٰٓ أَن لَّآ أَقُولَ — a variant reading

Two readings are transmitted of the expression at the head of the hundred and fifth verse, and I record it because the difference affects the meaning:

ReadingTextMeaning
1Ḥaqīqun ʿalā an lā aqūla"It is incumbent to say nothing about God but the truth" — this is what falls to me
2Ḥaqīqun ʿalayya an lā aqūla"It falls to me to say nothing about God but the truth" — the ascription is expressly to the first person

Both readings are transmitted and are close to one another in sense; I do not impose a preference.

And the work of the sentence must be recorded: the messenger sets out the truth of his word not with a proof but first with an obligation. The proof comes one sentence later: qad jiʾtukum bi-bayyinatin min rabbikum.

ثُعْبَان and بَيْضَآء — two signs

ثُعْبَان — the root ث-ع-ب: according to the lexicographers, a great serpent. At 20/20 in Ṭāhā and 26/32 in al-Shuʿarāʾ the difference between this word and the words ḥayya and jānn was tabulatedthe Qurʾān uses three different words for the same event. I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them.

The one thing that belongs here is which word al-Aʿrāf chooses: thuʿbānun mubīn — the same word as at al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/32.

And a point of word order was recorded at 26/32 in al-Shuʿarāʾ and holds here too: the verse does not describe a transformation. It does not say "the staff turned into a serpent"; it says "he cast it down — and there it was, a serpent" (fa-idhā hiya). The process in between is not in the text. I rely on that treatment.

بَيْضَآءُ لِلنَّٰظِرِينَ — "white to those who looked". And the qualification must be recorded: li'n-nāẓirīn — the whiteness is described with reference to those who look.

I record this as an observation about word order: the second sign is told not, like the first, by the condition of an object, but by what the beholder sees. And at 20/22 in Ṭāhā the same event occurs with the qualification min ghayri sūʾin (not from any defect). Al-Aʿrāf does not give that qualification; Ṭāhā does. This is a difference that can be verified from the two texts.


7/109-116

قَالَ ٱلْمَلَأُ مِن قَوْمِ فِرْعَوْنَ إِنَّ هَٰذَا لَسَٰحِرٌ عَلِيمٌ يُرِيدُ أَن يُخْرِجَكُم مِّنْ أَرْضِكُمْ فَمَاذَا تَأْمُرُونَ

Qāla'l-malaʾu min qawmi Firʿawna inna hādhā la-sāḥirun ʿalīm · Yurīdu an yukhrijakum min arḍikum, fa-mādhā taʾmurūn · Qālū arjih wa akhāhu wa arsil fi'l-madāʾini ḥāshirīn · Yaʾtūka bi-kulli sāḥirin ʿalīm · Wa jāʾa's-saḥaratu Firʿawna qālū inna lanā la-ajran in kunnā naḥnu'l-ghālibīn · Qāla naʿam wa innakum la-mina'l-muqarrabīn · Qālū yā Mūsā immā an tulqiya wa immā an nakūna naḥnu'l-mulqīn · Qāla alqū, fa-lammā alqaw saḥarū aʿyuna'n-nāsi wa'starhabūhum wa jāʾū bi-siḥrin ʿaẓīm

"The notables of Pharaoh's people said: 'This is a sorcerer of knowledge; he wants to drive you out of your land. What then do you command?' · They said: 'Hold him and his brother back, and send gatherers into the cities · to bring you every sorcerer of knowledge.' · The sorcerers came to Pharaoh. They said: 'There is surely a reward for us if we are the victors?' · He said: 'Yes, and you shall certainly be among those brought near.' · They said: 'O Moses! Either you cast, or we shall be the ones who cast.' · He said: 'You cast.' And when they cast, they bewitched the eyes of the people, and struck fear into them, and produced a mighty sorcery."

فَمَاذَا تَأْمُرُونَ — the same sentence in two sūras

It was recorded at 26/35 in al-Shuʿarāʾ, and I rely on it: this sentence is word for word identical in two places in the Qurʾānal-Aʿrāf 7/110 and al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/35. This is a datum that can be verified from the text.

And there is a difference of word order between the two sūras, and it must be recorded:

SūraWho speaks the sentence
al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/35Pharaoh — asking the malaʾ
al-Aʿrāf 7/110Al-malaʾ — the sentence stands within the words of the notables

In the classical commentaries it is explained that the sentence in al-Aʿrāf may belong to Pharaoh too, the words of the notables ending in the first half of verse 110. Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

But in both sūras the same fact is recorded, and it is beyond dispute: the decision is not taken alone, a body is consulted. And this accords with the malaʾ backbone of the sūra (tabulated in the section on the structure).

يُرِيدُ أَن يُخْرِجَكُم مِّنْ أَرْضِكُمْ — the third "driving out" in the sūra

And this sentence is an accusation repeated in the sūra. It is a countable datum:

VerseWho says itWho is to be driven out
82The people of LotAkhrijūhum min qaryatikumLot and those with him
88Al-malaʾ (Madyan)La-nukhrijannaka yā ShuʿaybuShuʿayb and those who believed
110Al-malaʾ (Egypt)Yurīdu an yukhrijakum min arḍikumthe addressees themselves
123PharaohLi-tukhrijū minhā ahlahāthe people of the city

In the first two of the four occurrences the messenger is driven out; in the last two it is claimed that the messenger will drive out the people. That is, the accusation changes direction.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the subjects and objects of the four verses: the sūra uses the same verb both as a threat and as an accusation; and in the second case what one wants to do oneself is ascribed to the other side. This is an explanation, not a ruling.

إِنَّ لَنَا لَأَجْرًا — the record of the bargain

A point of word order must be recorded: the first words of the sorcerers are a demand for a fee.

And this can be compared with the sūra's sequence of prophets. It was recorded in al-Shuʿarāʾ Table 3: in al-Shuʿarāʾ the third item of the shared threefold entry of five prophets was wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajrin ("I ask you no fee for this"). I rely on that treatment.

WhoFee
The messengers (al-Shuʿarāʾ)Wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajrI do not ask
The sorcerers (al-Aʿrāf 7/113)Inna lanā la-ajranwe do ask

The same word, the reverse direction. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the word in the two texts.

And what the reward is must be recorded: wa innakum la-mina'l-muqarrabīn — "you shall be among those brought near". What is given is not goods but standing.

سَحَرُوٓا۟ أَعْيُنَ ٱلنَّاسِ — where the sorcery is described

This sentence carries a description that must be recorded, and it is important in respect of word order:

Saḥarū aʿyuna'n-nās"they bewitched the eyes of the people"

The object is not the things cast but the eyes of the beholders.

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the object of the sentence: the verse does not say that a change took place in an object; it says that the effect was upon the beholder.

And at 20/66 in Ṭāhā the same event occurs in the form yukhayyalu ilayhi min siḥrihim annahā tasʿā ("through their sorcery it seemed to him that they were moving"). The two sūras look the same way: al-Aʿrāf names the eye, Ṭāhā the appearance. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts.

وَٱسْتَرْهَبُوهُمْ — the root ر-ه-ب: fear, dread. Form X here states "to frighten, to strike fear". And the same root will return in verse 154: lilladhīna hum li-rabbihim yarhabūn. The same root, one the frightening of people, the other awe before their Lord.

إِمَّآ أَن تُلْقِىَ وَإِمَّآ أَن نَّكُونَ نَحْنُ ٱلْمُلْقِينَ

A point of word order must be recorded: the two halves of the offer are not equal.

HalfConstruction
1An tulqiyaa verbal clause, plain
2An nakūna naḥnu'l-mulqīna nominal clause + the pronoun of separation (naḥnu) + an active participle

The second half is built more heavily than the first. The lexicographers explain such weighting as a statement of emphasis and of claim.

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the difference of pattern between the two halves: in the offer there is a formal courtesy, but the weight has been placed on their own side.

And Moses's answer is a single word: alqū — "you cast". The same scene is given in three sūras in three different patterns, and this is a countable datum:

SūraThe second half of the offerMoses's answer
al-Aʿrāf 7/115-116An nakūna naḥnu'l-mulqīnAlqū
Ṭāhā 20/65-66An nakūna awwala man alqāBal alqū
al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/43(the offer is not named)Alqū mā antum mulqūn

In all three the messenger leaves the first move to the other side. The difference is in the addition: Ṭāhā has bal (rather), al-Shuʿarāʾ lengthens the sentence, al-Aʿrāf has a single word.


7/117-126

وَأَوْحَيْنَآ إِلَىٰ مُوسَىٰٓ أَنْ أَلْقِ عَصَاكَ فَإِذَا هِىَ تَلْقَفُ مَا يَأْفِكُونَ

Wa awḥaynā ilā Mūsā an alqi ʿaṣāk, fa-idhā hiya talqafu mā yaʾfikūn · Fa-waqaʿa'l-ḥaqqu wa baṭala mā kānū yaʿmalūn · Fa-ghulibū hunālika wa'nqalabū ṣāghirīn · Wa ulqiya's-saḥaratu sājidīn · Qālū āmannā bi-rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · Rabbi Mūsā wa Hārūn

"We revealed to Moses: 'Cast down your staff.' And there it was, swallowing what they had fabricated! · So the truth came out, and what they had done came to nothing. · There they were defeated, and they turned back humbled. · And the sorcerers were cast down in prostration. · They said: 'We believe in the Lord of all the worlds — · the Lord of Moses and Aaron.'"

تَلْقَفُ مَا يَأْفِكُونَ

The root ل-ق-ف: to snatch a thing up swiftly and swallow it.

The root أ-ف-ك: to turn a thing from its direction; and from this, a lie, a fabrication. Ifk — a word turned about, a fabrication.

And the choice of object must be recorded, and this is a point of word order: what is swallowed is not "what they cast" but what they fabricate.

It could have been built thusWhat is built
Talqafu mā alqaw — swallowing what they castTalqafu mā yaʾfikūn — swallowing what they fabricate

I record this as an observation about word order: the verse names not the objects lying there but what they are. And this accords with the description in the hundred and sixteenth verse: there too the effect was on the eye, not on the object.

وَأُلْقِىَ ٱلسَّحَرَةُ سَٰجِدِينَ — the passive voice

This sentence was treated at 26/46 in al-Shuʿarāʾ, where it was recorded; I rely on that treatment:

It could have said fa-sajada's-saḥaratu ("the sorcerers prostrated themselves"); it does not. The passive voice states that the prostration was not a planned decision but an irresistible response — as though something set them down.

And it was recorded there in addition that al-Aʿrāf 7/120 is in the same pattern. I do not repeat it.

What belongs here is that the sentence in al-Aʿrāf comes in two steps:

VerseSentence
121Āmannā bi-rabbi'l-ʿālamīn
122Rabbi Mūsā wa Hārūn

The second verse is an appositive to the first: the general expression is then made definite.

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the separateness of the two verses: the sentence is divided; "the Lord of all the worlds" is said and there it stops, and then in a separate verse it is said whose Lord. The lexicographers record that this addition comes to remove every kind of obscurity from the expression.

Two threats, one answer

Pharaoh's response is in three parts, and all three must be recorded:

PartVerseWhat
1123Āmantum bihī qabla an ādhana lakum — the accusation of believing without leave
2123Inna hādhā la-makrun makartumūhu fi'l-madīnati li-tukhrijū minhā ahlahā — the claim of a plot
3124La-uqaṭṭiʿanna aydiyakum wa arjulakum min khilāfin thumma la-uṣallibannakum ajmaʿīn — the punishment

The first part is worth recording, and I give it as an observation: the accusation is aimed not at the belief itself but at its being without leave. That is, the matter is framed not as a question of belief but as a question of authority.

The word makr in the second part had occurred in the ninety-ninth verse (a-fa-aminū makra'llāh). The same word, in two different mouths.

مِنْ خِلَٰفٍ — "crosswise": the cutting off of one hand and the opposite foot. It was recorded at 26/49 in al-Shuʿarāʾ: the Qurʾān gives the same threat in the same words at al-Aʿrāf 7/124 and Ṭāhā 20/71 too. I rely on that treatment.

وَمَا تَنقِمُ مِنَّآ إِلَّآ أَنْ ءَامَنَّا

The root ن-ق-م: to find a thing abhorrent and reject it; and from this, to punish, to take vengeance. The root was treated in al-Zukhruf, where this verse was named. I rely on that treatment.

And the construction of the sentence must be recorded: negation + exception (mā … illā). In Arabic this is the most decisive way of reducing a cause to a single point.

That is, the answer does not put the ground of the punishment into the mouth of the other side; it leaves a single ground: faith.

And the word of the prayer must be recorded: rabbanā afrigh ʿalaynā ṣabrā.

The root ف-ر-غ: to empty a vessel, to pour out all that is in it. That is, what is asked for is not "give us patience" but "pour patience over us" — the picture of a vessel being emptied entire.

I give this as a note about the word, and its ground is the concrete sense of the root. And the second half of the request must also be recorded: wa tawaffanā muslimīn — the demand is not for deliverance but for the keeping of a state.

And the same scene was treated at 26/50-51 in al-Shuʿarāʾ. There the answer took the form lā ḍayra innā ilā rabbinā munqalibūn, and it was found that the pattern of the of generic negation (lā al-nāfiya li'l-jins) in the expression lā ḍayra removes the very notion of harm. I rely on that treatment.

The difference that belongs here is this, and it can be verified from the two texts: the second half of the sentence is word for word the same in the two sūras (innā ilā rabbinā munqalibūn); al-Aʿrāf does not give the first half (lā ḍayra).

al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/50al-Aʿrāf 7/125
First halfLā ḍayr"no harm"absent
Second halfInnā ilā rabbinā munqalibūnInnā ilā rabbinā munqalibūnword for word the same
What followsInnā naṭmaʿu an yaghfira lanā rabbunā (26/51) — hopeWa mā tanqimu minnā illā an āmannā (7/126) — a counter-question

And the word al-Aʿrāf uses is worth recording: munqalibūn — the root ق-ل-ب, "to turn, to be turned over". The same root had been used of the other side in the hundred and nineteenth verse: wa'nqalabū ṣāghirīn — "they turned back humbled". The same verb, two different turnings. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.


7/127-129

وَقَالَ ٱلْمَلَأُ مِن قَوْمِ فِرْعَوْنَ أَتَذَرُ مُوسَىٰ وَقَوْمَهُۥ لِيُفْسِدُوا۟ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ وَيَذَرَكَ وَءَالِهَتَكَ

Wa qāla'l-malaʾu min qawmi Firʿawna a-tadharu Mūsā wa qawmahū li-yufsidū fi'l-arḍi wa yadharaka wa ālihatak, qāla sanuqattilu abnāʾahum wa nastaḥyī nisāʾahum wa innā fawqahum qāhirūn · Qāla Mūsā li-qawmihi'staʿīnū bi'llāhi wa'ṣbirū, inna'l-arḍa li'llāh yūrithuhā man yashāʾu min ʿibādih, wa'l-ʿāqibatu li'l-muttaqīn · Qālū ūdhīnā min qabli an taʾtiyanā wa min baʿdi mā jiʾtanā, qāla ʿasā rabbukum an yuhlika ʿaduwwakum wa yastakhlifakum fi'l-arḍi fa-yanẓura kayfa taʿmalūn

"The notables of Pharaoh's people said: 'Will you leave Moses and his people free to work corruption in the land and to forsake you and your gods?' He said: 'We shall slay their sons and spare their women. We hold overwhelming power above them.' · Moses said to his people: 'Seek help from God and be patient. The earth belongs to God; He gives it in inheritance to whom He wills of His servants. The outcome belongs to those who guard themselves.' · They said: 'We suffered harm before you came to us, and after you came to us.' He said: 'It may be that your Lord will destroy your enemy and make you successors in the land, and then see how you act.'"

On whom the word فَسَاد is laid

This verse is a reversal that must be recorded in the sūra, and it is read entirely from the text:

WhoTo whom fasād is ascribed
The sūra's own command (56)Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā — forbidden to the addressee
Shuʿayb (85)The same sentence — forbidden to Madyan
The verse's own verdict (103)Fa'nẓur kayfa kāna ʿāqibatu'l-mufsidīnof Pharaoh and his notables
Al-malaʾ (127)Li-yufsidū fi'l-arḍof Moses and his people

That is, in the hundred and third verse the sūra ascribes corruption to one side; in the hundred and twenty-seventh it lets the same word be heard in the mouth of the other side.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is that the two verses use the same root: the word is the same, the ascription reversed. The sūra does not interpret this; it leaves the two sentences side by side.

And a like attitude was recorded at 40/26 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin): there too the decision to kill is presented with a ground of protection, and the word in the ground (fasād) was exactly the name of what was being done there. I rely on that treatment; al-Aʿrāf builds the same structure once more.

وَيَذَرَكَ وَءَالِهَتَكَ — a variant reading

Several readings are transmitted of this expression, and I record it because the difference affects the meaning:

ReadingTextMeaning
1Wa ālihatak"you and your gods" — what Pharaoh worships
2Wa ilāhatak"you and the worship paid to you" — the service rendered to himself

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. Both accord with the context of the sūra.

إِنَّ ٱلْأَرْضَ لِلَّهِ يُورِثُهَا مَن يَشَآءُ

Moses's answer is in three parts, and the three do different work:

PartExpressionWhat
1Istaʿīnū bi'llāhi wa'ṣbirūA command — two verbs
2Inna'l-arḍa li'llāh yūrithuhā man yashāʾu min ʿibādihA ruling — to whom the dominion belongs
3Wa'l-ʿāqibatu li'l-muttaqīnA note on the outcome — qualified

And the qualification of the third part must be recorded: li'l-muttaqīn — "those who guard themselves". It does not say "yours".

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the word itself: the promise is tied not to a community but to an attribute. And this is the in-text counterpart of the principle recorded in the section on the structure of the sūra: what is described is an attribute.

And the same qualification is built once more, and even more plainly, in the hundred and twenty-ninth verse: wa yastakhlifakum fi'l-arḍi fa-yanẓura kayfa taʿmalūn"and then see how you act".

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the second half of the sentence: the promise is not a promise of unconditional supremacy. Succession is announced, and immediately after it a sentence of observation is placed. That is, deliverance is given not as the end of the test but as the beginning of a new one.

And the later verses of the sūra confirm this: at 138 the demand for a calf, at 148 the calf, at 163 the Sabbath, at 169 the condition of those who took over the Book. The sūra goes on telling what came after the deliverance.


7/130-136

وَلَقَدْ أَخَذْنَآ ءَالَ فِرْعَوْنَ بِٱلسِّنِينَ وَنَقْصٍ مِّنَ ٱلثَّمَرَٰتِ لَعَلَّهُمْ يَذَّكَّرُونَ

Wa laqad akhadhnā āla Firʿawna bi's-sinīna wa naqṣin mina'th-thamarāti laʿallahum yadhdhakkarūn · Fa-idhā jāʾathumu'l-ḥasanatu qālū lanā hādhih, wa in tuṣibhum sayyiʾatun yaṭṭayyarū bi-Mūsā wa man maʿah, alā innamā ṭāʾiruhum ʿinda'llāhi wa lākinna aktharahum lā yaʿlamūn · Wa qālū mahmā taʾtinā bihī min āyatin li-tasḥaranā bihā fa-mā naḥnu laka bi-muʾminīn · Fa-arsalnā ʿalayhimu'ṭ-ṭūfāna wa'l-jarāda wa'l-qummala wa'ḍ-ḍafādiʿa wa'd-dama āyātin mufaṣṣalāt, fa'stakbarū wa kānū qawman mujrimīn

"We seized the people of Pharaoh with years of dearth and a shortfall of fruits — that they might take it to heart. · When good came to them they would say, 'This is ours'; and when an ill befell them they took it as an ill omen from Moses and those with him. Take note: their omen is with God; but most of them do not know. · They said: 'Whatever sign you bring us to bewitch us with, we are not going to believe in you.' · So We sent upon them the flood, the locusts, the lice, the frogs and the blood — signs set out one by one. But they were too great for them, and they were a guilty people."

يَطَّيَّرُوا۟ — to take as an ill omen

The root ط-ي-ر: to fly, a bird. Ṭiyara is the name of the custom of drawing a good or an ill omen from the direction in which a bird flies. That is, the word names the putting of an observation in the place of a decision.

The same root was treated at 27/47 in al-Naml (iṭṭayyarnā bika wa bi-man maʿak — Thamūd, of Ṣāliḥ), where a table was drawn up; al-Aʿrāf 7/131 was named in that table. I rely on that treatment.

What belongs here is the answer the verse gives, and this is a point of word order:

Alā innamā ṭāʾiruhum ʿinda'llāh

The verse does not say "there is no such thing as an ill omen". It takes the word and changes its place: ṭāʾir — "what flies, one's share of fortune" — is with God.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the construction of the sentence: what is objected to is not the search for a cause itself, but the placing of the cause in the wrong place. And innamā (the particle of restriction) fixes the cause at a single point.

And the first half of the sentence must also be recorded, and it is an observation about human behaviour:

What comesWhat is said
Al-ḥasana (good)Lanā hādhih"this is ours"
Sayyiʾa (ill)Yaṭṭayyarū bi-Mūsāit is attached to someone else

What is good is ascribed to oneself, what is ill to the other side. This is a structure that can be verified from the text, and the verse gives it as a diagnosis.

I enter a note as a connection with the social sciences, and I give it with the qualification "this is one way of looking at it" (Method): the tendency to attribute success to oneself and failure to external factors is a pattern that has been observed and named in social psychology. It is an observation that overlaps with the attitude the verse describes; the verse does not set it up as a theory, it tells it as the behaviour of a community. I give this as a possible connection, not as a proof.

مَهْمَا تَأْتِنَا بِهِۦ مِنْ ءَايَةٍ — the closedness of the sentence

The hundred and thirty-second verse is the plainest statement of closedness to be recorded in the sūra:

Mahmā taʾtinā bihī min āyatin li-tasḥaranā bihā fa-mā naḥnu laka bi-muʾminīn

The sentence is a conditional pattern, and the scope of the condition is left without limit: mahmā — "whatever you bring".

I record this as an observation about word order: the refusal is given before the proof that is to come. That is, the content of the proof is placed outside discussion.

And the same attitude was treated at 41/5 in Fuṣṣilat (qulūbunā fī akinnatin … fa'mal innanā ʿāmilūn), where the addressees' declaring themselves closed was recorded. I rely on that treatment and record the difference in al-Aʿrāf: in Fuṣṣilat the closedness was stated as a condition, in al-Aʿrāf as a decision.

Five signs — and the limit of the count

The hundred and thirty-third verse counts five things: ṭūfān, jarād, qummal, ḍafādiʿ, dam.

WordRootMeaning
ٱلطُّوفَانط-و-فWhat encircles and goes round — the lexicographers generally say a flood; the explanation "a calamity that surrounds from every side" is also transmitted
ٱلْجَرَادج-ر-دLocusts — the root means "to strip a place and leave it bare" (ajrad — bare)
ٱلْقُمَّلق-م-لThere is disagreement about it: it is explained as lice, ticks, small vermin, or grain weevils
ٱلضَّفَادِعض-ف-د-عFrogs
ٱلدَّمد-م-يBlood

What the word qummal denotes is disputed, and I do not impose a preference; it is recorded that the root is tied to the idea of "what is small and numerous".

And the root of the word jarād is worth recording: from the same root comes ajrad (hairless, bare). That is, the name of the locust comes from the scene it leaves behind. This is an observation about the language.

And the qualification the Qurʾān places on this list must be recorded: āyātin mufaṣṣalāt"signs set out one by one".

The root ف-ص-ل was treated at the fifty-second verse; I rely on that treatment. Here the word takes the five events out of being a single catastrophe and makes them signs distinguished from one another.

I record this as an observation about word order: the verse stresses not the succession of the events but their being told apart.

And per the method I draw a limit: I build no explanation about the historical or natural causes of these five events; the Qurʾān names the events and does not describe their mechanisms. And I do not go the way of comparing them with another religious text so as to equate or to separate them (Method).

The word given and its breaking

The hundred and thirty-fourth and hundred and thirty-fifth verses build a cycle, and the steps of the cycle are countable:

StepVerseWhat
1134Waqaʿa ʿalayhimu'r-rijz — the punishment falls
2134Udʿu lanā rabbakmediation is asked of the messenger
3134La-in kashafta … la-nuʾminanna laka wa la-nursilanna maʿaka banī Isrāʾīltwo promises are given
4135Fa-lammā kashafnā ʿanhumu'r-rijzit is lifted
5135Idhā hum yankuthūnthe word is broken

The root ن-ك-ث: to untwist a twisted rope, to undo it. Nakatha'l-ḥabl — he untwisted the rope. That is, the breaking of a word is described with the picture of something woven coming undone.

This is the concrete sense of the root and is worth recording: the verse pictures a word as a binding.

And a point of word order must be recorded: idhā hum yankuthūn — the idhā of suddenness (idhā al-fujāʾiyya). In Arabic this particle states the abrupt appearance of an unlooked-for state. That is, the breaking happens not at the end of a process but the moment the punishment lifts.

And the qualification ilā ajalin hum bālighūh must be recorded: the lifting was for a term. The verse gives the lifting not as a pardon but as a respite.

فَٱنتَقَمْنَا مِنْهُمْ فَأَغْرَقْنَٰهُمْ فِى ٱلْيَمِّ

The root ي-م-م: yamm, according to the lexicographers, "the sea" or "a great body of water". It is also recorded that the word passed into Arabic from another language; I claim no certainty.

And the Qurʾān uses two different words for this event: al-baḥr (at 7/138, jāwaznā bi-banī Isrāʾīla'l-baḥr) and al-yamm (7/136). Two words two verses apart, for the same water. This is a countable datum.

And the ground of the drowning is given in the verse, and it is in two parts: bi-annahum kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā wa kānū ʿanhā ghāfilīn.

The root غ-ف-ل: to remain unaware of a thing; and to leave a thing aside and take no interest in it. And the placing of the word here is worth recording: calling a lie is a stance, heedlessness a condition. The two are named together.


7/137-141

وَأَوْرَثْنَا ٱلْقَوْمَ ٱلَّذِينَ كَانُوا۟ يُسْتَضْعَفُونَ مَشَٰرِقَ ٱلْأَرْضِ وَمَغَٰرِبَهَا ٱلَّتِى بَٰرَكْنَا فِيهَا

Wa awrathna'l-qawma'lladhīna kānū yustaḍʿafūna mashāriqa'l-arḍi wa maghāribaha'llatī bāraknā fīhā, wa tammat kalimatu rabbika'l-ḥusnā ʿalā banī Isrāʾīla bimā ṣabarū, wa dammarnā mā kāna yaṣnaʿu Firʿawnu wa qawmuhū wa mā kānū yaʿrishūn

"And We gave the people who had been made weak the easts and the wests of the land We had blessed as their inheritance. The good word of your Lord to the Children of Israel was fulfilled, because they had been patient. And We levelled what Pharaoh and his people had been making and what they had raised up."

بَٰرَكْنَا فِيهَا — where the blessing is attached

This expression was treated at 17/1 in al-Isrāʾ, where it was recorded; I rely on that treatment: the blessing is attached not to the soil itself but to what is in it. The same expression is used in the Qurʾān for this region in other places too (al-Anbiyāʾ 21/71, 21/81). I do not repeat it.

And the note that belongs here is this: the verse gives no place-name. Mashāriqa'l-arḍi wa maghāribahā"the easts of the land and its wests". No border is drawn.

I record this as an observation about word order: the text does not set up a geographical title deed; it states an outcome. And per the method I write plainly: no support for any present-day political claim is to be drawn from this verse. This commentary takes no side in current politics (Method).

And the qualification the verse itself lays down must be recorded: bimā ṣabarū — "because they had been patient". The inheritance is tied not to a lineage but to a conduct. And this lies on the same line as the note wa'l-ʿāqibatu li'l-muttaqīn in the hundred and twenty-eighth verse.

And the note fa-yanẓura kayfa taʿmalūn in the hundred and twenty-ninth verse is at work here too: the sūra will show the same community, a few verses later, asking for a calf (138). The text does not conceal it.

دَمَّرْنَا and يَعْرِشُونَ

The root د-م-ر: to destroy, to level.

The root ع-ر-ش: to raise a thing up, to build a bower or a vault. The word ʿarsh is from the same rootand it occurred in the fifty-fourth verse.

This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and it must be recorded:

VerseWordWhose
54Thumma'stawā ʿala'l-ʿarshGod
137Wa mā kānū yaʿrishūnPharaoh and his people

The same root, two different heights. And a note of tanzīh was entered concerning the first (in the section on 54); the second is levelled to the ground.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the two occurrences of the root: the sūra uses a word from the same root both as the announcement of sovereignty and as the name of the structures that are brought down. This is an explanation, not a ruling.

ٱجْعَل لَّنَآ إِلَٰهًا كَمَا لَهُمْ ءَالِهَةٌ

The hundred and thirty-eighth verse comes immediately after the crossing of the sea, and a point of word order must be recorded: there is no verse between the two events.

VerseWhat happens
138aWa jāwaznā bi-banī Isrāʾīla'l-baḥr — the sea is crossed
138bFa-ataw ʿalā qawmin yaʿkufūna ʿalā aṣnāmin lahum — a people is come upon
138cQālū yā Mūsa'jʿal lanā ilāhan kamā lahum āliha — the demand comes

Three sentences, one verse. I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the verse itself: the ground of the demand is not a need but a seeing. Kamā lahum — "like theirs".

And the scene of the calf was treated at 20/88 in Ṭāhā. The difference here must be recorded: at 138 there is as yet no calf; only a demand. The calf will come at verse 148. That is, the sūra puts the demand and its fulfilment in different places, and between them stands Moses's departure (142).

The root ع-ك-ف: to stand constantly by a thing, not to leave it. The root was treated at 20/91 in Ṭāhā and at 26/71 in al-Shuʿarāʾ; I rely on those treatments.

مُتَبَّرٌ مَّا هُمْ فِيهِ

The root ت-ب-ر: to be broken to pieces, to be reduced to fragments. Tibr — unworked, scattered gold. That is, the word carries the idea of "valuable but scattered, without wholeness".

And the construction of the answer must be recorded, and this is a point of word order: before rejecting what is asked for, Moses characterises what is being taken as a model.

OrderSentenceWhat it does
1Innakum qawmun tajhalūn (138)A diagnosis — the source of the demand
2Inna hāʾulāʾi mutabbarun mā hum fīhi wa bāṭilun mā kānū yaʿmalūn (139)An assessment of the model
3A-ghayra'llāhi abghīkum ilāhan wa huwa faḍḍalakum ʿala'l-ʿālamīn (140)A question — and a reminder

That is, the answer is in three steps, and the three do different work. I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the three verses themselves.

And the word in the third step must be recorded: faḍḍalakum ʿala'l-ʿālamīn. This expression occurs in several places in the Qurʾān of the Children of Israel (al-Baqara 2/47, 2/122; al-Jāthiya 45/16) and was treated at 2/47 in al-Baqara. I rely on that treatment.

And the note entered there holds here too, and I repeat it, because it is required by the method: the expression does not establish a superiority of lineage; it states a means that was given. And the sūra itself will divide this expressly in verses 159 and 168: within the same community groups will be counted, separated out as ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqq (159) and minhum dūna dhālik (168). No blanket judgement is issued about an ethnic or religious group (Method).

7/141 — the shift in the direction of address

Wa idh anjaynākum min āli Firʿawna yasūmūnakum sūʾa'l-ʿadhāb, yuqattilūna abnāʾakum wa yastaḥyūna nisāʾakum, wa fī dhālikum balāʾun min rabbikum ʿaẓīm "Remember when We delivered you from the people of Pharaoh, who were inflicting on you the worst of punishment: slaying your sons and sparing your women. In that there was a mighty test from your Lord."

A point of word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking transition in the block: the verse passes from the third person to the second.

VersesPersonExample
137-140Third personWa awrathna'l-qawma'lladhīna kānū yustaḍʿafūn — "that people"
141Second personWa idh anjaynākum — "We delivered you"

This is iltifāt (a shift in the direction of address), and it was treated in many places in the index.

And its work here is worth recording, and I give it as my own reading: the story being told is turned, in a single sentence, directly upon the addressee. And straight after this verse come Moses's departure (142) and the calf (148). That is, immediately after saying "this was done to you", the sūra tells "what you did".

And the word of the last sentence must be recorded: wa fī dhālikum balāʾun min rabbikum ʿaẓīm.

The root ب-ل-و: to try, to test; and to wear a thing out. Balāʾ in Arabic takes in both the good and the ill"one is tested with bounty as well as with hardship". This was recorded in many places in the index.

And the object of the word here is worth recording: the sentence counts the deliverance itself as a test. This lies on the same line as the two-stage test in the ninety-fifth verse: there hardship and ease, here affliction and deliverance.


7/142-143

وَوَٰعَدْنَا مُوسَىٰ ثَلَٰثِينَ لَيْلَةً وَأَتْمَمْنَٰهَا بِعَشْرٍ فَتَمَّ مِيقَٰتُ رَبِّهِۦٓ أَرْبَعِينَ لَيْلَةً · وَلَمَّا جَآءَ مُوسَىٰ لِمِيقَٰتِنَا وَكَلَّمَهُۥ رَبُّهُۥ قَالَ رَبِّ أَرِنِىٓ أَنظُرْ إِلَيْكَ قَالَ لَن تَرَىٰنِى

Wa wāʿadnā Mūsā thalāthīna laylatan wa atmamnāhā bi-ʿashrin fa-tamma mīqātu rabbihī arbaʿīna layla, wa qāla Mūsā li-akhīhi Hārūna'khlufnī fī qawmī wa aṣliḥ wa lā tattabiʿ sabīla'l-mufsidīn · Wa lammā jāʾa Mūsā li-mīqātinā wa kallamahū rabbuhū qāla rabbi arinī anẓur ilayk, qāla lan tarānī wa lākini'nẓur ila'l-jabali fa-ini'staqarra makānahū fa-sawfa tarānī, fa-lammā tajallā rabbuhū li'l-jabali jaʿalahū dakkan wa kharra Mūsā ṣaʿiqā, fa-lammā afāqa qāla subḥānaka tubtu ilayka wa anā awwalu'l-muʾminīn

"We appointed for Moses thirty nights and completed them with ten more; so the term set by his Lord was completed at forty nights. Moses said to his brother Aaron: 'Take my place among my people, set things right, and do not follow the way of the corrupters.' · And when Moses came at the time We appointed and his Lord spoke to him, he said: 'My Lord! Show me Yourself, that I may look at You.' He said: 'You will never see Me. But look at the mountain; if it stays firm in its place, you will see Me.' And when his Lord manifested Himself to the mountain He made it crumble to dust, and Moses fell down in a faint. When he came to, he said: 'Glory be to You! I turn to You in repentance; I am the first of the believers.'"

ثَلَٰثِينَ لَيْلَةً وَأَتْمَمْنَٰهَا بِعَشْرٍ — the way the number is given

A point of word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the verse: the term is not stated all at once.

It could have been built thusWhat is built
Wa wāʿadnā Mūsā arbaʿīna laylatanThalāthīna laylatan wa atmamnāhā bi-ʿashrin fa-tamma … arbaʿīna layla

That is, the verse says thirty + ten = forty. And it states the sum itself.

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the construction of the sentence: the telling gives the term not as a whole but as a completing. And the verb used confirms it: atmamnāhā — "We completed it"; and fa-tamma — "so it was completed". The same root (ت-م-م) twice.

And the choice of the word layla (night) is worth recording: it counts not "days" but "nights". This is one of the common ways of counting a span in Arabic, and the lexicographers record it separately.

Several explanations of the reason for the division between thirty and ten are transmitted in the classical commentaries. I do not convey them, because I cannot establish the soundness of any of them, and the Qurʾān states no reason (Method). The one thing that can be verified from the text is that the division is there.

ٱخْلُفْنِى فِى قَوْمِى — the three instructions given to Aaron

What Moses says to his brother is in three parts, and all three must be recorded:

#CommandRootWhat
1Ukhlufnī fī qawmīخ-ل-فTake my place
2Wa aṣliḥص-ل-حSet things right
3Wa lā tattabiʿ sabīla'l-mufsidīnت-ب-عDo not follow the way of the corrupters

And the opposition of two words must be recorded: aṣliḥ (set right) and al-mufsidīn (the corrupters) — the roots ص-ل-ح and ف-س-د. They are set facing each other in the same sentence.

And this pair had occurred twice earlier in the sūra (56 and 85: wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā). That is, the sūra uses its own measure a third time, this time in the instruction a prophet gives to his brother. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

And the presence of the third command is worth recording, and I give it as an observation: the instruction is not only "take my place"; it carries a prohibition as well. The text does not say the reason for this prohibition, and I invent no reason.

رَبِّ أَرِنِىٓ أَنظُرْ إِلَيْكَ — the undoing of the words

أَرِنِى — the root ر-أ-ي, the imperative of Form IV: "show me". No object is stated; the sentence is not arinī nafsak ("show me Yourself") but only arinī. That the object has been elided is understood from the second clause (anẓur ilayk).

أَنظُرْ إِلَيْكَ — the root ن-ظ-ر: to look, to turn the eye towards something. The verb is in the jussive: it comes as the answer to the request ("show me that I may look").

And the difference between the two roots must be recorded, and it is a datum of the language:

RootVerbMeaning
ر-أ-يRaʾāTo see — it states the outcome
ن-ظ-رNaẓaraTo look — it states the turning, and does not entail seeing

The request uses both at once: show (seeing) and let me look (turning).

The disagreement — the question of the vision (ruʾya)

This verse is one of the most debated verses in the history of Islamic thought, and the debate is a debate of kalām. Per the method (Method) I impose no preference here, take no side, and enter into no polemic. I give the views, together with their grounds, in a table.

The subject of the debate is this: what does the sentence lan tarānī ("you will never see Me") negate?

#ReadingIts groundThe difficulty raised against this reading
1Seeing is not possible in this world; the negation looks to this world. The state in the hereafter is not the subject of this verseThe context in which the particle lan is used is this world; no distinction between this world and the hereafter is made in the verse, but the context is this world. And it is argued that there are other verses in the Qurʾān (al-Qiyāma 75/22-23)The verse sets down no qualification of time; the qualification is brought from outside
2Seeing is absolutely impossible; the negation covers every caseThat the particle lan states certainty and perpetuity; and the sentence lā tudrikuhu'l-abṣār at al-Anʿām 6/103The view that the particle lan states eternal negation is disputed among the lexicographers
3What is negated is seeing in the form requested — that is, an encompassing, comprehending visionThat the sentence comes as the answer to the request; and that the example of the mountain is built as a question of withstanding (fa-ini'staqarra)There is no such qualification in the wording of the sentence

All three readings have been voiced in the classical sources, and each has its own chain of evidence. I make no preference and set no school's view above another's.

And I write this plainly: this verse has throughout history been a distinguishing question among the schools of kalām. In this commentary it is not said on which side of that division one stands.

I record separately the things that can be verified from the text, because these are not disputed:

#Datum of the text
1The request comes from a prophet and is refused; but the request is not censured — there is no sentence of rebuke in the verse
2The answer is not a plain "no": lan tarānī is said and immediately after it a direction comes — wa lākini'nẓur ila'l-jabal
3The measure is tied to istiqrār: fa-ini'staqarra makānahū fa-sawfa tarānī — the condition of being able to stay in place
4The mountain cannot stay: jaʿalahū dakkā
5Moses's response is a fainting (kharra … ṣaʿiqā), not an objection
6His words after coming to are a glorification and a repentance, not a renewed request

And I enter a note of tanzīh about the word tajallī, and I do not open the discussion:

The root ج-ل-و: a thing's coming into the open, the lifting of a covering, brightness becoming visible. In ascribing the word to God, the note entered for the Throne at 40/7 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) holds here too: the expression cannot be understood so as to ascribe place, body or removal from one place to another to God. In the classical commentaries two attitudes are transmitted for expressions of this kind, tafwīḍ and taʾwīl; I convey both and impose no preference.

And a point of word order must be recorded: tajallā rabbuhū li'l-jabal — the one addressed by the manifestation is the mountain, not Moses. This is a datum that can be read from the text.

دَكًّا — the root د-ك-ك: to level a thing to the ground, to crumble it. A variant reading is transmitted: dakkan and dakkāʾan. The difference in sense is slight; both mean "shattered to pieces / levelled flat".

صَعِقًا — the root ص-ع-ق: to be struck by lightning; and from this, to faint, to lose consciousness.

أَنَا۠ أَوَّلُ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ — the meaning of the sentence

The lexicographers and the exegetes dwell on this sentence too, and I give the disagreement in a table:

ReadingWhat awwalu'l-muʾminīn means
1First in time — the first to believe among his own people
2Foremost in rank — at the head of faith
3First in this particular matter — "I am the first of those who believe that You cannot be seen"

All three explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And it must be recorded that the same expression occurs at 26/51 in al-Shuʿarāʾ in the mouth of the sorcerers: an kunnā awwala'l-muʾminīn. The same pattern in two places, in two different mouths. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts.


7/144-147

قَالَ يَٰمُوسَىٰٓ إِنِّى ٱصْطَفَيْتُكَ عَلَى ٱلنَّاسِ بِرِسَٰلَٰتِى وَبِكَلَٰمِى فَخُذْ مَآ ءَاتَيْتُكَ وَكُن مِّنَ ٱلشَّٰكِرِينَ

Qāla yā Mūsā innī'ṣṭafaytuka ʿala'n-nāsi bi-risālātī wa bi-kalāmī fa-khudh mā ātaytuka wa kun mina'sh-shākirīn · Wa katabnā lahū fi'l-alwāḥi min kulli shayʾin mawʿiẓatan wa tafṣīlan li-kulli shayʾin fa-khudhhā bi-quwwatin wa'mur qawmaka yaʾkhudhū bi-aḥsanihā, sa-urīkum dāra'l-fāsiqīn

"He said: 'O Moses! I have chosen you above mankind with My messages and with My speech to you. So take what I have given you and be among the thankful.' · And We wrote for him on the tablets an admonition about everything and a setting out in detail of everything: 'Take these with strength, and command your people to take the best of them. I shall show you the abode of the transgressors.'"

فَخُذْ مَآ ءَاتَيْتُكَ and فَخُذْهَا بِقُوَّةٍ — "to take hold"

In these two verses the same verb (أ-خ-ذ) occurs three times, and each time it states a command to take hold:

VerseExpressionTo whom
144Fa-khudh mā ātaytukTo Moses
145Fa-khudhhā bi-quwwatinTo Moses
145Wa'mur qawmaka yaʾkhudhū bi-aḥsanihāTo the people

And the same pattern will come once more in the hundred and seventy-first verse of the sūra: khudhū mā ātaynākum bi-quwwatin. That is, the same command at the beginning and at the end of the block.

This command was treated at 2/63 in al-Baqara, where it was recorded; I rely on that treatment: "It is said that to hold the Book in hand requires not a loose contact but a force of grip. What is held loosely does not stay in the hand."

And what belongs here is this, and it connects with the sūra as a whole — I record it as my own reading, and it is not binding: the backbone recorded in the section on the structure of the sūra was "the passing of what was given out of the hand". The command in the hundred and forty-fifth verse is exactly the reverse of that: bi-quwwatin — to hold fast. And in the hundred and seventy-fifth verse the sūra will tell the opposite: the man who slipped out of his signs.

بِأَحْسَنِهَا — a question of word order

One expression in the hundred and forty-fifth verse draws notice: what the people are commanded is to take the best of the tablets.

The exegetes dwell on this expression, and I give the disagreement in a table:

ReadingWhat aḥsanihā meansGround
1All that is in them is good; aḥsan here states not a comparison but an attributeThat in Arabic the elative is also used for an attribute without comparison
2Between dispensation (rukhṣa) and the stricter course (ʿazīma), to take the higherThat there is a distinction between what the text permits and what it recommends
3Between what is commanded and what is merely allowed, to take what is commandedThe application of the same distinction to kinds of ruling

All three explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference, and I draw no legal rule from this (Method).

سَأَصْرِفُ عَنْ ءَايَٰتِىَ ٱلَّذِينَ يَتَكَبَّرُونَ

The root ص-ر-ف occurs three times in the sūra, and its table was given at the fifty-eighth verse. This is the third occurrence.

And the qualification of the sentence must be recorded: alladhīna yatakabbarūna fi'l-arḍi bi-ghayri'l-ḥaqq.

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the relative clause: the turning away is tied not to a group as a name but to a behaviour. And the word connects with the second block of the sūra: the same root had been used of Iblīs toofa-mā yakūnu laka an tatakabbara fīhā (13).

The same verb, two different subjects. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

And in the continuation of the hundred and forty-sixth verse a table of seeing and of way is built, and this table is read directly from the text:

What is seenWhat is done
Kulla āyatinevery signLā yuʾminū bihā
Sabīla'r-rushdthe way of rightnessLā yattakhidhūhu sabīlā
Sabīla'l-ghayythe way of errorYattakhidhūhu sabīlā

Three things are seen, and to the three three different responses are given. And the verb is the same: yattakhidhū (to take up). That is, the verse speaks not of blindness but of choice.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the threefold structure. And the same structure was recorded at 41/17 in Fuṣṣilat (fa'staḥabbu'l-ʿamā ʿala'l-hudā — they preferred blindness to guidance). I rely on that treatment: the two sūras build the same fact with two different words.


7/148-151

وَٱتَّخَذَ قَوْمُ مُوسَىٰ مِنۢ بَعْدِهِۦ مِنْ حُلِيِّهِمْ عِجْلًا جَسَدًا لَّهُۥ خُوَارٌ

Wa'ttakhadha qawmu Mūsā min baʿdihī min ḥuliyyihim ʿijlan jasadan lahū khuwār, a-lam yaraw annahū lā yukallimuhum wa lā yahdīhim sabīlā, ittakhadhūhu wa kānū ẓālimīn · Wa lammā suqiṭa fī aydīhim wa raʾaw annahum qad ḍallū qālū la-in lam yarḥamnā rabbunā wa yaghfir lanā la-nakūnanna mina'l-khāsirīn

"After Moses had gone, his people made out of their ornaments a calf, a body that lowed. Did they not see that it did not speak to them and did not guide them to any way? They took it, and they became wrongdoers. · And when it was brought home to them and they saw that they had gone astray, they said: 'If our Lord does not have mercy on us and forgive us, we shall surely be among the lost.'"

جَسَد and خُوَار

The root ج-س-د. It was recorded in al-Anbiyāʾ, and I rely on that treatment: the lexicographers record a distinction between jasad and jismjasad is used of a body with no sign of life in it.

The root خ-و-ر: the lowing of cattle. It was recorded at 20/88 in Ṭāhā: the word occurs in the Qurʾān only here and at Ṭāhā 20/88. I rely on that treatment.

And the coming together of the two words must be recorded, and this is a point of word order:

WordWhat it states
JasadanLifelessness
Lahū khuwārA sound

The verse gives both in the same sentence: a lifeless body and a sound. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the verse's own words.

And how the sound came about is not stated in the verse. Detailed explanations are conveyed in the classical sources; this commentary does not enter into them, because the text does not, and their soundness cannot be established (Method).

أَلَمْ يَرَوْا۟ أَنَّهُۥ لَا يُكَلِّمُهُمْ وَلَا يَهْدِيهِمْ سَبِيلًا

The proof the verse builds must be recorded, and it is one of the most concrete measures in the sūra: two lacks are counted.

#LackWhere its counterpart stands in the sūra
1yukallimuhumit does not speak143: wa kallamahū rabbuh — his Lord spoke to Moses
2yahdīhim sabīlāit does not guide to a way146: sabīla'r-rushd / sabīla'l-ghayy — the question of the way

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the words of the two verses: the verse compares the calf with what was told five verses earlier. There there was speech; here there is none. And the measure is not the look of what is worshipped but what it can do.

And this measure will be repeated and widened in the last block of the sūra (7/191-198): there what those called upon can do will be counted one by one. That link will close there.

وَلَمَّا سُقِطَ فِىٓ أَيْدِيهِمْ — an idiom

This expression is an idiom in Arabic, and the lexicographers dwell on it. Word for word: "it was dropped into their hands". As an idiom its sense is: severe regret and bewilderment.

And the verb's being passive must be recorded: suqiṭa — "it was dropped". Who dropped it is not stated.

This is the word's only occurrence in the Qurʾān. This is a countable datum.

I give this as a note about the language, and I convey as transmitted the explanation that renders the picture of the idiom thus: the regretful person biting his hand or striking hand upon hand — the bodily counterpart of regret.

7/150-151 — the scene with Aaron

Wa lammā rajaʿa Mūsā ilā qawmihī ghaḍbāna asifan qāla biʾsamā khalaftumūnī min baʿdī, a-ʿajiltum amra rabbikum, wa alqa'l-alwāḥa wa akhadha bi-raʾsi akhīhi yajurruhū ilayh, qāla'bna umma inna'l-qawma'staḍʿafūnī wa kādū yaqtulūnanī fa-lā tushmit biya'l-aʿdāʾa wa lā tajʿalnī maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn "When Moses returned to his people, angry and grieved, he said: 'How evil is what you have done after me! Were you in haste over the command of your Lord?' He put down the tablets and took hold of his brother's head, pulling him towards himself. [Aaron] said: 'Son of my mother! The people reckoned me weak and were about to kill me. Do not let the enemies gloat over me, and do not place me with the wrongdoing people.'"

This scene was treated in detail at 20/92-94 in Ṭāhā, and I rely on that treatment. A summary of what was recorded there:

  • Ṭāhā 20/90, by saying min qablu (earlier), puts Aaron's warning back into the telling of the events; that is, when the reader hears Moses's question he already knows the answer.
  • The two things Aaron asked of his people (ittibāʿ and iṭāʿa) are expressed in the same words as what Moses asked of Aaron.
  • In Ṭāhā the address is yabnaʾumma ("son of my mother"), and it was treated there.

Now I work out the difference between the two sūras, and it can be verified from the two texts:

Ṭāhā 20/92-94al-Aʿrāf 7/150
Moses's questionYā Hārūnu mā manaʿaka idh raʾaytahum ḍallū, allā tattabiʿani, a-fa-ʿaṣayta amrī — a questioning about obedienceBiʾsamā khalaftumūnī min baʿdī, a-ʿajiltum amra rabbikum — a reproach directed at the people
The act(the taking hold is named: akhadha bi-raʾsi akhīh — before 20/94)Wa alqa'l-alwāḥa wa akhadha bi-raʾsi akhīhi yajurruhū ilayh
Aaron's answerInnī khashītu an taqūla farraqta bayna banī Isrāʾīla wa lam tarqub qawlī — a fear of divisionInna'l-qawma'staḍʿafūnī wa kādū yaqtulūnanī — a statement of want of power
The final request(none)Fa-lā tushmit biya'l-aʿdāʾa wa lā tajʿalnī maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn

That is, the two sūras cut the same scene at two different places. I record this as an observation, and I give it not as a contradiction but as a choice of detailthe same method was recorded at 20/20 in Ṭāhā.

ٱلْأَسَفthe root أ-س-ف. It was recorded at 12/84 in Yūsuf and at 43/55 in al-Zukhruf, and I rely on those treatments: when the word is used of Jacob it means grief, and when it is used of Moses (ghaḍbāna asifā — al-Aʿrāf 7/150; Ṭāhā 20/86) it means grief mixed with anger. I do not repeat it.

And the coming together of two words in al-Aʿrāf must be recorded: ghaḍbāna (angry) and asifan (grieved). Two states are named together.

وَأَلْقَى ٱلْأَلْوَاحَand the verb must be recorded: alqā. This is a verb that has already occurred three times in the sūra (7/107: fa-alqā ʿaṣāh; 7/115-116: immā an tulqiya / alqū; 7/117: an alqi ʿaṣāk). The fourth occurrence is here, and its object is the tablets.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the four occurrences of the verb: the same verb had three times been used for the showing of a sign; at the fourth what was given is set down. And it will be taken up again in the hundred and fifty-fourth verse: akhadha'l-alwāḥ. This is an explanation, not a ruling.

لَا تُشْمِتْ بِىَ ٱلْأَعْدَآءَ — the root ش-م-ت: to rejoice at the ill that befalls another. The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān. This is a countable datum.

And Aaron's last sentence must be recorded: wa lā tajʿalnī maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn. This sentence had occurred word for word in the forty-seventh verse of the sūrain the mouth of the people of al-Aʿrāf: rabbanā lā tajʿalnā maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn.

VerseWho says itTo whom
47The people of al-AʿrāfTo the Lord
150AaronTo Moses

The same sentence, two different addressees. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra, and it is added to the repetitions counted in the section on the structure.

7/151 — the scope of the prayer

Qāla rabbi'ghfir lī wa li-akhī wa adkhilnā fī raḥmatik, wa anta arḥamu'r-rāḥimīn

A point of word order must be recorded: the prayer begins with himself. Ighfir wa li-akhī — first himself, then his brother.

I record this as an observation about word order and build no ruling on it: the order of the sentence is read from the text; its reason is not stated in the text.

And the verse-ending must be recorded: arḥamu'r-rāḥimīn — in the section on the structure of the sūra it was named as one of the short closings scattered among the long verses. The same expression will come once more at 7/155, in the form khayru'l-ghāfirīn, together with its fellow.


7/152-154

إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ ٱتَّخَذُوا۟ ٱلْعِجْلَ سَيَنَالُهُمْ غَضَبٌ مِّن رَّبِّهِمْ وَذِلَّةٌ فِى ٱلْحَيَوٰةِ ٱلدُّنْيَا وَكَذَٰلِكَ نَجْزِى ٱلْمُفْتَرِينَ

Inna'lladhīna'ttakhadhu'l-ʿijla sa-yanāluhum ghaḍabun min rabbihim wa dhillatun fi'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā, wa kadhālika najzi'l-muftarīn · Wa'lladhīna ʿamilu's-sayyiʾāti thumma tābū min baʿdihā wa āmanū inna rabbaka min baʿdihā la-ghafūrun raḥīm · Wa lammā sakata ʿan Mūsa'l-ghaḍabu akhadha'l-alwāḥ, wa fī nuskhatihā hudan wa raḥmatun lilladhīna hum li-rabbihim yarhabūn

"Those who took the calf: anger from their Lord and abasement in the life of this world will reach them. Thus do We recompense those who invent falsehood. · And as for those who do evil deeds and then repent afterwards and believe: your Lord, after that, is indeed forgiving and merciful. · And when the anger fell silent in Moses he took up the tablets. In their writing there was guidance and mercy for those who stand in awe of their Lord."

The punishment and the door set side by side

A point of word order must be recorded, and this is one of the most striking sequences in the sūra: the hundred and fifty-second verse announces a punishment, and the hundred and fifty-third opens a door immediately after it.

VerseWhat is stated
152Sa-yanāluhum ghaḍabun … wa dhillatunpunishment
153Thumma tābū … wa āmanū … la-ghafūrun raḥīmthe possibility of return

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the order of the two verses: the sūra does not close the door after announcing the punishment. And the same structure was present in the second block of the sūra too: Adam broke the prohibition (22), then confessed (23), and the prayer was received.

And the sequence in the hundred and fifty-third verse must be recorded, and it is in three steps:

StepVerb
1ʿAmilu's-sayyiʾātit was done
2Thumma tābūthere was a turning back
3Wa āmanūthere was belief

And the particle thumma comes before the second step: the interval between them is stated.

سَكَتَ عَن مُّوسَى ٱلْغَضَبُ — a choice of word order

The construction of the hundred and fifty-fourth verse is a place the lexicographers particularly dwell on, and it must be recorded.

The root س-ك-ت: to fall silent, to stop speaking.

It could have been built thusWhat is built
Wa lammā sakana ghaḍabu Mūsā — when his anger subsidedWa lammā sakata ʿan Mūsa'l-ghaḍab"the anger fell silent in Moses"

There are two differences at once, and both are read from the text:

One — the verb used is not "to subside" but "to fall silent". That is, the anger is told of as something that speaks.

Two — the subject of the sentence is al-ghaḍab, not Moses. And the preposition is ʿan (from): the anger departs from Moses.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the choice of verb and the preposition: the sentence pictures anger not as a state belonging to the person but as something that comes and goes. And the lexicographers explain this construction as istiʿāra (a borrowed expression); I convey this explanation as transmitted.

نُسْخَة — the root ن-س-خ: to put one thing in the place of another; and to transfer a text from one place to another (istinsākh). The word here means "what is written".

And the last sentence of the verse must be recorded: the guidance and the mercy are lilladhīna hum li-rabbihim yarhabūn — "for those who stand in awe of their Lord".

The root ر-ه-ب had occurred in the hundred and sixteenth verse: wa'starhabūhum — the sorcerers had struck fear into the people. The same root, two different fears. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.


7/155-157

وَٱخْتَارَ مُوسَىٰ قَوْمَهُۥ سَبْعِينَ رَجُلًا لِّمِيقَٰتِنَا فَلَمَّآ أَخَذَتْهُمُ ٱلرَّجْفَةُ قَالَ رَبِّ لَوْ شِئْتَ أَهْلَكْتَهُم مِّن قَبْلُ وَإِيَّٰىَ

Wa'khtāra Mūsā qawmahū sabʿīna rajulan li-mīqātinā, fa-lammā akhadhathumu'r-rajfatu qāla rabbi law shiʾta ahlaktahum min qablu wa iyyāya, a-tuhlikunā bimā faʿala's-sufahāʾu minnā, in hiya illā fitnatuk, tuḍillu bihā man tashāʾu wa tahdī man tashāʾ, anta waliyyunā fa'ghfir lanā wa'rḥamnā wa anta khayru'l-ghāfirīn · Wa'ktub lanā fī hādhihi'd-dunyā ḥasanatan wa fi'l-ākhirati innā hudnā ilayk, qāla ʿadhābī uṣību bihī man ashāʾu wa raḥmatī wasiʿat kulla shayʾ

"Moses chose seventy men of his people for the time We appointed. When the quaking seized them he said: 'My Lord! Had You willed, You could have destroyed them before, and me with them. Will You destroy us for what the foolish among us have done? This is nothing but Your test. By it You lead astray whom You will and guide whom You will. You are our guardian; forgive us and have mercy on us. You are the best of forgivers. · And write for us good in this world and in the hereafter. We have turned to You.' He said: 'My punishment — I visit it upon whom I will; and My mercy has embraced everything.'"

أَتُهْلِكُنَا بِمَا فَعَلَ ٱلسُّفَهَآءُ مِنَّا — the construction of the question

This sentence is a place that must be recorded for the sūra's understanding of responsibility.

And a point of word order must be recorded: the sentence has the qualification minnā ("among us"). That is, the guilty are not cast out; it says "among us".

And the word sufahāʾ had occurred in the sixty-sixth verse — there it was the word of the objection put to Hūd (innā la-narāka fī safāhatin). The same root, two different directions: one an accusation thrown at a messenger, the other a diagnosis accepted for one's own community. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

إِنْ هِىَ إِلَّا فِتْنَتُكَ — and a limit in kalām

The sentence is built with the pattern in … illā: the event is reduced to one thing — fitna (a test).

The root ف-ت-ن: to put gold into the fire to learn its purity. This concrete sense of the root was treated at 20/40 in Ṭāhā; I rely on that treatment.

And the continuation of the sentence — tuḍillu bihā man tashāʾu wa tahdī man tashāʾ — opens onto a field of kalām debate. Per the method (Method) I do not enter that debate and take no side.

I record the things that can be verified from the text:

#Datum of the text
1The sentence occurs within a prayer, not as the announcement of a ruling
2A request follows it immediately: fa'ghfir lanā wa'rḥamnā — that is, the speaker does not use the sentence as a statement of helplessness
3And the answer is one of the widest sentences in the sūra: wa raḥmatī wasiʿat kulla shayʾ

And the note kept consistently in this field throughout the index holds here too: the expression "whom He wills", if read in the sense of arbitrariness, contradicts the Qurʾān's own language — because the same text describes again and again where mercy and guidance are directed. This note was entered in al-Baqara; I rely on it and do not open the discussion here.

وَرَحْمَتِى وَسِعَتْ كُلَّ شَىْءٍ — the asymmetry of the two sentences

The answer in the hundred and fifty-sixth verse is two sentences, and there is a difference of word order between them. This difference is read from the text:

SentenceQualificationScope
ʿAdhābī uṣību bihī man ashāʾQualified — a note of willDeterminate
Wa raḥmatī wasiʿat kulla shayʾUnqualifiedKulla shayʾeverything

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the construction of the two sentences: in the first there is a restriction, in the second there is none.

And the same expression had occurred at 40/7 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin), in the prayer of those who bear the Throne: rabbanā wasiʿta kulla shayʾin raḥmatan wa ʿilmā. It was recorded there: the order puts mercy before knowledge. I rely on that treatment.

The difference between the two verses must be recorded: in Ghāfir the sentence is a prayer (servants speak it); in al-Aʿrāf it is an answer.

هُدْنَآ إِلَيْكَ

The root ه-و-د: to turn gently, to incline; and to repent. Hudnā ilayk — "we have turned to You".

This root was treated at 2/62 in al-Baqara, where it was recorded: the Qurʾān uses this root in verbal form, and it occurs at al-Aʿrāf 7/156 in the sense of repentance. I rely on that treatment.

And this is a datum to be recorded for the analysis of the word; no ruling about a community is to be drawn from it (Method).

7/157 — the series of attributes

Alladhīna yattabiʿūna'r-rasūla'n-nabiyya'l-ummiyya'lladhī yajidūnahū maktūban ʿindahum fi't-Tawrāti wa'l-Injīli yaʾmuruhum bi'l-maʿrūfi wa yanhāhum ʿani'l-munkari wa yuḥillu lahumu'ṭ-ṭayyibāti wa yuḥarrimu ʿalayhimu'l-khabāʾitha wa yaḍaʿu ʿanhum iṣrahum wa'l-aghlāla'llatī kānat ʿalayhim…

The verse counts a series of attributes, and the structure of the series must be recorded: five verbs, two opposed pairs and one single.

#VerbIts opposite
1Yaʾmuruhum bi'l-maʿrūf2
2Wa yanhāhum ʿani'l-munkar1
3Wa yuḥillu lahumu'ṭ-ṭayyibāt4
4Wa yuḥarrimu ʿalayhimu'l-khabāʾith3
5Wa yaḍaʿu ʿanhum iṣrahum wa'l-aghlāl(single)

Four verbs in pairs, the fifth alone. This is a structure that can be read from the text.

ٱلْمَعْرُوف and ٱلطَّيِّب — links within the sūra

And two words connect with other places in the sūra. These links are countable:

WordRootWhere in the sūra
Al-maʿrūfع-ر-فThe name of the sūra (al-aʿrāf, 46-48) and 199: wa'mur bi'l-ʿurf
Al-ṭayyibāt / al-khabāʾithط-ي-ب / خ-ب-ث58: al-baladu'ṭ-ṭayyib / wa'lladhī khabutha · 32: al-ṭayyibāti mina'r-rizq

That is, the hundred and fifty-seventh verse uses together the root of the sūra's name and the words of the two soils in the fifty-eighth verse. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.

إِصْر and أَغْلَال

The root إ-ص-ر: the tie that holds a thing in place, a weight; and from this, a burden. The lexicographers tie the root to the picture of the rope by which a tent is fastened to the ground.

The root غ-ل-ل: the ring or chain put on the neck or the hand. Aghlāl — the plural of ghull.

The root ي-ض-ع: to put down, to lower; and from this, to set a load down on the ground.

And the choice of the verb is worth recording: yaḍaʿu — "he sets down, he puts off". Not to break or to snap; to set down on the ground.

I give this as a note about the word, and its ground is the concrete sense of the root.

And I build no legal ruling from this verse and do not name which burden is meant; the Qurʾān here describes an attribute and goes into no detail (Method).


7/158

قُلْ يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّاسُ إِنِّى رَسُولُ ٱللَّهِ إِلَيْكُمْ جَمِيعًا

Qul yā ayyuha'n-nāsu innī rasūlu'llāhi ilaykum jamīʿan, alladhī lahū mulku's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ, lā ilāha illā huwa yuḥyī wa yumīt, fa-āminū bi'llāhi wa rasūlihi'n-nabiyyi'l-ummiyyi'lladhī yuʾminu bi'llāhi wa kalimātihī wa'ttabiʿūhu laʿallakum tahtadūn

"Say: 'O people! I am the messenger of God to you all — of Him to whom belongs the dominion of the heavens and the earth. There is no god but He; He gives life and gives death. So believe in God and in His messenger, the unlettered prophet who believes in God and in His words, and follow him, that you may be guided.'"

The place of the verse in the block

A point of word order must be recorded, and this is the sharpest transition in the Moses block: up to the end of the hundred and fifty-seventh verse the telling was in the third person; the hundred and fifty-eighth passes with a command qul (say) directly into address.

And the scope of the address must be recorded: yā ayyuha'n-nās and ilaykum jamīʿā.

Earlier addresses in the sūraScope
Yā banī Ādam (26, 27, 31, 35)The human race
Yā qawmi (59, 65, 73, 85, 79, 93)A particular people
158: Yā ayyuha'n-nāsu … ilaykum jamīʿāEveryone, without distinction

And the word jamīʿan reinforces this qualification further. This is a datum that can be read from the text.

And that this verse is set inside the Moses block is worth recording. I give this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the place of the verse and the sentence before it: the hundred and fifty-seventh verse was speaking of a group within a community; the hundred and fifty-eighth opens the addressee out to all people. That is, the sūra passes from a narrow ring to a wide one, and does so in the middle of a story.

ٱلنَّبِىِّ ٱلْأُمِّىِّ

This phrase occurs twice, in the hundred and fifty-seventh and hundred and fifty-eighth verses.

The root أ-م-م: mother; and from this, origin, source, community (umma).

The exegetes disagree about what the word means in this phrase, and I give the disagreement in a table:

ReadingWhat ummī meansGround
1One who cannot read or writeThe tying of the root to the sense "remaining in the state in which he was born"; and al-ʿAnkabūt 29/48, wa mā kunta tatlū min qablihī min kitābin wa lā takhuṭṭuhū bi-yamīnik
2One belonging to a community to which no Book had come beforeThe use of the word ummiyyīn in the Qurʾān for those who are not people of a Book (Āl ʿImrān 3/20, 3/75)
3One of the people of Mecca — with reference to the phrase Ummu'l-qurā (al-Anʿām 6/92)That the name of the city is from the same root

All three explanations are transmitted; they do not exclude one another. I do not impose a preference.

يُؤْمِنُ بِٱللَّهِ وَكَلِمَٰتِهِۦ

A point of word order must be recorded: the messenger who is to be followed is described as himself one who believes.

I record this as an observation, and its ground is the relative clause: the sentence does not put the messenger in a position apart from the addressee; the same act (belief) is ascribed to him too.

And this connects with the objection in the sixty-third and sixty-ninth verses of the sūra: there it was thought strange that what came should come through rajulun minkum (a man from among yourselves). The hundred and fifty-eighth verse describes the messenger in exactly that position.


7/159-162

وَمِن قَوْمِ مُوسَىٰٓ أُمَّةٌ يَهْدُونَ بِٱلْحَقِّ وَبِهِۦ يَعْدِلُونَ

Wa min qawmi Mūsā ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn · Wa qaṭṭaʿnāhumu'thnatay ʿashrata asbāṭan umamā, wa awḥaynā ilā Mūsā idhi'stasqāhu qawmuhū ani'ḍrib bi-ʿaṣāka'l-ḥajar, fa'nbajasat minhu'thnatā ʿashrata ʿaynā, qad ʿalima kullu unāsin mashrabahum, wa ẓallalnā ʿalayhimu'l-ghamāma wa anzalnā ʿalayhimu'l-manna wa's-salwā, kulū min ṭayyibāti mā razaqnākum, wa mā ẓalamūnā wa lākin kānū anfusahum yaẓlimūn

"And among the people of Moses there is a community who guide by the truth and by it do justice. · We divided them into twelve tribes, as communities. When his people asked him for water We revealed to Moses: 'Strike the rock with your staff.' Twelve springs gushed out from it. Each group knew its own drinking place. We shaded them with the cloud and sent down upon them the manna and the quails: 'Eat of the good things We have provided you.' They did not wrong Us; they were wronging themselves."

أُمَّةٌ يَهْدُونَ بِٱلْحَقِّ — the sūra's dividing sentence

This sentence occurs twice in the sūra, in word-for-word identical form, and it was counted in the section on the structure. Here it is treated:

VerseOf whom
159Wa min qawmi Mūsā ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn
181Wa mimman khalaqnā ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn

The only difference is in the set to which the sentence is attached: one a particular people, the other all created beings.

I record this as an observation, and its ground is the two verses themselves: the sūra builds the same sentence first for a narrow set and then for the widest.

And the particle min must be recorded: wa min qawmi Mūsā — "some of his people". The sentence does not take in the whole; it separates out a part.

And this is the support that comes from within the text for the principle of Method that "no blanket judgement is issued". The sūra will do the same thing once more in the hundred and sixty-eighth verse: minhumu'ṣ-ṣāliḥūna wa minhum dūna dhālik.

ٱثْنَتَىْ عَشْرَةَ — the number repeated in two places

A point of word order must be recorded: the same number occurs twice in one verse, and it belongs to two different things.

WhatExpression
The tribesQaṭṭaʿnāhumu'thnatay ʿashrata asbāṭan umamā
The springsFa'nbajasat minhu'thnatā ʿashrata ʿaynā

And the link of the sentence must be recorded: qad ʿalima kullu unāsin mashrabahum — "each group knew its own drinking place". That is, the equality of the two numbers has a consequence: there is no confusion.

The same event was treated at 2/60 in al-Baqara (fa'nfajarat minhu'thnatā ʿashrata ʿaynā), and there al-Baqara's word was infajarat. In al-Aʿrāf it is inbajasat.

The difference between the two roots must be recorded, and it can be verified from the two texts:

SūraVerbRootThe sense the lexicographers give
al-Baqara 2/60Infajaratف-ج-رTo burst open and flow abundantly — a wide issue
al-Aʿrāf 7/160Inbajasatب-ج-سTo split and seep, to begin to come out — the first issue

The lexicographers record that these two verbs can be read in sequence: first the seeping, then the abundant flow. I convey this explanation as transmitted and claim no certainty. The difference of root, however, is a datum that can be verified from the text.

قَطَّعْنَا — the root ق-ط-ع, Form II: it states multiplicity — to divide piece by piece. And the same verb will occur once more in the same sūra, at the hundred and sixty-eighth verse: wa qaṭṭaʿnāhum fi'l-arḍi umamā.

VerseInto what it is dividedWhere
160Ithnatay ʿashrata asbāṭan umamātwelve tribes(no place stated)
168UmamācommunitiesFi'l-arḍon the earth

The same verb, two different divisions. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the verb of the two verses.

7/161-162 — حِطَّة and the word that was changed

Wa idh qīla lahumu'skunū hādhihi'l-qaryata wa kulū minhā ḥaythu shiʾtum wa qūlū ḥiṭṭatun wa'dkhulu'l-bāba sujjadā naghfir lakum khaṭīʾātikum, sa-nazīdu'l-muḥsinīn · Fa-baddala'lladhīna ẓalamū minhum qawlan ghayra'lladhī qīla lahum fa-arsalnā ʿalayhim rijzan mina's-samāʾi bimā kānū yaẓlimūn

These two verses were treated at 2/58-59 in al-Baqara, and I rely on that treatment. A summary of what was recorded there: another word was put in the place of the word that had been given; the form is preserved, the function emptied out. I do not repeat it.

What belongs here is the difference of word order between the two sūras, and it can be verified from the two texts:

al-Baqara 2/58-59al-Aʿrāf 7/161-162
The order of the commandsUdkhulū … wa'dkhulu'l-bāba sujjadā wa qūlū ḥiṭṭatunUskunū … wa qūlū ḥiṭṭatun wa'dkhulu'l-bāba sujjadā
The verb of forgivenessNaghfir lakum khaṭāyākumNaghfir lakum khaṭīʾātikum
To whom it belongs(unqualified)Alladhīna ẓalamū minhum"those of them who did wrong"

The third row must particularly be recorded: al-Aʿrāf separates out those who changed the word with the qualification minhum ("of them"). In the sentence in al-Baqara this qualification is absent.

I record this as an observation, and its ground is the words of the two verses: al-Aʿrāf, in telling the same event, enters a note of divisionand this lies on the same line as the notes of division in the hundred and fifty-ninth and hundred and sixty-eighth verses.

رِجْز — the root ر-ج-ز: to tremble, to be shaken; and from this, punishment, filth. The word had occurred twice earlier in the sūra (134, 135: wa lammā waqaʿa ʿalayhimu'r-rijz). There of the people of Pharaoh, here of this community. The same word, two different addressees. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.


7/163-166

وَسْـَٔلْهُمْ عَنِ ٱلْقَرْيَةِ ٱلَّتِى كَانَتْ حَاضِرَةَ ٱلْبَحْرِ إِذْ يَعْدُونَ فِى ٱلسَّبْتِ

Wa'salhum ʿani'l-qaryati'llatī kānat ḥāḍirata'l-baḥri idh yaʿdūna fi's-sabti idh taʾtīhim ḥītānuhum yawma sabtihim shurraʿan wa yawma lā yasbitūna lā taʾtīhim, kadhālika nablūhum bimā kānū yafsuqūn · Wa idh qālat ummatun minhum lima taʿiẓūna qawman Allāhu muhlikuhum aw muʿadhdhibuhum ʿadhāban shadīdā, qālū maʿdhiratan ilā rabbikum wa laʿallahum yattaqūn · Fa-lammā nasū mā dhukkirū bihī anjayna'lladhīna yanhawna ʿani's-sūʾi wa akhadhna'lladhīna ẓalamū bi-ʿadhābin baʾīsin bimā kānū yafsuqūn · Fa-lammā ʿataw ʿan mā nuhū ʿanhu qulnā lahum kūnū qiradatan khāsiʾīn

"Ask them about the town by the sea: how they broke the Sabbath. Their fish came to them in shoals on the day of their Sabbath, and on the days when they did not keep the Sabbath they did not come. So We were testing them for their transgressing. · When a company among them said, 'Why do you admonish a people whom God is going to destroy or to punish with a severe punishment?', they said: 'As a plea before your Lord, and that they may perhaps guard themselves.' · When they forgot what they had been reminded of, We delivered those who forbade evil, and seized those who did wrong with a grievous punishment for their transgressing. · And when they exceeded the bound in what they had been forbidden, We said to them: 'Be apes, driven away.'"

The note I rely on

This event was treated at 2/63-66 in al-Baqara, and I rely on that treatment. A summary of what was recorded there:

"The solution that is transmitted is this: on the Sabbath nets and pools are made ready, the fish go into them, and on Sunday they are gathered. On the Sabbath there was no fishing — technically." "The wording of the prohibition given is preserved while its purpose is cancelled. The prohibition appears to have been kept; the prohibition does not work." "The Qurʾān marks this behaviour in three separate places with three different examples — which means that it is not a single event but a kind that is being described."

I do not repeat it. And the limit recorded at 16/124 in al-Naḥl also holds: the Qurʾān touches on this matter in several places (al-Baqara 2/65, al-Aʿrāf 7/163, al-Nisāʾ 4/154) and goes into no detail. I rely on that treatment.

What al-Aʿrāf adds — three groups

Al-Aʿrāf gives a piece of information al-Baqara does not, and this is a difference that can be verified from the two texts: in the event there are three groups, not two.

GroupVerseWhat it doesIts end
1163Yaʿdūna fi's-sabtthose who broke the prohibitionAkhadhna'lladhīna ẓalamū (165)
2165Yanhawna ʿani's-sūʾthose who forbade evilAnjaynā (165) — they were delivered
3164Lima taʿiẓūna qawman…those who found admonition needlessThe text does not say

The outcome of the third group is not stated in the verse. This is a gap that can be verified from the text, and it has been much debated in the classical commentaries.

I give the disagreement in a table and impose no preference:

ViewWhat became of the third groupGround
1They are included among the delivered — they did not break the prohibitionOnly two groups are named in verse 165: anjaynā and akhadhnā; the third group is not counted among those who broke the prohibition
2They are included among those seized — they chose silenceIn verse 165 those delivered are named alladhīna yanhawna ʿani's-sūʾ; the third group does not fall under that description
3The text is deliberately silent — the outcome is not statedThat the verse counts two groups and does not include the third in the count

This disagreement is transmitted from the earliest period, and no preference is made in this commentary.

The ground of the admonition

And the answer of the second group must be recorded, and it is one of the most concrete sentences in the sūra:

*Qālū maʿdhiratan ilā rabbikum wa laʿallahum yattaqūn

Two grounds are counted, and the two look in different directions:

#GroundWhat it looks to
1Maʿdhiratan ilā rabbikumThe one who admonishes — his own account
2Wa laʿallahum yattaqūnThe one addressed — the possibility of a result

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the order of the two grounds: the first ground remains valid even if the result does not come about. That is, admonition is given as an obligation not contingent on the result. And this is the answer to the objection itself: the objection was saying "they are going to be destroyed anyway".

م-ع-ذ-ر — the root ع-ذ-ر: to remove a fault, to offer an excuse. Maʿdhira means "the setting out of an excuse".

كُونُوا۟ قِرَدَةً خَٰسِـِٔينَ — likeness or reality

The disagreement about this expression was tabulated at 2/65 in al-Baqara, and I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there will not be repeated; I content myself with carrying the disagreement over here and tabulating it with its grounds:

ViewWhat is understoodGroundIts difficulty
1A real transformationThe plain sense of the expression; that the command kūnū states a becoming; that it is the view of the majorityThe text does not give the detail of the process
2A likeness — the becoming ape-like of hearts and conduct, falling into imitation and cunningThe frequency of such expression in Arabic; and that it was voiced in the early period tooThat the plain sense of the command kūnū states a becoming

Both views are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And the finding recorded at 2/65 in al-Baqara, which holds independently of the two views, holds here too; I rely on it: the animal chosen is not accidental. The ape is the animal that imitates — it copies the appearance and does not understand the function. And that is exactly what was done: the appearance of the prohibition was preserved, its meaning imitated. The punishment is named in the language of the offence itself.

The one new thing that belongs here is the pattern of the verb in al-Aʿrāf, and it is a datum of word order:

PlaceExpression
al-Baqara 2/65Fa-qulnā lahum kūnū qiradatan khāsiʾīn
al-Aʿrāf 7/166Fa-lammā ʿataw ʿan mā nuhū ʿanhu qulnā lahum kūnū qiradatan khāsiʾīn

Al-Aʿrāf adds a conditional clause at the head of the same sentence: fa-lammā ʿataw ʿan mā nuhū ʿanh — "when they exceeded the bound in what they had been forbidden". In al-Baqara this qualification is absent.

The root ع-ت-و had occurred in the seventy-seventh verse (wa ʿataw ʿan amri rabbihim — Thamūd). The same root, two different communities. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

خَٰسِـِٔين — the root خ-س-أ: to be driven off, to be sent away; the lexicographers tie the root to the sound used to shoo an animal away. It was treated at 2/65 in al-Baqara.


7/167-171

وَإِذْ تَأَذَّنَ رَبُّكَ لَيَبْعَثَنَّ عَلَيْهِمْ إِلَىٰ يَوْمِ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ مَن يَسُومُهُمْ سُوٓءَ ٱلْعَذَابِ

Wa idh taʾadhdhana rabbuka la-yabʿathanna ʿalayhim ilā yawmi'l-qiyāmati man yasūmuhum sūʾa'l-ʿadhāb, inna rabbaka la-sarīʿu'l-ʿiqāb wa innahū la-ghafūrun raḥīm · Wa qaṭṭaʿnāhum fi'l-arḍi umamā, minhumu'ṣ-ṣāliḥūna wa minhum dūna dhālik, wa balawnāhum bi'l-ḥasanāti wa's-sayyiʾāti laʿallahum yarjiʿūn

"Remember when your Lord announced that He would surely send against them, until the Day of Resurrection, those who would inflict on them the worst of punishment. Your Lord is swift in retribution; and He is forgiving and merciful. · We divided them into communities on the earth. Among them are the righteous, and among them are others than that. We tested them with good things and with ill, that they might return."

A limit in reading this verse, per the method (Method)

This verse has throughout history been made the ground for a great many political and social claims. No such use is made of it in this commentary, and I write that plainly (Method).

The text itself enters a note of division, and that note of division is the verse's own sentence:

Minhumu'ṣ-ṣāliḥūna wa minhum dūna dhālik — "among them are the righteous, and among them are others than that."

That is, the verse itself does not allow a blanket judgement to be built about a community. And this note lies on the same line as the note in the hundred and fifty-ninth verse (wa min qawmi Mūsā ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqq).

Within the sūra this note of division occurs three times, and it is a countable datum:

VerseNote of division
159Wa min qawmi Mūsā ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqq
162Fa-baddala'lladhīna ẓalamū minhum
168Minhumu'ṣ-ṣāliḥūna wa minhum dūna dhālik

I record this as an observation, and its ground is the particles of the three verses (min, minhum). The sūra divides three times within the same block.

تَأَذَّنَ

The root أ-ذ-ن: ear; and from this, to hear, to give leave, to proclaim. Form V (taʾadhdhana) here has the sense of a decisive announcement: "to proclaim something upon oneself".

And the verb had occurred once more in the sūra, in the forty-fourth verse: fa-adhdhana muʾadhdhinun baynahum. The same root, one a proclamation in the scene of the hereafter, the other an announcement here.

Two attributes standing side by side

The end of the verse must be recorded, and this is a point of word order:

Inna rabbaka la-sarīʿu'l-ʿiqāb wa innahū la-ghafūrun raḥīm

Two statements side by side, and in opposite directions.

And the difference in the construction of the two sentences must be recorded:

SentenceConstruction
La-sarīʿu'l-ʿiqābInna rabbaka"your Lord"
La-ghafūrun raḥīmWa innahūwith a fresh inna, a separate sentence

The second attribute is given not by being coordinated with the first but in a self-standing sentence. I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the presence of the second inna.

بَلَوْنَٰهُم بِٱلْحَسَنَٰتِ وَٱلسَّيِّـَٔاتِ — the third note in the sūra

The sūra builds the two-directional test in three separate places. This is a countable datum:

VerseWho is testedHow
94-95Every land to which a messenger was sentBaʾsāʾ wa ḍarrāʾbaddalnā makāna's-sayyiʾati'l-ḥasanata
130-131The people of PharaohSinīn wa naqṣjāʾathumu'l-ḥasana
168This communityBi'l-ḥasanāti wa's-sayyiʾāt

In all three the same structure: good and ill together are counted as a test. And in all three the purpose of the test is stated with the same kind of verb: laʿallahum yadhdhakkarūn (130), laʿallahum yarjiʿūn (168).

I record this as an observation, and its ground is the words of the three verses.

7/169 — عَرَض هَٰذَا ٱلْأَدْنَىٰ

Fa-khalafa min baʿdihim khalfun warithu'l-kitāba yaʾkhudhūna ʿaraḍa hādha'l-adnā wa yaqūlūna sa-yughfaru lanā, wa in yaʾtihim ʿaraḍun mithluhū yaʾkhudhūh, a-lam yuʾkhadh ʿalayhim mīthāqu'l-kitābi an lā yaqūlū ʿala'llāhi illa'l-ḥaqqa wa darasū mā fīh "After them came a generation who inherited the Book. They take the goods of this lower world and say, 'We shall be forgiven.' And if the like of those goods comes to them again, they take it too. Was the covenant of the Book not taken from them, that they should say nothing about God but the truth? And they had studied what is in it."

This verse is the place that prepares the passage into the eighth block of the sūra, and it carries three things to be recorded.

One — the word khalf. The root خ-ل-ف: to come behind. The lexicographers record a distinction between khalf (with fatḥa) and khalaf: khalaf is generally used of a good successor, khalf of a bad one. This distinction is not certain and does not hold everywhere; I convey it as transmitted.

And the same root had occurred twice more in the sūra: jaʿalakum khulafāʾa (69, 74) — there in a positive sense. The same root, two different directions.

Two — ʿaraḍa hādha'l-adnā.

The root ع-ر-ض: breadth; and from this, what comes past from one side. ʿAraḍ is what does not last, what is passing. And the lexicographers use the word as the opposite of jawhar (what abides).

The root أ-د-ن-و: nearness; and from this, lowness, baseness. Adnā means both "nearest" and "lowest"; and the word dunyā is from the same root.

That is, the phrase states transience twice over: ʿaraḍ (what passes by) and adnā (what is near, what stays low).

I give this as a note about the words, and its ground is the concrete senses of the two roots.

Three — the sentence sa-yughfaru lanā.

A point of word order must be recorded: the verb is passive and in the future. It is not said who will forgive; forgiveness is voiced as an expectation.

And the verse sets beside this expectation a note of persistence: wa in yaʾtihim ʿaraḍun mithluhū yaʾkhudhūh — "if it comes again they take it again".

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the two sentences standing side by side: the verse names in the same place the expectation of forgiveness and the continuation of the behaviour. And then a question comes: a-lam yuʾkhadh ʿalayhim mīthāqu'l-kitāb.

And this question is the door of the eighth block of the sūra: in the hundred and seventy-second verse a far older covenant will be told.

And the verb darasū must be recorded: the root د-ر-س — to read a text over and over and to work on it; and for a trace to be effaced and vanish. The root has two branches, and both are transmitted.

I record this as an observation: the verse does not leave ignorance as a ground — it says wa darasū mā fīh. The knowledge was there.

7/170-171 — those who hold the Book, and the mountain

Wa'lladhīna yumassikūna bi'l-kitābi wa aqāmu'ṣ-ṣalāta innā lā nuḍīʿu ajra'l-muṣliḥīn · Wa idh nataqna'l-jabala fawqahum ka-annahū ẓullatun wa ẓannū annahū wāqiʿun bihim, khudhū mā ātaynākum bi-quwwatin wa'dhkurū mā fīhi laʿallakum tattaqūn

The hundred and seventieth verse is set against the hundred and sixty-ninth, and the contrast is in the verb:

VerseVerbObject
169Yaʾkhudhūnathey takeʿAraḍa hādha'l-adnāpassing goods
170Yumassikūnathey hold fastBi'l-kitāb

The root م-س-ك: to hold, to keep in hand. Form II (tamassuk) here states a firm grip; and a variant reading is transmitted: yumsikūna (Form IV). The difference in sense is slight.

I record this as an observation about word order: the two verses use two verbs from the same field, and their objects differ.

The root ن-ت-ق: to pull a thing from its place and lift it with a shaking. The lexicographers tie the word to the picture of a sack being shaken out.

ظُلَّة — the root ظ-ل-ل: what gives shade, a canopy.

And this scene was treated at 2/63 in al-Baqara, and I rely on that treatment. What belongs here is what al-Aʿrāf adds, and this is a difference that can be verified from the two texts:

SūraExpressionWhat is added
al-Baqara 2/63Wa rafaʿnā fawqakumu'ṭ-Ṭūr
al-Aʿrāf 7/171Wa idh nataqna'l-jabala fawqahum ka-annahū ẓullatun wa ẓannū annahū wāqiʿun bihimA likeness (ẓulla) and a note of inner state (ẓannū)

Al-Aʿrāf widens the scene in respect of image and of response. I record this as an observation.

And the command is the same: khudhū mā ātaynākum bi-quwwatin. These are the same words as the command spoken to Moses in the hundred and forty-fifth verse.

VerseTo whom
145To Mosesfa-khudhhā bi-quwwatin
171To the communitykhudhū mā ātaynākum bi-quwwatin

The same command, two different addressees. And the Moses block closes with this command. In the section on the structure of the sūra, laʿallakum tattaqūn was recorded as the block's closing sentence.


7/172-174

وَإِذْ أَخَذَ رَبُّكَ مِنۢ بَنِىٓ ءَادَمَ مِن ظُهُورِهِمْ ذُرِّيَّتَهُمْ وَأَشْهَدَهُمْ عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِهِمْ أَلَسْتُ بِرَبِّكُمْ قَالُوا۟ بَلَىٰ شَهِدْنَآ

Wa idh akhadha rabbuka min banī Ādama min ẓuhūrihim dhurriyyatahum wa ashhadahum ʿalā anfusihim, a-lastu bi-rabbikum, qālū balā shahidnā, an taqūlū yawma'l-qiyāmati innā kunnā ʿan hādhā ghāfilīn · Aw taqūlū innamā ashraka ābāʾunā min qablu wa kunnā dhurriyyatan min baʿdihim, a-fa-tuhlikunā bimā faʿala'l-mubṭilūn · Wa kadhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti wa laʿallahum yarjiʿūn

"Remember when your Lord took from the children of Adam — from their backs — their offspring, and made them witnesses against themselves: 'Am I not your Lord?' They said, 'Yes, we bear witness.' Lest you should say on the Day of Resurrection, 'We were unaware of this.' · Or should say, 'Our forefathers associated others with God before us, and we were a generation coming after them. Will You then destroy us for what the followers of falsehood did?' · Thus do We set out the signs in detail, that they may return."

The place of the verse in the sūra

This verse is the second of the three cornerstones recorded in the section on the structure of the sūra (11-25 Adam, 172-174 alast, 175-177 the man who slipped out of the signs). I rely on that treatment.

And the sentence immediately before the verse must be recorded: in the hundred and sixty-ninth verse a covenant was being asked abouta-lam yuʾkhadh ʿalayhim mīthāqu'l-kitāb. The hundred and seventy-second verse tells of a far older covenant, and it begins with the same verb: wa idh akhadha rabbuk.

The same root (أ-خ-ذ), two verses apart, for two different covenants. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra.

The words

ظُهُور — the root ظ-ه-ر: the back; and from this, the visible, outer face of a thing. The plural of ẓahr.

ذُرِّيَّة — the lexicographers disagree about its root: ذ-ر-أ (to scatter as one scatters seed) or ذ-ر-ر (to divide into small parts) or ذ-ر-و (to winnow). All three are transmitted; I issue no settled ruling on the root. In sense they all come to the same place: what issues from one origin and spreads.

And the root ذ-ر-أ will occur expressly in the hundred and seventy-ninth verse of the sūra: wa laqad dharaʾnā li-jahannam. This root was undone at 23/79 in al-Muʾminūn, where al-Aʿrāf 7/179 was named. I rely on that treatment.

أَشْهَدَهُمْ عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِهِمْ — the root ش-ه-د: to be present; and from this, to know by seeing, to bear witness. Form IV (ashhada) — "to call to witness".

And a point of word order must be recorded: the testimony is taken about themselvesʿalā anfusihim. That is, the person is made a witness not about another but about himself.

أَلَسْتُ بِرَبِّكُمْthe question is built on a negation: a-lastu — "am I not?" In Arabic this pattern is a question of confirmation whose answer is affirmative.

بَلَىٰand the word of the answer must be recorded: balā, not naʿam. In Arabic balā is the answer that removes the negation of a negative question. Had naʿam been said, then according to the majority of the lexicographers the negation would have been affirmed.

This is a datum of the language and must be recorded; the difference between the two words is settled in Arabic.

The disagreement — what "alast" tells

There are two great readings of this verse, and both have been voiced in the classical sources. Per the method (Method) I give the disagreement with its grounds in a table and I DO NOT IMPOSE A PREFERENCE. This is a field of kalām debate, and no side is taken here.

Reading 1 — a real addressReading 2 — a description of the fiṭra
What it saysThe scene is an event that actually took place: the offspring were brought out, the question was put, the answer was givenThe scene is a likeness telling of the manner of man's creation: the question and the answer are the putting into language of the structure man carries
Its ground from the textThat the verbs are in the perfect (akhadha, ashhada, qālū); that the particle idh states a past time; that the question and the answer are reported directlyThat the purpose of the sentence is given as an taqūlū yawma'l-qiyāmati innā kunnā ʿan hādhā ghāfilīn — that is, a closing off of an excuse; and that no human being has any such memory
Support from within the QurʾānThat the scene is given with a detailed telling; that it is nowhere characterised as a likenessal-Rūm 30/30: fiṭrata'llāhi'llatī faṭara'n-nāsa ʿalayhā — that there is a ground upon which man was created
The difficulty raised against this readingThe text does not say where or how the event took place; and the question is asked how a forgotten testimony can serve as proofReducing the speech in the sentence qālū balā shahidnā to a likeness counts as departing from the plain sense of the wording

Both readings are transmitted. I do not impose a preference, and I do not use the evidence of one side against the other.

And no report at all is transmitted about this verse in this commentary, because their soundness cannot be established. The detail the Qurʾān does not give is not invented: I write nothing about the place, the time, the manner of the scene, or who was brought out and how (Method).

The link with فِطْرَة — 30/30 in al-Rūm

The within-the-Qurʾān ground of the second reading is 30/30 in al-Rūm, and I rely on that treatment. A summary of what was recorded there:

Fiṭra is not "creation" but "the manner of creation". The word names not man's having been brought into being but the fashion upon which he was brought into being. And the verse explains this itself: allatī faṭara'n-nāsa ʿalayhā — "upon which He created mankind". The particle ʿalā — upon: it states a ground.

And the overlap between the two verses must be recorded, and it can be verified from the two texts:

al-Rūm 30/30al-Aʿrāf 7/172
What is statedA ground upon which man was createdA testimony taken from man
Particle / patternFaṭara'n-nāsa ʿalayhā — upon itAshhadahum ʿalā anfusihim — against themselves
Its permanenceLā tabdīla li-khalqi'llāhAn taqūlū yawma'l-qiyāmati innā kunnā ʿan hādhā ghāfilīn — the excuse is closed

Both verses state a ground, and in both the particle is ʿalā.

I record this as an observation, and its ground is the patterns of the two verses. This observation appears to support the second reading; but I do not present it as a preferencethose who hold the first reading also draw a link between this verse and alast, and explain the fiṭra as the trace the testimony taken has left in man. Both readings can make use of this verse.

The purpose the verse itself gives — two excuses

And independently of the debate, the purpose the verse itself states is read from the text and is not disputed. This is the main thing to be recorded:

#The excuse that is closedVerse
1We were unawareinnā kunnā ʿan hādhā ghāfilīn172
2Our forefathers did itinnamā ashraka ābāʾunā min qablu wa kunnā dhurriyyatan min baʿdihim173

The second excuse had occurred twice earlier in the sūra:

VerseExpression
28Qālū wajadnā ʿalayhā ābāʾanā wa'llāhu amaranā bihā
70Wa nadhara mā kāna yaʿbudu ābāʾunā
173Innamā ashraka ābāʾunā min qablu

Three occurrences. And the hundred and seventy-third verse carries this excuse into the scene of the hereafter and closes it there.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the word shared by the three verses (ābāʾ): the ground "our forefathers used to do it", repeated throughout the sūra, is declared invalid in advance in the hundred and seventy-third verse. And the ground is tied to the sūra's own backbone: knowledge was given, no excuse remains.

And the closing of the hundred and seventy-fourth verse must be recorded: wa kadhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti wa laʿallahum yarjiʿūn. The same verb had occurred in the thirty-second verse of the sūra too (kadhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti li-qawmin yaʿlamūn). The table at the fifty-second verse is completed here.


7/175-177

وَٱتْلُ عَلَيْهِمْ نَبَأَ ٱلَّذِىٓ ءَاتَيْنَٰهُ ءَايَٰتِنَا فَٱنسَلَخَ مِنْهَا فَأَتْبَعَهُ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ فَكَانَ مِنَ ٱلْغَاوِينَ

Wa'tlu ʿalayhim nabaʾa'lladhī ātaynāhu āyātinā fa'nsalakha minhā fa-atbaʿahu'sh-shayṭānu fa-kāna mina'l-ghāwīn · Wa law shiʾnā la-rafaʿnāhu bihā wa lākinnahū akhlada ila'l-arḍi wa'ttabaʿa hawāh, fa-mathaluhū ka-mathali'l-kalbi in taḥmil ʿalayhi yalhath aw tatrukhu yalhath, dhālika mathalu'l-qawmi'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā, fa'qṣuṣi'l-qaṣaṣa laʿallahum yatafakkarūn · Sāʾa mathalan i'l-qawmu'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā wa anfusahum kānū yaẓlimūn

"Recite to them the tidings of the man to whom We gave Our signs: he slipped out of them, and Satan took him in tow, and he became one of those who go astray. · Had We willed, We would have raised him by them; but he clung to the earth and followed his own craving. His likeness is the likeness of the dog: if you set upon it, it lolls out its tongue and pants; and if you leave it alone, it lolls out its tongue and pants. That is the likeness of the people who called Our signs lies. So tell the story — perhaps they will think. · Evil is the likeness of the people who called Our signs lies and were wronging themselves."

A limit per the method (Method) — no name is given

A great many mutually inconsistent reports and names are conveyed about this verse in the classical sources. In this commentary no name is given and no report is transmitted, because:

One — the Qurʾān gives no name. The verse says alladhī (the man); that is all.

Two — the names transmitted do not agree with one another, and their soundness cannot be established (Method).

Three — and the verse itself says that the matter does not remain particular to one man: dhālika mathalu'l-qawmi'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā"that is the likeness of the people who called Our signs lies."

That is, the verse draws a kind out of a single story. This is a datum that can be verified from the text, and the text itself states that looking for a name is unnecessary.

ٱنسَلَخَ — the concrete sense of the root

The root س-ل-خ: to separate the skin from the body, to flay. Salakha'sh-shāt — he flayed the sheep. Form VII (insalakha) is reflexive: to slip out, to come out of itself.

And the root's other use in the Qurʾān must be recorded: fa-idha'nsalakha'l-ashhuru'l-ḥurum (al-Tawba 9/5) — "when the sacred months have passed". It was treated in al-Tawba. There the passing away of time, here a man's coming out of the signs.

And the direction of the picture must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the verse:

It could have been built thusWhat is built
Fa-taraka'l-āyāt — he left the signsFa'nsalakha minhāhe slipped out of the signs

That is, the signs are pictured as something worn upon him; and the man comes out of them like a skin.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the concrete sense of the root: a skin is not a thing taken off like a garment — it belongs to the body itself. The picture the root chooses intimates that what is parted with was not something fastened on from outside.

And this connects with the second and third blocks of the sūra. This link is read from the text:

VerseVerbWhat is taken off
22Badat lahumā sawʾātuhumāThe covering went
27Yanziʿu ʿanhumā libāsahumāLibāsthe clothing is stripped off
26Wa libāsu't-taqwā dhālika khayrLibāswhat is to be worn
175Fa'nsalakha minhāThe signs — slipped off like a skin

The sūra uses the picture of putting on and taking off in four separate places. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the words of the four verses.

أَخْلَدَ إِلَى ٱلْأَرْضِ

The root خ-ل-د: permanence, remaining for ever. Form IV (akhlada) here means "to cling to a place, to incline towards it and settle there".

And the particle ilā must be recorded: the verb is tied to a direction.

I give this as a note about the word: the word comes from the root of everlastingness and describes clinging to a place that does not last. That is, a search for permanence is directed at a place that is not permanent.

And the first half of the verse must be recorded: wa law shiʾnā la-rafaʿnāhu bihā. The raising too would have been by those same signs (bihā). The same thing can both raise and pass out of the hand.

The likeness of the dog — at what point it works

This likeness is a place that must be undone with care, and it is the point most open to being misunderstood.

The sentence of the verse is this:

Fa-mathaluhū ka-mathali'l-kalbi in taḥmil ʿalayhi yalhath aw tatrukhu yalhath

The root ل-ه-ث: to loll out the tongue and pant — the breathing of a dog with its mouth open and its tongue hanging out.

And the point at which the likeness works is read from the structure of the sentence itself. This is an indisputable datum of the text:

ConditionResult
In taḥmil ʿalayhi — if you set upon itYalhath
Aw tatrukhu — if you leave itYalhath

Two opposite cases, one result.

That is, the point on which the likeness rests is not the dog itself but the fact that the condition does not change. And the structure of the verse says so: two conditional clauses are built and the apodosis of both is given with the same word.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the structure of the sentence: the likeness is not a debasement but a description of unresponsiveness. Whatever is done to the man — whether he is set upon or left alone — his behaviour does not change. And this is exactly the description of the signs becoming useless: warning and letting alone give the same result.

And this reading overlaps directly with another verse of the sūra:

VerseExpression
132Mahmā taʾtinā bihī min āyatin … fa-mā naḥnu laka bi-muʾminīn — whatever you bring
176In taḥmil ʿalayhi yalhath aw tatrukhu yalhath — whatever is done

The two verses build the same structure: whatever the input, the output does not change. This is an overlap that can be verified within the sūra.

And per the method (Method) I enter one further note, because this likeness can be used with wounding language: the verse does not turn a group of human beings into animals; it describes a manner of behaving. And the verse itself says who is described: alladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā — an attribute. Whoever carries that attribute is included in it; this is the sūra's own principle.

And a point of word order must be recorded: the likeness is made not to the man but to the casefa-mathaluhū ka-mathali'l-kalb: "his case is like the case of the dog". On both sides stands the word mathal.

This is the same choice of word order recorded at 47/12 in Muḥammad (yaʾkulūna kamā taʾkulu'l-anʿām — the likeness is made not to the person but to the act). I rely on that treatment.

فَٱقْصُصِ ٱلْقَصَصَ

And the command at the end of the verse must be recorded: fa'qṣuṣi'l-qaṣaṣa laʿallahum yatafakkarūn.

The root ق-ص-ص: to follow a trace. Qaṣaṣ is what is told by following its trace. The root had occurred in the seventh verse of the sūra (fa-la-naquṣṣanna ʿalayhim bi-ʿilm) and in the thirty-fifth as well (yaquṣṣūna ʿalaykum āyātī).

That is, in the sūra the same root is ascribed to three different subjects:

VerseWho tells
7Godfa-la-naquṣṣanna ʿalayhim bi-ʿilm
35The messengersyaquṣṣūna ʿalaykum āyātī
176The addresseefa'qṣuṣi'l-qaṣaṣ

Three links. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.


7/178-179

مَن يَهْدِ ٱللَّهُ فَهُوَ ٱلْمُهْتَدِى وَمَن يُضْلِلْ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْخَٰسِرُونَ · وَلَقَدْ ذَرَأْنَا لِجَهَنَّمَ كَثِيرًا مِّنَ ٱلْجِنِّ وَٱلْإِنسِ لَهُمْ قُلُوبٌ لَّا يَفْقَهُونَ بِهَا وَلَهُمْ أَعْيُنٌ لَّا يُبْصِرُونَ بِهَا وَلَهُمْ ءَاذَانٌ لَّا يَسْمَعُونَ بِهَآ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ كَٱلْأَنْعَٰمِ بَلْ هُمْ أَضَلُّ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْغَٰفِلُونَ

Man yahdi'llāhu fa-huwa'l-muhtadī, wa man yuḍlil fa-ulāʾika humu'l-khāsirūn · Wa laqad dharaʾnā li-jahannama kathīran mina'l-jinni wa'l-ins, lahum qulūbun lā yafqahūna bihā wa lahum aʿyunun lā yubṣirūna bihā wa lahum ādhānun lā yasmaʿūna bihā, ulāʾika ka'l-anʿāmi bal hum aḍall, ulāʾika humu'l-ghāfilūn

"Whomever God guides, he is the one guided. And whomever He leaves astray, those are the losers. · We have brought into being for Hell many of the jinn and of mankind: they have hearts with which they do not understand, and they have eyes with which they do not see, and they have ears with which they do not hear. Those are like cattle; rather, they are further astray. Those are the heedless."

ذَرَأْنَا لِجَهَنَّمَ — the function of the lām, and a limit in kalām

The root ذ-ر-أ was undone at 23/79 in al-Muʾminūn, where al-Aʿrāf 7/179 was named. I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there: the concrete sense of the root is to scatter as one scatters seed, to multiply; the lexicographers describe the root as lying somewhere between creating and spreading. I do not repeat it.

What belongs here is the function of the lām in the phrase li-jahannama, and this opens onto a debate of kalām. Per the method (Method) I take no side in the debate; I convey the two explanations in a table:

ReadingWhat the lām statesGround
1Lām al-ʿāqibathe lām of outcome: "those who will end up in Hell"That there are instances in Arabic where this lām states an outcome (fa'ltaqaṭahū ālu Firʿawna li-yakūna lahum ʿaduwwan — al-Qaṣaṣ 28/8: the purpose of the taking in was not enmity)
2Lām al-taʿlīlthe lām of purposeThat the primary function of the lām is to state purpose

Both explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference, and I do not enter the debate about the decree (Method).

I record the one thing that can be verified from the text, and that is the verse's own continuation: the verse describes these people by a series of attributes — three organs and the non-use of all three. That is, the description is made not by the name of a lineage or a group but by a failure to act.

The triad heart-eye-ear — a new link

This triad was treated in eight places in the index, and an eight-link table was drawn up at 16/78 in al-Naḥl. I rely on that treatment and widen the table from here:

PlaceSentenceThe work of the triad
al-Aḥqāf 46/26Wa jaʿalnā lahum samʿan wa abṣāran wa afʾidatan fa-mā aghnā ʿanhum…Given — of no avail
al-Jāthiya 45/23Wa khatama ʿalā samʿihī wa qalbihī wa jaʿala ʿalā baṣarihī ghishāwatanClosed — a seal and a film
Fuṣṣilat 41/20Shahida ʿalayhim samʿuhum wa abṣāruhum wa julūduhumThey bore witness — the third is the skins
al-Sajda 32/9Wa jaʿala lakum … qalīlan mā tashkurūnGiven — no thanks given
al-Muʾminūn 23/78Wa huwa'lladhī anshaʾa lakumu's-samʿa wa'l-abṣāra wa'l-afʾidaBrought into being
al-Mulk 67/23Qul huwa'lladhī anshaʾakum wa jaʿala lakum … qalīlan mā tashkurūnGiven — no thanks given
al-Isrāʾ 17/36Inna's-samʿa wa'l-baṣara wa'l-fuʾāda kullu ulāʾika kāna ʿanhu masʾūlāHeld answerable
al-Naḥl 16/78Wa jaʿala lakum … laʿallakum tashkurūnGiven — thanks hoped for
al-Aʿrāf 7/179Lahum qulūbun lā yafqahūna bihā wa lahum aʿyunun lā yubṣirūna bihā wa lahum ādhānun lā yasmaʿūna bihāPresent — not used
al-Anʿām 6/46In akhadha'llāhu samʿakum wa abṣārakum wa khatama ʿalā qulūbikumThe possibility of their being taken away

And what al-Aʿrāf adds lies at two points. Both can be verified from the text, and both set this verse apart from all the other links.

One — the order is reversed.

The other linksal-Aʿrāf 7/179
OrderSamʿabṣārafʾidafrom outside inwardQulūbaʿyunādhānfrom inside outward

At 46/26 in al-Aḥqāf the meaning of the order was recorded: it goes from outside inward — what is heard → what is seen → what is weighed within. In al-Aʿrāf this direction is reversed: the heart comes first.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the order itself: the other verses were telling of the giving of the organs, and the order of giving was from outside inward. Al-Aʿrāf tells of their not being used, and it begins the matter at the heart. That is, the lack is pictured as beginning not at the outer gates but within. This is an explanation, not a ruling.

Two — the words have changed.

OrganThe other linksal-Aʿrāf 7/179
The inwardAfʾida / fuʾād / qalbQulūb
The eyeAbṣār / baṣarAʿyun
The earSamʿ (a verbal noun, singular)Ādhān (the plural of udhun)

And the difference must be recorded: in the other verses samʿ is a verbal noun — that is, the faculty of hearing. In al-Aʿrāf it is ādhān: the organ itself.

I record this as a datum of the language: in all three places al-Aʿrāf names the organ and does not use the name of the faculty. And this accords with the work of the sentence: the verse says the organs are there (lahum — "they have") and that they do not work. What is stressed is the presence not of the faculty but of the instrument.

And the choice of the verbs must also be recorded:

OrganVerbRootWhat it states
Qulūbyafqahūnaف-ق-هTo grasp in depth — not to know superficially
Aʿyunyubṣirūnaب-ص-رTo see — different from naẓar: it states the outcome
Ādhānyasmaʿūnaس-م-عTo hear

That the root ف-ق-ه is chosen is worth recording: the root means to go down into the depth of a thing and understand it; the lexicographers point to a narrower and deeper understanding than ʿilm.

And it was recorded at 26/194 in al-Shuʿarāʾ (ʿalā qalbik) that the Qurʾān ascribes reasoning and understanding to the heart, and this very sentence was named as the example (lahum qulūbun lā yafqahūna bihā — al-Aʿrāf 7/179). I rely on that treatment.

كَٱلْأَنْعَٰمِ بَلْ هُمْ أَضَلُّ

The likeness was treated in two places in the index, and I rely on both:

PlaceSentenceWhat was recorded there
Muḥammad 47/12Yaʾkulūna kamā taʾkulu'l-anʿāmThe eating of the animal is not censured; what is described is man's contenting himself with that much alone. And the likeness is made not to the person but to the act.
al-Furqān 25/44In hum illā ka'l-anʿāmi bal hum aḍallu sabīlāThe ground of the addition bal hum aḍallu: the animal has no way from which to stray. The comparison looks to the non-use of a means that was given.

I do not repeat them and I rely on both notes.

And one thing recorded in Muḥammad carries particular weight here, and I need to repeat it, because a reading of the verse that does not wound depends on it: the Qurʾān counts anʿām (grazing livestock) as a bounty in other places, and there is a sūra named for them (al-Anʿām, 6). At al-Naḥl 16/5-8 the creation of these animals is told as a favour.

That is, the likeness is not built in order to debase the animal.

And the difference between al-Aʿrāf and al-Furqān must be recorded, and it can be verified from the two texts:

al-Furqān 25/44al-Aʿrāf 7/179
What precedesAm taḥsabu anna aktharahum yasmaʿūna aw yaʿqilūn — two verbsThree organs, three verbs — a detailed count
The likenessKa'l-anʿāmi bal hum aḍallu sabīlāKa'l-anʿāmi bal hum aḍall
DifferenceThe qualification sabīlā is presentThe qualification sabīlā is absent
Closing(it passes to the next verse)Ulāʾika humu'l-ghāfilūn

Al-Aʿrāf leaves the word aḍall unqualified and puts a closing sentence in its place: ulāʾika humu'l-ghāfilūn.

The root غ-ف-ل had occurred in the hundred and thirty-sixth verse (wa kānū ʿanhā ghāfilīn) and had been named in the hundred and seventy-second verse as an excuse (innā kunnā ʿan hādhā ghāfilīn).

And this is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as my own reading: in the hundred and seventy-second verse heedlessness was being put forward as an excuse; the hundred and seventy-ninth gives the same word as a diagnosis. There are seven verses between the two. That is, the sūra brings back, a few verses later, the name of the excuse it closed, now as an attribute. This is an explanation, not a ruling.


7/180-181

وَلِلَّهِ ٱلْأَسْمَآءُ ٱلْحُسْنَىٰ فَٱدْعُوهُ بِهَا وَذَرُوا۟ ٱلَّذِينَ يُلْحِدُونَ فِىٓ أَسْمَٰٓئِهِۦ سَيُجْزَوْنَ مَا كَانُوا۟ يَعْمَلُونَ

Wa li'llāhi'l-asmāʾu'l-ḥusnā fa'dʿūhu bihā, wa dharu'lladhīna yulḥidūna fī asmāʾih, sa-yujzawna mā kānū yaʿmalūn · Wa mimman khalaqnā ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn

"To God belong the most beautiful names; so call upon Him by them. And leave those who twist His names aside. They will be recompensed for what they used to do. · And among those We created there is a community who guide by the truth and by it do justice."

ٱلْأَسْمَآءُ ٱلْحُسْنَىٰ

The phrase was treated at 59/24 in al-Ḥashr and named again at 20/8 in Ṭāhā. I rely on those treatments. A summary of what was recorded there:

Lahū has been brought forward, and in Arabic the fronting of the predicate states ḥaṣr (restriction) — "the most beautiful names belong to Him alone". And ḥusnā is the feminine elative of aḥsan: not "beautiful names" but "the most beautiful names".

And it was counted at 20/8 in Ṭāhā: the phrase occurs in four places in the Qurʾānal-Aʿrāf 7/180, al-Isrāʾ 17/110, Ṭāhā 20/8, al-Ḥashr 59/24. This verse is one of those four.

Two things belong here.

One — al-Aʿrāf is the only one of the four occurrences that carries a command.

PlaceThe kind of sentence
al-Ḥashr 59/24A statement — the closing of the sūra
Ṭāhā 20/8A statement — the sentence closing the opening block
al-Isrāʾ 17/110A groundayyan mā tadʿū fa-lahu'l-asmāʾu'l-ḥusnā
al-Aʿrāf 7/180A commandfa'dʿūhu bihā

This is a countable datum and is read from the construction of the four verses.

Two — the relation between 17/110 in al-Isrāʾ and al-Aʿrāf 7/180 must be recorded. It was recorded in al-Isrāʾ, and I rely on that treatment:

In al-Isrāʾ a dispute is being closedayyan mā tadʿū fa-lahu'l-asmāʾu'l-ḥusnā: the verse does not equate two names, it says that both go to the same place. And the ground is kept wide: the names are not two but many.

In al-Aʿrāf, however, the same sentence does not close a dispute; it gives a command for use: fa'dʿūhu bihā — "call upon Him by them".

And the place of the command in the sūra must be recorded: the sūra had given a command to pray in the fifty-fifth and fifty-sixth verses (udʿū rabbakum taḍarruʿan wa khufyatan; wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿā). The hundred and eightieth is the third command to pray, and this time it says by what one is to pray.

VerseCommandWhat it determines
55Udʿū rabbakum taḍarruʿan wa khufyatanBearing and voice
56Wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿāThe inner state
180Fa'dʿūhu bihāBy which names

Three commands, three different determinations. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.

يُلْحِدُونَ فِىٓ أَسْمَٰٓئِهِۦ

The root ل-ح-د: to swerve to one side, to leave the straight and slide sideways. And laḥd (the niche hollowed out in the side of a grave) is from the same rootthe picture in the root: not going straight but opening out to the side.

A variant reading is transmitted: yulḥidūna (Form IV) and yalḥadūna (Form I). The difference in sense is slight.

And the particle must be recorded: the swerving takes place within the names. That is, the names are not abandoned; a slippage in the use of the names is stated.

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the particle. This connects with the seventy-first verse of the sūra: there Hūd had named what the other side held as asmāʾin sammaytumūhā antum wa ābāʾukum. The same word (asmāʾ), in two different directions: one names that are given by men, the other names that are given by God.

And the command dharū must be recorded: wa dharu'lladhīna yulḥidūna fī asmāʾih — "leave them". The command is not a command to dispute but a command to withdraw. And this lies on the same line as the command wa aʿriḍ ʿani'l-jāhilīn in the hundred and ninety-ninth verse of the sūra.

7/181 — the sūra's widening sentence

This verse is word for word identical with the hundred and fifty-ninth; the only difference is in the set to which the sentence is attached. It was tabulated in the section on the structure and treated at verse 159. I do not repeat it.

The one thing that belongs here is the verse's place in this block, and I record it as my own reading, and it is not binding; its ground is the order of the two verses: the hundred and eightieth verse names those who twist the names; the hundred and eighty-first names, immediately afterwards, a community that guides by the truth. Every time, the sūra sets a note of division beside a negative finding. And this has been done four times through the sūra (159, 162, 168, 181).


7/182-186

وَٱلَّذِينَ كَذَّبُوا۟ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَا سَنَسْتَدْرِجُهُم مِّنْ حَيْثُ لَا يَعْلَمُونَ

Wa'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā sa-nastadrijuhum min ḥaythu lā yaʿlamūn · Wa umlī lahum, inna kaydī matīn · A-wa lam yatafakkarū, mā bi-ṣāḥibihim min jinna, in huwa illā nadhīrun mubīn · A-wa lam yanẓurū fī malakūti's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍi wa mā khalaqa'llāhu min shayʾin wa an ʿasā an yakūna qadi'qtaraba ajaluhum, fa-bi-ayyi ḥadīthin baʿdahū yuʾminūn · Man yuḍlili'llāhu fa-lā hādiya lah, wa yadharuhum fī ṭughyānihim yaʿmahūn

"Those who called Our signs lies — We shall draw them on step by step from where they do not know. · I grant them respite. My devising is firm. · Have they not thought? There is no madness in their companion. He is only a plain warner. · Have they not looked into the dominion of the heavens and the earth, and into whatever God has created, and considered that their term may have drawn near? In what account after this will they believe? · Whomever God leaves astray, there is no guide for him; He leaves them in their overstepping, wandering blindly."

ٱلِٱسْتِدْرَاج — the picture in the word

The root د-ر-ج: a step, a degree; and to advance step by step. Daraja is from the same root. Form X (istadraja) — to bring someone to a place step by step, without his noticing.

And the qualification set beside the word must be recorded: min ḥaythu lā yaʿlamūn — "from where they do not know".

I give this as a note about the word, and its ground is the concrete sense of the root: the word builds the picture not of a sudden seizure but of an unnoticed approach. And this accords with the ninety-fifth verse of the sūra: there abundance had been given, and then they were seized suddenly.

وَأُمْلِى لَهُمْ — the root م-ل-و/م-ل-ي: to lengthen a span, to grant respite. Malā — a long time.

كَيْدِى مَتِينٌ — the root م-ت-ن: the strong muscle of the back and loins; and from this, firmness, endurance.

And for the word kayd, the note of tanzīh entered for makr at the ninety-ninth verse holds here too. I do not repeat it.

مَا بِصَاحِبِهِم مِّن جِنَّةٍ — the closing of the objection

This verse closes the ring opened in the sixty-third and sixty-ninth verses of the sūra. This link is read from the text:

VerseWhoObjection / answer
63NoahA-wa ʿajibtum an jāʾakum dhikrun min rabbikum ʿalā rajulin minkum
69HūdThe same sentence
184To the addresseeA-wa lam yatafakkarū, mā bi-ṣāḥibihim min jinna

And the choice of the word must be recorded: ṣāḥibihim — "their companion".

The root ص-ح-ب: to be together, to accompany. Ṣāḥib is the one in whose company one is, the one who is known.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the word itself: the answer is given not by a lining up of proofs but by a reminder of acquaintance. The verse says "you know him". And this is the answer to the objection rajulun minkum (a man from among yourselves) in the stories: nearness is counted not as a reason for objection but as evidence.

مَلَكُوت

The root م-ل-ك: to own, to hold command. The pattern malakūt in Arabic states intensity: dominion in its widest and most encompassing form.

It was recorded at 23/88 in al-Muʾminūn: the word occurs in four places in the Qurʾān — al-Anʿām 6/75, al-Aʿrāf 7/185, al-Muʾminūn 23/88, Yā Sīn 36/83. I rely on that treatment.

And the choice of construction must be recorded: a-wa lam yanẓurū fī malakūt — the particle (into). Not "to look at" but "to look into".

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the particle.

فِى طُغْيَٰنِهِمْ يَعْمَهُونَ

The phrase was tabulated in al-Muʾminūn, where its regular occurrences in the Qurʾān were counted — al-Baqara 2/15, al-Anʿām 6/110, al-Aʿrāf 7/186, Yūnus 10/11. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it.

And in the section on the structure of the sūra this sentence was recorded as the closing sentence of the eighth block.


7/187-188

يَسْـَٔلُونَكَ عَنِ ٱلسَّاعَةِ أَيَّانَ مُرْسَىٰهَا قُلْ إِنَّمَا عِلْمُهَا عِندَ رَبِّى لَا يُجَلِّيهَا لِوَقْتِهَآ إِلَّا هُوَ

Yasʾalūnaka ʿani's-sāʿati ayyāna mursāhā, qul innamā ʿilmuhā ʿinda rabbī, lā yujallīhā li-waqtihā illā hū, thaqulat fi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ, lā taʾtīkum illā baghtatan, yasʾalūnaka ka-annaka ḥafiyyun ʿanhā, qul innamā ʿilmuhā ʿinda'llāhi wa lākinna akthara'n-nāsi lā yaʿlamūn · Qul lā amliku li-nafsī nafʿan wa lā ḍarran illā mā shāʾa'llāh, wa law kuntu aʿlamu'l-ghayba la'stakthartu mina'l-khayri wa mā massaniya's-sūʾ, in ana illā nadhīrun wa bashīrun li-qawmin yuʾminūn

"They ask you about the Hour: when will it come to anchor? Say: 'Its knowledge is with my Lord alone. Only He will bring it out at its time. It weighs heavy on the heavens and the earth. It will not come upon you but suddenly.' They ask you as though you had searched it out. Say: 'Its knowledge is with God alone; but most people do not know.' · Say: 'I hold for myself neither benefit nor harm, except what God wills. Had I known the unseen, I would have gained much good, and no ill would have touched me. I am only a warner and a bringer of good news to a people who believe.'"

مُرْسَىٰهَا — the picture in the word

The root ر-س-و: to be fixed, to settle into place. And the lexicographers use the root for a ship's dropping anchor: arsati's-safīnatu — the ship came to anchor. From the same root comes rawāsī (the firm mountains).

And at 11/41 in Hūd the same root had occurred of a ship (bismi'llāhi majrāhā wa mursāhā). I rely on that treatment.

I give this as a note about the word, and its ground is the concrete sense of the root: the question asks about the Hour not as something that "comes" but as something that drops anchor. That is, what is asked about is the moment at which the event will settle.

The limit of knowledge — the notes in the index

This verse is part of a limit kept consistently throughout the index. I rely on two places:

PlaceWhat was recorded
Luqmān 31/34Inna'llāha ʿindahū ʿilmu's-sāʿa — and five things are counted; the limit of knowledge
Fuṣṣilat 41/47Ilayhi yuraddu ʿilmu's-sāʿa — the knowledge is referred back to Him

And what al-Aʿrāf adds must be recorded, and it is a datum of the text: al-Aʿrāf builds the sentence twice, and there is a difference between the two:

PlaceSentence
187aQul innamā ʿilmuhā ʿinda rabbī
187bQul innamā ʿilmuhā ʿinda'llāh

The same sentence twice in the same verse; in the first rabbī, in the second Allāh.

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the two sentences themselves. The first answer is given with the messenger's own relation, the second with the name itself.

And between them stands a sentence: yasʾalūnaka ka-annaka ḥafiyyun ʿanhā.

The root ح-ف-ي: to search a thing out thoroughly, to press on it and come to know it well. Ḥafiyy means "one who knows a thing well by inquiring into it". I record this so that it is not confused with the sense "hidden": the sense given by the majority of the lexicographers here is "one who knows well".

And the sentence thaqulat fi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ must be recorded. The root ث-ق-ل: weight. Several explanations are transmitted of the sense of the sentence (that its knowledge weighs heavy in the heavens and the earth; that the event itself weighs heavy upon the heavens and the earth). I convey them as transmitted and impose no preference.

7/188 — the messenger's own limit

A point of word order must be recorded, and this is the work of the verse: the limit is set first for the messenger himself.

Qul lā amliku li-nafsī nafʿan wa lā ḍarran

That is, the sentence does not say "I can bring you no benefit"; it says "I can bring myself none". The widening comes afterwards.

And the second sentence is a conditional pattern, and it counts two results:

ConditionResult 1Result 2
Law kuntu aʿlamu'l-ghaybLa'stakthartu mina'l-khayrI would have gained much goodWa mā massaniya's-sūʾno ill would have touched me

The two results run in opposite directions: one gaining, the other avoiding. And the particle law states an unfulfilled conditionit was treated at the ninety-sixth verse.

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the particle: the sentence shows that the unseen is not known by way of two concrete results.


7/189-193

هُوَ ٱلَّذِى خَلَقَكُم مِّن نَّفْسٍ وَٰحِدَةٍ وَجَعَلَ مِنْهَا زَوْجَهَا لِيَسْكُنَ إِلَيْهَا

Huwa'lladhī khalaqakum min nafsin wāḥidatin wa jaʿala minhā zawjahā li-yaskuna ilayhā, fa-lammā taghashshāhā ḥamalat ḥamlan khafīfan fa-marrat bih, fa-lammā athqalat daʿawa'llāha rabbahumā la-in ātaytanā ṣāliḥan la-nakūnanna mina'sh-shākirīn · Fa-lammā ātāhumā ṣāliḥan jaʿalā lahū shurakāʾa fīmā ātāhumā, fa-taʿāla'llāhu ʿammā yushrikūn

"It is He who created you from a single soul and made from it its mate, that he might find rest in her. When he covered her she bore a light burden and went about with it. Then, when she grew heavy, the two of them called upon God their Lord: 'If You give us a sound child, we shall surely be among the thankful.' · But when He gave them a sound child they set up partners to Him in what He had given them. Exalted is God above what they associate with Him."

The place of the sentence in the sūra

This verse begins with a sentence that returns to the second block of the sūra (Adam): khalaqakum min nafsin wāḥidatin.

And a point of word order must be recorded: the sentence begins with a singular scene, then passes to the dual (rabbahumā, ātāhumā, jaʿalā), and then in the hundred and ninety-third verse turns to the plural (yushrikūn, tattabiʿūkum).

VersePerson
189aSingularnafsin wāḥidatin and its mate
189b-190aDualrabbahumā, jaʿalā
190b-193Pluralʿammā yushrikūn

This transition is one of the places most debated in the classical commentaries, and I give the disagreement in a table. I DO NOT IMPOSE A PREFERENCE.

ReadingWho associates partnersGroundIts difficulty
1Man as a kind — the scene tells not the behaviour of a single couple but of the human speciesThe verse's passing to the plural (yushrikūn); and that the expression nafsin wāḥidatin can state a kindThe passage from the dual pattern to the plural requires explanation in respect of word order
2Later generations — the couple who prayed and those who associate partners are different peopleAt the end of verse 190 fa-taʿāla'llāhu ʿammā yushrikūn is plural; from 191 on the addressees are plainly othersThere is no note of a change of subject in the flow of the sentence
3A particular event — it rests on a transmitted accountReports conveyed in the classical sourcesNo report is transmitted in this commentary; and the accounts conveyed do not agree with one another

The first and second readings can be carried through on the text; I do not impose a preference.

And for the third reading I write plainly, per the method: accounts have been conveyed about this verse that ascribe a fault to prophets. This commentary does not enter into those accounts, because their soundness cannot be established and the detail the Qurʾān does not give is not invented (Method).

لِيَسْكُنَ إِلَيْهَا

The root س-ك-ن: to become still, for motion to subside; and from this, to find rest, to settle. Sakīna and maskan are from the same root.

And the same verb was treated at 30/21 in al-Rūm (li-taskunū ilayhā). I rely on that treatment.

And the particle ilā must be recorded: the verb is tied to a direction — "to come to rest towards her".

فَمَرَّتْ بِهِۦ — the root م-ر-ر: to pass, to go to and fro. The sense of the sentence: that while the burden was light she went on with her ordinary life.

وَٱلَّذِينَ تَدْعُونَ مِن دُونِهِۦ لَا يَسْتَطِيعُونَ نَصْرَكُمْ (192-193) — these two verses are the entry to the long enumeration that will come from the hundred and ninety-fourth verse on, and they will be treated together there.


7/194-198

إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ تَدْعُونَ مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ عِبَادٌ أَمْثَالُكُمْ فَٱدْعُوهُمْ فَلْيَسْتَجِيبُوا۟ لَكُمْ إِن كُنتُمْ صَٰدِقِينَ

Inna'lladhīna tadʿūna min dūni'llāhi ʿibādun amthālukum, fa'dʿūhum fa'l-yastajībū lakum in kuntum ṣādiqīn · A-lahum arjulun yamshūna bihā, am lahum aydin yabṭishūna bihā, am lahum aʿyunun yubṣirūna bihā, am lahum ādhānun yasmaʿūna bihā, quli'dʿū shurakāʾakum thumma kīdūni fa-lā tunẓirūn

"Those you call upon beside God are servants like yourselves. Call upon them, then, and let them answer you — if you are truthful! · Have they feet with which to walk? Or hands with which to grasp? Or eyes with which to see? Or ears with which to hear? Say: 'Call your partners, then devise against me and give me no respite.'"

The structure of the enumeration — and the link with 7/179

The hundred and ninety-fifth verse counts four organs, and the structure of the enumeration must be compared directly with the hundred and seventy-ninth verse. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and one of the most striking overlaps to be recorded:

7/179 — of man7/195 — of those called upon
ConstructionLahum … yafqahūna bihāthe organ is there, it does not workA-lahum … yamshūna bihāthe question whether the organ is there
HeartQulūbun lā yafqahūna bihā(absent)
EyeAʿyunun lā yubṣirūna bihāAʿyunun yubṣirūna bihā
EarĀdhānun lā yasmaʿūna bihāĀdhānun yasmaʿūna bihā
Foot(absent)Arjulun yamshūna bihā
Hand(absent)Aydin yabṭishūna bihā

And the difference between the two verses is exactly this, and it is read from the text:

One — the two verses share the same two words: aʿyun and ādhān; and the same verbs: yubṣirūna bihā, yasmaʿūna bihā.

Two — in 179 the organ is there but the act is not; in 195 the organ itself is asked about.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the words shared by the two verses: the sūra applies the same measure to both sides. First to the one who calls: "you have the organs, you do not use them." Then to the one called upon: "do you have organs?" And the measure is one: not what a thing is, but what it can do.

And this measure had already been used in the sūra — at the hundred and forty-eighth verse, of the calf: a-lam yaraw annahū lā yukallimuhum wa lā yahdīhim sabīlā. That is, the sūra builds the same measure in three separate places (148, 179, 195). This is a countable datum.

عِبَادٌ أَمْثَالُكُمْ

A point of word order must be recorded: the sentence does not deny the existence of those called upon; it states their standing. ʿIbādun amthālukum — "servants like yourselves".

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the word: what is objected to is not their existence but the work attributed to their standing. And this lies on the same line as the sentence asmāʾin sammaytumūhā in the seventy-first verse: the matter is one of naming.

The root ب-ط-ش: to seize a thing with force, to hold it violently. The choice of the word is worth recording: for "to hold" not a plain verb but a verb stating force has been chosen.

ثُمَّ كِيدُونِ فَلَا تُنظِرُونِ

It was recorded at 11/55 in Hūd, and I rely on that treatment: this pattern occurs in other places in the Qurʾān toothumma kīdūni fa-lā tunẓirūn (al-Aʿrāf 7/195); fa-ajmiʿū amrakum wa shurakāʾakum (Yūnus 10/71). These belong to the same family.

The root ن-ظ-ر here means "to grant respite", and it had occurred in the fifteenth verse of the sūra: innaka mina'l-munẓarīn.

The same root in two different places: in the fifteenth verse respite is granted to Iblīs; in the hundred and ninety-fifth the messenger asks for none. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.

And from the hundred and ninety-sixth verse to the hundred and ninety-eighth the enumeration is completed:

VerseWhat is stated
196Inna waliyyiya'llāhu'lladhī nazzala'l-kitāba wa huwa yatawalla'ṣ-ṣāliḥīnwho the guardian is
197Wa'lladhīna tadʿūna min dūnihī lā yastaṭīʿūna naṣrakum wa lā anfusahum yanṣurūnthey cannot even help themselves
198Wa in tadʿūhum ila'l-hudā lā yasmaʿū, wa tarāhum yanẓurūna ilayka wa hum lā yubṣirūnthey look but do not see

And the last sentence in the hundred and ninety-eighth verse must be recorded: wa tarāhum yanẓurūna ilayka wa hum lā yubṣirūn.

This is the coming together in one sentence of the two roots undone at the hundred and forty-third verse (ن-ظ-ر and ب-ص-ر): there is looking, there is no seeing.

I record this as an observation, and its ground is the difference between the two roots: the verse shows within a single sentence that looking and seeing are not the same thing.


7/199-200

خُذِ ٱلْعَفْوَ وَأْمُرْ بِٱلْعُرْفِ وَأَعْرِضْ عَنِ ٱلْجَٰهِلِينَ · وَإِمَّا يَنزَغَنَّكَ مِنَ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنِ نَزْغٌ فَٱسْتَعِذْ بِٱللَّهِ إِنَّهُۥ سَمِيعٌ عَلِيمٌ

Khudhi'l-ʿafwa wa'mur bi'l-ʿurfi wa aʿriḍ ʿani'l-jāhilīn · Wa immā yanzaghannaka mina'sh-shayṭāni nazghun fa'staʿidh bi'llāh, innahū samīʿun ʿalīm

"Take what is easily borne, command what is recognised as good, and turn away from the ignorant. · And if a prompting from Satan should prompt you, take refuge with God. He is hearing, knowing."

Three commands, one verse

At the centre of the ninth block of the sūra stands a series of three commands, and all three look to a different field:

#CommandFieldDirection
1Khudhi'l-ʿafwHis own bearingInward
2Wa'mur bi'l-ʿurfWhat is said to the other sideOutward
3Wa aʿriḍ ʿani'l-jāhilīnWhat is not answeredWithdrawal

The three commands set up a balance: take, say, withdraw. I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the directions of the three verbs.

ٱلْعَفْو — two branches of meaning, and the difference from 2/219 in al-Baqara

The root ع-ف-و carries two branches, and both are used in the Qurʾān:

BranchMeaningWhere
1To wipe away, to pardon, to remit a penaltyWidespread in the Qurʾān
2What is over and above; the surplus beyond needal-Baqara 2/219

It was recorded at 2/219 in al-Baqara, and I rely on that treatment: wa yasʾalūnaka mādhā yunfiqūna quli'l-ʿafw"they ask you what they should spend; say: al-ʿafw." The sense the lexicographers gave there was the second branch: what remains over from one's own need. And it was recorded there: "the same question was asked in verse 215, and the answer was given as a list of recipients. Here the same question comes again, and this time a measure is given."

And at al-Aʿrāf 7/199 the exegetes disagree about the meaning of the same word. I give the disagreement in a table and impose no preference:

ReadingWhat al-ʿafw is hereGround
1To pardon, to forgive — to pass over people's faultsThe first branch of the root; and that aʿriḍ ʿani'l-jāhilīn follows the command
2To take what is easy — to ask of people what they can do, not to press themThe "surplus/ease" branch of the root; and that the verb khudh (take) states a taking of a measure
3To accept what comes easily from people's dispositionsAnother expression of the second reading

Both of the two great readings are transmitted, and they do not exclude each other. I do not impose a preference.

And the difference of sense between the two verses must be recorded, and it can be verified from the two texts:

al-Baqara 2/219al-Aʿrāf 7/199
SubjectSpending — how much is to be givenDealing — how one is to behave with people
VerbQuli'l-ʿafwan answerKhudhi'l-ʿafwa command
ObjectWhat is over from one's goodsWhat is easy/pardoned in conduct

The same word, in two different fields. And in al-Baqara the word is given as a material measure, in al-Aʿrāf as a moral one.

I record this as an observation, and its ground is the context of the two verses.

And the same root had occurred once more within the sūra: at the ninety-fifth verse, ḥattā ʿafaw — there in the sense "they grew many". That is, the root occurs twice in al-Aʿrāf, with two different branches. This is a datum that can be verified within the sūra.

ٱلْعُرْف — a return to the name of the sūra

The root ع-ر-ف is the root of the sūra's name, and its two branches were tabulated at 46-47. I rely on that treatment.

And the distribution of the word in the sūra is completed here. This is a countable datum:

VerseWordBranch
46ʿAla'l-aʿrāfHeight
46Yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhumTo recognise
48Yaʿrifūnahum bi-sīmāhumTo recognise
157Yaʾmuruhum bi'l-maʿrūfThe good that is known and accepted
199Wa'mur bi'l-ʿurfThe good that is known and accepted

Five occurrences, two branches. And the name of the sūra and the command in its last block come from the same root.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the five occurrences: the sūra turns the root from which it takes its name into a command at the end. And the "recognising" branch of the root becomes, in the word ʿurf, "the good that everyone recognises and accepts".

And the difference between ʿurf and maʿrūf must be recorded: both are from the same root and the same field; maʿrūf is a passive participle (what is recognised), while ʿurf is on the pattern of a verbal noun. The hundred and fifty-seventh verse uses maʿrūf, the hundred and ninety-ninth ʿurf. This is a difference that can be verified from the text.

وَأَعْرِضْ عَنِ ٱلْجَٰهِلِينَ — the third link in the index

This bearing was treated in two places in the index, and I rely on both:

PlaceSentenceWhat was recorded there
al-Qaṣaṣ 28/55Wa idhā samiʿu'l-laghwa aʿraḍū ʿanhu … salāmun ʿalaykum lā nabtaghi'l-jāhilīnThe answer is in four parts; and the bearing is given in the context of a response
al-Furqān 25/63Wa idhā khāṭabahumu'l-jāhilūna qālū salāmāThe answer has come down to a single word; in al-Qaṣaṣ there were three sentences, in al-Furqān only salāmā

And what al-Aʿrāf adds must be recorded, and it can be verified from the three texts:

PlaceThe kind of sentenceWhat is given
al-Qaṣaṣ 28/55A statement — the behaviour of a companyAʿraḍūthe past tense
al-Furqān 25/63A statement — an attributeQālū salāmāa word
al-Aʿrāf 7/199A commandAʿriḍa direct command

That is, the same bearing occurs in the index first as a behaviour, then as an attribute, and here as a command. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the moods of the three verses.

And the word jāhil must be recorded: the root ج-ه-ل, according to the lexicographers' note, carries not only "ignorance" but also the sense of angry and unmeasured conduct. In this second sense the word's opposite is ḥilm (composure), not ʿilm. This distinction is transmitted and accords with the context of the verse: what is commanded is not a dispute about knowledge but a withdrawal.

And the root had occurred earlier in the sūra: innakum qawmun tajhalūn (138) — Moses's diagnosis in the face of the demand for a calf. The same root, in two different places.

نَزْغ — the picture in the word

The root ن-ز-غ was undone at 41/36 in Fuṣṣilat, and I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there: to prod, to prick, to come in between and stir up; nazagha baynahum — he set them at odds.

And one thing recorded at 41/36 in Fuṣṣilat belongs directly here, and it was named at 16/98 in al-Naḥl too: the command came immediately after the hardest counsel — there after the command idfaʿ bi'llatī hiya aḥsan (repel evil with what is better). That is, it was saying where the counsel is most likely to crack.

And in al-Aʿrāf the same placement holds, and it can be verified from the two texts:

SūraThe command before itWhat follows
Fuṣṣilat 41/34-36Idfaʿ bi'llatī hiya aḥsan — repel evil with what is betterWa immā yanzaghannaka … fa'staʿidh bi'llāh
al-Aʿrāf 7/199-200Khudhi'l-ʿafwa … wa aʿriḍ ʿani'l-jāhilīn — withdrawWa immā yanzaghannaka … fa'staʿidh bi'llāh

In both sūras the same sentence in the same place: immediately after the hardest command. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the order of the two verses.

And the difference recorded at 16/98 in al-Naḥl is at work here too: in al-Naḥl the time of taking refuge was idhā qaraʾta'l-qurʾān (when you recite); in Fuṣṣilat and al-Aʿrāf it is immā yanzaghannaka — when the prompting comes. I rely on that treatment.

And the pattern of the verb must be recorded: yanzaghannaka — it carries the emphatic nūn. That is, what is stated is not a possibility but a case assumed to occur.

And the answer to the command must be recorded: fa'staʿidh bi'llāh — a single step. The verse describes no method of struggle; it gives a command to turn.


7/201-203

إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ ٱتَّقَوْا۟ إِذَا مَسَّهُمْ طَٰٓئِفٌ مِّنَ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنِ تَذَكَّرُوا۟ فَإِذَا هُم مُّبْصِرُونَ

Inna'lladhīna'ttaqaw idhā massahum ṭāʾifun mina'sh-shayṭāni tadhakkarū fa-idhā hum mubṣirūn · Wa ikhwānuhum yamuddūnahum fi'l-ghayyi thumma lā yuqṣirūn · Wa idhā lam taʾtihim bi-āyatin qālū law la'jtabaytahā, qul innamā attabiʿu mā yūḥā ilayya min rabbī, hādhā baṣāʾiru min rabbikum wa hudan wa raḥmatun li-qawmin yuʾminūn

"When a visitation from Satan touches those who guard themselves, they at once take thought and remember, and then they see. · But their brothers draw them on into error, and never leave off. · And when you do not bring them a sign, they say, 'Why have you not gathered one up yourself?' Say: 'I follow only what is revealed to me from my Lord. This is clear insight from your Lord, and guidance and mercy for a people who believe.'"

طَٰٓئِف — the word and the variant reading

The root ط-و-ف: to go round a thing, to circle it. Ṭāʾif means "one who goes round".

A variant reading is transmitted, and I record it because it affects the meaning:

ReadingTextMeaning
1ṬāʾifOne who circles — who goes round a person watching for an opening
2ṬayfA passing appearance — what shows itself in sleep or waking

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. Both accord with the main picture of the word: something not lasting, but passing by or circling about.

And the measure of the picture is worth recording, and I give it as an observation: in the two hundredth verse there was nazgh (a prod) — a short, sharp contact. Between the hundred and ninety-ninth and the two hundred and first verses the same fact is given in two different pictures: one a prodding, the other a circling about.

فَإِذَا هُم مُّبْصِرُونَ — the sūra's axis of seeing closes

A point of word order must be recorded: the idhā of suddenness (idhā al-fujāʾiyya) is used. That is, the seeing comes not at the end of a process but immediately after the remembering.

And the word mubṣirūn is the last link of the sūra's axis of seeing. This axis is countable:

VerseExpressionState
64Kānū qawman ʿamīnBlindness
179Aʿyunun lā yubṣirūna bihāThe eye is there, the seeing is not
195A-lahum aʿyunun yubṣirūna bihāIs the eye there?
198Yanẓurūna ilayka wa hum lā yubṣirūnThere is looking, there is no seeing
201Fa-idhā hum mubṣirūnThere is seeing

Five occurrences. And four are negative, the fifth positive.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the root shared by the five verses (ب-ص-ر): after describing the state of not seeing four times, the sūra says once how seeing comes. And the way given is tadhakkur (taking thought and remembering), not a proof.

And in the two hundred and third verse the word baṣāʾir comes — from the same root: hādhā baṣāʾiru min rabbikum. That is, the root occurs a sixth time at the closing of the sūra, and this time as the name of the Book.

The root ب-ص-ر: to see; and from this baṣīra — to see the inner face of a thing. Baṣāʾir is the plural of baṣīra.

لَوْلَا ٱجْتَبَيْتَهَا — the word of the objection

The root ج-ب-ي: to gather a thing together, to pick out and collect. Jabā'l-māʾa — he gathered the water in a pool.

And what the objection is must be recorded: the other side assumes that a sign is something that can be gathered up.

And the answer removes exactly that assumption: innamā attabiʿu mā yūḥā ilayya min rabbī — "I follow only what is revealed to me".

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the opposition of the two verbs: in the objection ijtabā (to gather and select), in the answer ittabaʿa (to follow). One states choosing, the other following.


7/204-206

وَإِذَا قُرِئَ ٱلْقُرْءَانُ فَٱسْتَمِعُوا۟ لَهُۥ وَأَنصِتُوا۟ لَعَلَّكُمْ تُرْحَمُونَ

Wa idhā quriʾa'l-qurʾānu fa'stamiʿū lahū wa anṣitū laʿallakum turḥamūn · Wa'dhkur rabbaka fī nafsika taḍarruʿan wa khīfatan wa dūna'l-jahri mina'l-qawli bi'l-ghuduwwi wa'l-āṣāli wa lā takun mina'l-ghāfilīn · Inna'lladhīna ʿinda rabbika lā yastakbirūna ʿan ʿibādatihī wa yusabbiḥūnahū wa lahū yasjudūn

"When the Qurʾān is recited, give ear to it and be silent, that you may be shown mercy. · Remember your Lord within yourself, in humility and in fear, and without loudness of speech, in the morning and in the evening; and do not be of the heedless. · Those who are with your Lord are not too proud to serve Him; they glorify Him, and to Him alone they prostrate themselves."

فَٱسْتَمِعُوا۟ لَهُۥ وَأَنصِتُوا۟ — two commands

The root س-م-ع: to hear. Form VIII (istamaʿa) — to give ear, to listen attentively. That is, the command is not "hear" but "give ear".

The root ن-ص-ت: to fall silent, to stop one's voice and listen. Inṣāt — to leave off speaking and settle to listening.

And the difference between the two commands must be recorded, and this is a point of word order:

CommandWhat is askedDirection
Fa'stamiʿū lahūGiving earPositive — something is done
Wa anṣitūFalling silentNegative — something is left off

Together the two describe a state. And the particle must be recorded: istamiʿū lahū — made transitive with the lām: the place to which the attention is directed is stated.

And per the method I draw a limit: I build no legal ruling from this verse. Which cases the verse covers (within the prayer, outside it, in which circumstances) has been debated among the schools of law, and no side is taken in that debate (Method).

7/205 — the measure of voice

This verse connects directly with the fifty-fifth verse of the sūra, and that link was recorded at verse 55. Here it closes:

VerseExpression
55Udʿū rabbakum taḍarruʿan wa khufyatan
205Wa'dhkur rabbaka fī nafsika taḍarruʿan wa khīfatan wa dūna'l-jahri mina'l-qawl

And two differences must be recorded:

One — at 55 khufya (secrecy), at 205 khīfa (fear). The two words resemble one another but their roots are different: خ-ف-ي (to conceal) and خ-و-ف (to fear). This is a difference that can be verified from the text.

Two — at 205 a note about the voice is added: dūna'l-jahri mina'l-qawl — "without loudness of speech".

The measure of voice in the index — three links

The places in the Qurʾān where the voice is tied to a measure were treated in the index, and I rely on two of them:

PlaceExpressionWhat was recorded there
Luqmān 31/19Wa'ghḍuḍ min ṣawtikThe particle min states a partitive — the verse asks not for silence but for lowering part of the voice
Maryam 19/3Idh nādā rabbahū nidāʾan khafiyyāThe opening of the sūra's axis of voice — the prayer was made in a hidden voice
al-Isrāʾ 17/110Wa lā tajhar bi-ṣalātika wa lā tukhāfit bihā wa'btaghi bayna dhālika sabīlāBetween two extremes — a measure

And al-Aʿrāf 7/205 is the fourth of this chain. What the four verses share and how they differ can be tabulated:

PlaceHow the measure is set
Maryam 19/3As an example — Zechariah's prayer is told
Luqmān 31/19As a command — to lower part of the voice
al-Isrāʾ 17/110As the mean between two extremes — neither shout nor whisper
al-Aʿrāf 7/205As a limitdūna'l-jahr: below a raised voice

All four look the same way, and none of them commands silence. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the words of the four verses.

And the qualification fī nafsika must be recorded: "within yourself". The command determines both a place (within) and a level of voice (dūna'l-jahr).

بِٱلْغُدُوِّ وَٱلْءَاصَالِ — the root غ-د-و: the early time of morning. The root أ-ص-ل: the end of the day, the time from mid-afternoon to evening; the plural of aṣīl.

And these two times are given not as a further ruling of the sūra but as an expression of continuity: the two ends of the day.

And the end of the command must be recorded: wa lā takun mina'l-ghāfilīn.

The root غ-ف-ل had occurred three times in the sūra (136, 172, 179) and the fourth is here. And the fourth comes as a prohibition.

VerseOf whomMood
136The people of PharaohStatementwa kānū ʿanhā ghāfilīn
172The excuse to be pleaded at the resurrectionQuotationinnā kunnā ʿan hādhā ghāfilīn
179Those of whom dharaʾnā li-jahannam is saidDiagnosisulāʾika humu'l-ghāfilūn
205The addresseeProhibitionwa lā takun mina'l-ghāfilīn

Four occurrences, four different moods. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.

7/206 — the sūra closing with prostration

Inna'lladhīna ʿinda rabbikayastakbirūna ʿan ʿibādatihī wa yusabbiḥūnahū wa lahū yasjudūn

This verse is one of the verses of prostration in the Qurʾān. The number of the verses of prostration and which verses fall within them differ among the schools of law; no side is taken in that debate in this commentary and no legal ruling is issued (Method). What is recorded is that this verse is transmitted as one of the verses of prostration, and that note is not disputed.

And the verse's place within the sūra must be recorded, and this is the sūra's most striking closing.

The sūra had opened, in the eleventh verse, with a command to prostrate (usjudū li-Ādama fa-sajadū illā Iblīs) and there there was a making of oneself great (fa-mā yakūnu laka an tatakabbara fīhā — 13).

The two hundred and sixth verse brings back the same two words:

VerseProstrationPride
11-13Usjudū li-Ādamcommanded; one did not do itAn tatakabbara fīhāpride
206Wa lahū yasjudūnit is doneyastakbirūna ʿan ʿibādatihno pride

The same two roots (س-ج-د and ك-ب-ر), at the beginning and at the end of the sūra; at the beginning in the negative, at the end in the affirmative.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the roots shared by the two verses: the sūra opens with the telling of a refusal to prostrate and closes with the telling of those who prostrate. And in between, for two hundred verses, the same matter is worked: the knowledge given, and the response given to it.

And the qualification ʿinda rabbika must be recorded: who is meant is not named. In the classical commentaries it is explained as the angels; I convey this explanation as transmitted and do not name what the text does not name (Method).

And three verbs are counted, and their order is worth recording:

OrderVerbWhat
1Lā yastakbirūna ʿan ʿibādatihNegative — no pride
2Wa yusabbiḥūnahūPositive — glorification
3Wa lahū yasjudūnPositive — prostration

And in the third verb there is a fronting: wa lahū yasjudūn — the object has been brought forward. In Arabic this states ḥaṣr (restriction): to Him alone.

The last word of the sūra is a verb, and that verb is prostration.


The sūra as a whole — looking back

This section gathers the data recorded through the sūra. I give two tables: the first, repetitions countable and verifiable within the sūra; the second, disagreements left without a preference. The first table is a count, not an interpretation; the places that are interpretation are marked separately.

Table A — repetitions verifiable within the sūra

A first count was given in the section on the structure of the sūra; this table completes it and adds the repetitions that emerged from the sections treated.

#RepetitionVerses where it occursHow manyWhat it does
1Yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh59, 65, 73, 854The shared opening of the sequence of prophets; absent in Lot's
2Yā banī Ādam26, 27, 31, 354The address of the third block
3Fa-akhadhathumu'r-rajfatu fa-aṣbaḥū fī dārihim jāthimīn78, 912The word-for-word identical closing of Thamūd and Madyan
4Fa-tawallā ʿanhum wa qāla yā qawmi laqad ablaghtukum … wa naṣaḥtu lakum79, 932Ṣāliḥ and Shuʿayb; the only difference risālata / risālāt
5Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā56, 852The sūra's own command in Shuʿayb's mouth
6Wa yabghūnahā ʿiwajā45, 862An attribute in the scene of the hereafter, a prohibition in Madyan
7Ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn159, 1812For a people, then for all created beings
8Lā tajʿalnā / tajʿalnī maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn47, 1502In the mouths of the people of al-Aʿrāf and of Aaron
9A-wa ʿajibtum an jāʾakum dhikrun … ʿalā rajulin minkum63, 692Noah and Hūd; at 184 it is turned upon the addressee
10Khudhū / khudh … bi-quwwatin145, 1712The same command to Moses and to the community
11Fa'tinā bimā taʿidunā in kunta …70, 772ʿĀd and Thamūd; ṣādiqīn / mursalīn
12Akhrijūhum / la-nukhrijannaka / yukhrijakum / li-tukhrijū (خ-ر-ج)82, 88, 110, 1234The threat and the accusation of driving out
13Jaʿalakum khulafāʾa and yarithūna'l-arḍ69, 74, 1003The chain of succession: ʿĀd → Thamūd → the addressee
14Nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāt / faṣṣalnāhu / tafṣīl / mufaṣṣalāt (ف-ص-ل)32, 52, 133, 145, 1745Setting out in detail
15Ṣurifat / nuṣarrifu / sa-aṣrifu (ص-ر-ف)47, 58, 1463Gazes, signs, the proud
16Ghāfilīn / ghāfilūn (غ-ف-ل)136, 172, 179, 2054Statement → excuse → diagnosis → prohibition
17Yubṣirūn / mubṣirūn / baṣāʾir (ب-ص-ر)179, 195, 198, 201, 2035The axis of seeing; four negative, one positive
18Nāṣiḥ / anṣaḥu / naṣaḥtu (ن-ص-ح)21, 62, 68, 79, 935One in the mouth of Iblīs, four in those of prophets
19Aqʿudanna / lā taqʿudū (ق-ع-د) + ṣirāṭ16, 862Iblīs's intent, a prohibition to Madyan
20Rijz134, 135, 1623The people of Pharaoh and this community
21ʿArsh / yaʿrishūn (ع-ر-ش)54, 1372Sovereignty and the structures brought down
22Tabāraka / barakāt (ب-ر-ك)54, 96, 1373Loftiness, blessing, a blessed land
23Aʿrāf / yaʿrifūna / maʿrūf / ʿurf (ع-ر-ف)46, 46, 48, 157, 1995The name of the sūra turns at the end into a command
24ʿAfaw / al-ʿafw (ع-ف-و)95, 1992"They grew many" and "take the ʿafw" — two branches
25Naquṣṣanna / yaquṣṣūna / fa'qṣuṣ (ق-ص-ص)7, 35, 1763God, the messengers, the addressee
26Munẓarīn / lā tunẓirūn (ن-ظ-ر, respite)15, 1952What was given to Iblīs, what the messenger does not ask
27Sufahāʾ / tajhalūn / jāhilīn66, 138, 155, 1994The same field, four different directions
28Anjaynā64, 72, 83, 1654The announcement of deliverance
29Wa'dhkurū ālāʾa'llāh69, 742The shared sentence of Hūd and Ṣāliḥ
30Udʿū / wa'dʿūhu / fa'dʿūhu — the command to pray55, 56, 1803Bearing, inner state, by which names
31Prostration and pride (س-ج-د + ك-ب-ر)11-13, 2062The opening and the closing of the sūra
32The note of division (min, minhum)159, 162, 168, 1814That no blanket judgement is built
33The two-directional test (ḥasana + sayyiʾa)94-95, 130-131, 1683Hardship and abundance together
34Alqā / alqū / tulqiya (ل-ق-ي)107, 115, 116, 117, 1505Four of them a sign, one the tablets
35The measure "what can it do?"148, 179, 1953The calf, man, those called upon — the same measure
36Bayātan / ḍuḥan / baghtatan — suddenness4, 95, 97, 984The hour of sleep and of play

And two lines must be recorded separately; both are the result of the count above, and I give them as my own reading, and they are not binding:

One — line 35 is the sūra's most consistent measure. In three separate places, for three different addressees, the same question is asked: what are you doing with what you have in hand / what can it do? Of the calf (148: it does not speak, it does not guide), of man (179: the organs are there, they do not work), of those called upon (195: are the organs there?). The measure changes nowhere.

Two — line 32 is the support that comes from within the text for the principle of Method that "no blanket judgement is issued". Even in the places where it says the harshest things about them, the sūra enters a note of division four times. This is a countable datum and is not an interpretation; only the conclusion I draw from it is interpretation.

Table B — disagreements where no preference is made

In the following places the disagreement was tabulated and NO PREFERENCE WAS IMPOSED. The reason is the same every time: either the Qurʾān states no preference, or the matter falls within a field of kalām debate, or none of the explanations transmitted can be given certainty (Method).

#VerseMatterHow many views tabulatedKind
17/1The disconnected letters— (the note in the index: it is not known with certainty)A limit of knowledge
27/46What al-Aʿrāf is3Word / place
37/46-49Who those upon al-Aʿrāf are5 (+ two grammatical questions)Identity
47/46The subject of the sentence lam yadkhulūhā2Word order
57/49Who speaks the command udkhulu'l-janna2Word order
67/46The root of sīmā (و-س-م / س-و-م)2Root
77/54Istawā ʿala'l-ʿarshtafwīḍ / taʾwīl2Of kalām — no polemic entered
87/55Al-muʿtadīn — in supplication or in general2Scope
97/56Baʿda iṣlāḥihā — who set it right(not named)A gap
107/57The reading of bushran (nushran, nashran)2+A variant reading
117/58That the qualification bi-idhni rabbih stands on only one side(no explanation given)Word order
127/80The dropping of akhāhum in the story of Lot1 explanation, no certaintyWord order
137/84The distinction amṭara / maṭaraa transmitted distinction, not certainLanguage
147/88-89The verb ʿawd — does it require prior presence2Language
157/99Makra'llāh — a note of tanzīhthe note entered and the discussion closedOf kalām
167/101The question of the sealthe debate not enteredOf kalām
177/105Ḥaqīqun ʿalā / ʿalayya2A variant reading
187/110Fa-mādhā taʾmurūn — who says it2Word order
197/127Ālihatak / ilāhatak2A variant reading
207/133What qummal isseveral explanationsWord
217/142The reason for the division thirty + ten(no report conveyed)A gap
227/143The question of the vision — what lan tarānī negates3Of kalām — no side taken
237/143Dakkan / dakkāʾan2A variant reading
247/143What awwalu'l-muʾminīn means3Meaning
257/145What bi-aḥsanihā means3Meaning / ruling — no legal conclusion drawn
267/155Tuḍillu bihā man tashāʾthe debate not enteredOf kalām
277/157What ummī means3Meaning
287/160The difference inbajasat / infajarata transmitted explanation, no certaintyWord
297/164The outcome of the third group3A gap
307/166Qiradatan — reality or likeness2Meaning — no side taken
317/169The distinction khalf / khalafa transmitted distinction, not certainLanguage
327/170Yumassikūna / yumsikūna2A variant reading
337/172Alast — a real address, or a description of the fiṭra2Of kalām — no side taken
347/175Who the man wasno name givenA report — not transmitted
357/179Li-jahannama — the lām of outcome or of purpose2Of kalām — no side taken
367/180Yulḥidūna / yalḥadūna2A variant reading
377/187Thaqulat fi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍseveral explanationsMeaning
387/190Who it is that associates partners3 (the third rests on a report, not transmitted)Word order / report
397/199Al-ʿafw — to pardon, or what is easy3Meaning
407/201Ṭāʾif / ṭayf2A variant reading
417/204The scope of the verseno legal ruling issuedLegal
427/206The question of the verses of prostrationno legal ruling issuedLegal
437/206Who ʿinda rabbika arethe transmitted explanation conveyed, not namedA gap

The count: in forty-three places no preference has been made. Seven of them fall directly within a field of kalām debate (7, 15, 16, 22, 26, 33, 35), seven are variant readings (10, 17, 19, 23, 32, 36, 40), three fall within the field of legal ruling (25, 41, 42); the rest are questions of word, of word order and of meaning.

The sūra's own answer

A reading was recorded in the section on the structure of the sūra: the three cornerstones — 11-25 (Adam), 172-174 (alast), 175-177 (the man who slipped out of the signs) — are three moments of the same matter; in all three there is first a giving, and then the passing of what was given out of the hand.

Now, with the whole sūra treated, two things can be added to that reading, and both can be verified from the text:

One — the sūra tells of "what was given passing out of the hand" not only in the three cornerstones but in every block:

BlockWhat was givenWhat happened
II (11-25)A prohibitionIt was broken — then confessed
III (26-36)Clothing and adornmentHeld forbidden, or the measure exceeded
V (54-58)Rain and soilTwo soils, one water — the result diverged
VI (59-102)Messengers and bountiesWa in wajadnā aktharahum la-fāsiqīn (102)
VII (103-171)Deliverance and a BookThe calf (148), the Sabbath (163), ʿaraḍa hādha'l-adnā (169)
VIII (172-186)A testimony and signsIt was forgotten (172); it was slipped off (175)
IX (187-206)A Book, names, commandsWa lā takun mina'l-ghāfilīn (205) — as a prohibition

Two — and the one counter-command the sūra gives is the reverse of the same picture: to hold.

VerseCommand
145Fa-khudhhā bi-quwwatin
170Wa'lladhīna yumassikūna bi'l-kitāb
171Khudhū mā ātaynākum bi-quwwatin
199Khudhi'l-ʿafw
205Wa'dhkur rabbaka fī nafsik

In five places verbs from the same field: take, hold fast, remember.

I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the two tables above. The sūra works one question through two hundred and six verses — what does man do with the knowledge given to him? — and gives its answer with a command: hold it in your hand.

And the last verse shows what answers to this: lā yastakbirūna ʿan ʿibādatihī wa yusabbiḥūnahū wa lahū yasjudūn.

The sūra closes with prostration.

70 sections

  1. al-Aʿrāf 7:1
  2. al-Aʿrāf 7:2-3
  3. al-Aʿrāf 7:4-5
  4. al-Aʿrāf 7:6-7
  5. al-Aʿrāf 7:8-9
  6. al-Aʿrāf 7:10
  7. al-Aʿrāf 7:11
  8. al-Aʿrāf 7:12
  9. al-Aʿrāf 7:13
  10. al-Aʿrāf 7:14-15
  11. al-Aʿrāf 7:16-17
  12. al-Aʿrāf 7:18
  13. al-Aʿrāf 7:19
  14. al-Aʿrāf 7:20-21
  15. al-Aʿrāf 7:22
  16. al-Aʿrāf 7:23
  17. al-Aʿrāf 7:24-25
  18. al-Aʿrāf 7:26
  19. al-Aʿrāf 7:27
  20. al-Aʿrāf 7:28-30
  21. al-Aʿrāf 7:31
  22. al-Aʿrāf 7:32
  23. al-Aʿrāf 7:33
  24. al-Aʿrāf 7:34
  25. al-Aʿrāf 7:35-36
  26. al-Aʿrāf 7:37
  27. al-Aʿrāf 7:38-39
  28. al-Aʿrāf 7:40-41
  29. al-Aʿrāf 7:42-43
  30. al-Aʿrāf 7:44-45
  31. al-Aʿrāf 7:46-49 — The people of al-Aʿrāf
  32. al-Aʿrāf 7:50-51
  33. al-Aʿrāf 7:52-53
  34. al-Aʿrāf 7:54
  35. al-Aʿrāf 7:55-56
  36. al-Aʿrāf 7:57-58
  37. al-Aʿrāf 7:59-93 — The sequence of prophets: al-Aʿrāf's own pattern
  38. al-Aʿrāf 7:65-72 — Hūd
  39. al-Aʿrāf 7:73-79 — Ṣāliḥ
  40. al-Aʿrāf 7:80-84 — Lot
  41. al-Aʿrāf 7:85-93 — Shuʿayb
  42. al-Aʿrāf 7:94-95
  43. al-Aʿrāf 7:96-99
  44. al-Aʿrāf 7:100-102
  45. al-Aʿrāf 7:103-108
  46. al-Aʿrāf 7:109-116
  47. al-Aʿrāf 7:117-126
  48. al-Aʿrāf 7:127-129
  49. al-Aʿrāf 7:130-136
  50. al-Aʿrāf 7:137-141
  51. al-Aʿrāf 7:142-143
  52. al-Aʿrāf 7:144-147
  53. al-Aʿrāf 7:148-151
  54. al-Aʿrāf 7:152-154
  55. al-Aʿrāf 7:155-157
  56. al-Aʿrāf 7:158
  57. al-Aʿrāf 7:159-162
  58. al-Aʿrāf 7:163-166
  59. al-Aʿrāf 7:167-171
  60. al-Aʿrāf 7:172-174
  61. al-Aʿrāf 7:175-177
  62. al-Aʿrāf 7:178-179
  63. al-Aʿrāf 7:180-181
  64. al-Aʿrāf 7:182-186
  65. al-Aʿrāf 7:187-188
  66. al-Aʿrāf 7:189-193
  67. al-Aʿrāf 7:194-198
  68. al-Aʿrāf 7:199-200
  69. al-Aʿrāf 7:201-203
  70. al-Aʿrāf 7:204-206